Ford 2013 E 150 Owners Manual

2015-10-23

: Ford Ford-2013-Ford-E-150-Owners-Manual-815467 ford-2013-ford-e-150-owners-manual-815467 ford pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 444 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

2013 E-SERIES Owner’s Manual
DC2J 19A321 AA | May 2013 | Third Printing | Owner’s Manual | E-Series | Litho in U.S.A.
ford.ca
fordowner.com
2013 E-SERIES Owner’s Manual
Introduction 8
Child Safety 17
Child seat positioning ...................................19
Booster seats .........................................21
Installing child seats ....................................24
Safety Belts 35
Fastening the safety belts ................................37
Safety belt height adjustment .............................40
Safetybeltwarninglightandindicatorchime..................40
Safety belt-minder .....................................41
Child restraint and safety belt maintenance ...................43
Supplementary Restraints System 44
Driver and passenger airbags .............................46
Crash sensors and airbag indicator .........................53
Airbag disposal........................................54
Keys and Remote Control 55
General information on radio frequencies.....................55
Remote control .......................................56
Replacing a lost key or remote control.......................57
Locks 59
Locking and unlocking ..................................59
Security 64
SecuriLock® passive anti-theft system.......................64
Steering Wheel 67
Adjusting the steering wheel ..............................67
Wipers and Washers 68
Windshield wipers .....................................68
Windshield washers ....................................68
Table of Contents 1
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Lighting 69
Lighting control .......................................69
Instrument lighting dimmer...............................70
Daytime running lamps ..................................70
Turn signal control .....................................71
Interior lamps ........................................71
Windows and Mirrors 73
Power windows .......................................73
Exteriormirrors.......................................74
Interiormirrors .......................................76
Sunvisors...........................................77
Instrument Cluster 78
Gauges .............................................78
Warning lamps and indicators .............................79
Audible warnings and indicators ...........................83
Information Displays 84
Controls.............................................84
Information messages ...................................89
Climate Control 92
Manual heating and air conditioning ........................92
Seats 97
Sitting in the correct position .............................97
Head restraints........................................98
Manual seats .........................................98
Power seats .........................................100
Rear seats ..........................................100
Auxiliary Power Points 105
Starting and Stopping the Engine 108
Ignition switch .......................................109
Engine block heater ...................................113
2Table of Contents
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Fuel and Refueling 115
Fuel quality .........................................116
Running out of fuel....................................117
Refueling...........................................118
Fuel consumption .....................................119
Transmission 124
Transmission operation .................................124
Automatic transmission.................................124
Brakes 132
Brakes .............................................132
Hints on driving with anti-lock brakes ......................133
Parking brake........................................133
Traction Control 134
TractionControl™....................................134
Stability Control 135
AdvanceTrac® .......................................137
Parking Aids 138
Sensing system.......................................138
Rear-view camera system ...............................139
Cruise Control 144
Using cruise control ...................................144
Driving Aids 146
Steering ............................................146
Load Carrying 147
Vehicle loading .......................................147
Table of Contents 3
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Towing 154
Trailertowing........................................154
Trailer brake controller-integrated .........................161
Wrecker towing ......................................167
Recreational towing ...................................168
Driving Hints 169
Economical driving ....................................171
Floormats..........................................173
Roadside Emergencies 175
Getting roadside assistance ..............................175
Hazard flasher control..................................177
Fuel pump shut-off ....................................177
Jump-starting the vehicle ...............................178
Customer Assistance 181
Reporting safety defects (U.S. only) .......................188
Reporting safety defects (Canada only) .....................188
Fuses 189
Changing a fuse ......................................189
Fuse specification chart ................................190
Maintenance 198
General information ...................................198
Opening and closing the hood ............................199
Under hood overview ..................................200
Engine oil dipstick ....................................201
Engine oil check......................................201
Engine coolant check ..................................202
Automatic transmission fluid check ........................207
Brake fluid check .....................................215
Power steering fluid check ..............................215
Fuel filter...........................................215
4Table of Contents
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Washer fluid check ....................................216
Changing the vehicle battery .............................216
Checking the wiper blades ..............................219
Changing the wiper blades ..............................219
Air filter(s) .........................................219
Adjusting the headlamps ................................221
Changing a bulb ......................................224
Removing a headlamp ..................................224
Vehicle Care 231
Cleaning products.....................................231
Cleaning the exterior ..................................231
Waxing.............................................233
Repairing minor paint damage ............................233
Cleaning the engine ...................................233
Cleaning the windows and wiper blades .....................234
Cleaning the interior ...................................235
Cleaning the instrument panel and instrument cluster lens .......235
Cleaning leather seats ..................................236
Cleaning the alloy wheels ...............................237
Vehiclestorage.......................................237
Wheels and Tires 240
Tire care ...........................................242
Using snow chains ....................................260
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ...................261
Changing a road wheel .................................268
Technical specifications.................................276
Wheel lug nut torque ..................................276
Table of Contents 5
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Capacities and Specifications 278
Engine specifications ..................................278
Engine drivebelt ......................................278
Part numbers ........................................285
Vehicle identification number ............................285
Vehicle certification label ...............................286
Transmission code designation............................287
Accessories 288
Accessories .........................................288
Upfitter controls ......................................290
Ford Extended Service Plan 291
Audio System 294
AM/FMstereo........................................296
AM/FM/CD with SYNC .................................297
Satellite radio information ...............................299
Auxiliary input jack ...................................302
USB port ...........................................304
SYNC® 305
Pairing your phone for the first time .......................310
911 Assist™ .........................................325
Vehicle Health Report ..................................328
Navigation System (If Equipped) 353
Statusbars..........................................356
Loading pictures......................................357
Voice recognition .....................................358
Accessing media features ...............................363
Jukebox features .....................................380
Recording (saving) music to your jukebox ...................380
Accessing the music in your jukebox .......................381
Creating a playlist.....................................382
6Table of Contents
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Where am I?.........................................383
Accessing the help screen ...............................386
Navigation features ....................................387
Appendices 408
Navigation end user license agreement......................416
Scheduled Maintenance 421
Normal scheduled maintenance and log .....................426
Index 437
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to
print. In the interest of continuous development, we reserve the right to change
specifications, design or equipment at any time without notice or obligation. No
part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval
system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our
written permission. Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2013
Table of Contents 7
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
Thank you for choosing Ford. We recommend that you take some time to
get to know your vehicle by reading this manual. The more that you
know about it, the greater the safety and pleasure you will get from
driving it.
WARNING: Always drive with due care and attention when
using and operating the controls and features on your vehicle.
Note: This manual describes product features and options available
throughout the range of available models, sometimes even before they
are generally available. It may describe options not fitted to your vehicle.
Note: Some of the illustrations in this manual may be used for different
models, so may appear different to you on your vehicle. However, the
essential information in the illustrations is always correct.
Note: Always use and operate your vehicle in line with all applicable
laws and regulations.
Note: Pass on this manual when selling your vehicle. It is an integral
part of the vehicle.
This manual may qualify the location of a component as left-hand side or
right-hand side. The side is determined when facing forward in the seat.
A. Right-hand side
B. Left-hand side
Protecting the Environment
You must play your part in protecting the environment. Correct
vehicle usage and the authorized disposal of waste, cleaning
and lubrication materials are significant steps toward this aim.
A
B
8Introduction
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
WARNING: You risk death or serious injury to yourself and
others if you do not follow the instruction highlighted by the
warning symbol.
These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.
Symbol Description Symbol Description Symbol Description
Safety alert See Owner’s
Manual
Anti-lock
braking
system
Avoid
smoking,
flames, or
sparks
Battery Battery acid
Brake fluid –
non
petroleum
base
Brake system Cabin air
filter
Check fuel
cap
Child Safety
Door Lock
and Unlock
Child seat
lower anchor
Child seat
tether anchor
Cruise
control
Do not open
when hot
Engine air
filter
Engine
coolant
Engine
coolant
temperature
Engine oil Explosive gas Fan warning
Fasten safety
belt
Front airbag Front fog
lamps
Fuel pump
reset
Fuse
compartment
Hazard
warning
flasher
Introduction 9
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Symbol Description Symbol Description Symbol Description
Heated rear
window
Interior
luggage
compartment
release
Jack
Lighting
control
Low tire
pressure
warning
Maintain
correct fluid
level
Panic alarm Parking aid
system
Parking
brake system
Power
steering fluid
Power
windows
front and
rear
Power
window
lockout
Service
engine soon
Side airbag Stability
control
Windshield
defrost and
demist
Windshield
washer and
wiper
DATA RECORDING
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and
storing diagnostic information about your vehicle. This potentially
includes information about the performance or status of various systems
and modules in the vehicle, such as engine, throttle, steering or brake
systems. In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle, Ford
Motor Company, Ford of Canada, and service and repair facilities may
access or share among them vehicle diagnostic information received
through a direct connection to your vehicle when diagnosing or servicing
your vehicle. Additionally, when your vehicle is in for service or repair,
Ford Motor Company, Ford of Canada, and service and repair facilities
may access or share among them data for vehicle improvement purposes.
For U.S. only (if equipped), if you choose to use the SYNC® Vehicle
Health Report, you consent that certain diagnostic information may also
be accessed electronically by Ford Motor Company and Ford authorized
service facilities, and that the diagnostic information may be used for any
purpose. See the SYNC® chapter for more information.
10 Introduction
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Event Data Recording
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The
main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle; this data will assist in understanding how a
vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period
of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
•How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
•Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
•How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator
and/or the brake pedal;
•How fast the vehicle was travelling;
•Where the driver was positioning the steering wheel.
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
Note: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial
crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under
normal driving conditions and no personal data or information
(e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) is recorded (see
limitations regarding 911 Assist and Traffic, Directions and
Information privacy below). However, parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement,
that have such special equipment, can read the information if
they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. Ford Motor Company
and Ford of Canada do not access event data recorder
information without obtaining consent, unless pursuant to court
order or where required by law enforcement, other government
authorities or other third parties acting with lawful authority.
Other parties may seek to access the information independently
of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada.
Introduction 11
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Note: Including to the extent that any law pertaining to Event
Data Recorders applies to SYNC® or its features, please note the
following: Once 911 Assist (if equipped) is enabled (set ON), 911
Assist may, through any paired and connected cell phone, disclose
to emergency services that the vehicle has been in a crash
involving the deployment of an airbag or, in certain vehicles, the
activation of the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or updates
to 911 Assist may also be capable of being used to electronically
or verbally provide to 911 operators the vehicle location (such as
latitude and longitude), and/or other details about the vehicle or
crash or personal information about the occupants to assist 911
operators to provide the most appropriate emergency services. If
you do not want to disclose this information, do not activate the
911 Assist feature. See your SYNC® chapter for more
information.
Additionally, when you connect to Traffic, Directions and
Information (if equipped, U.S. only), the service uses GPS
technology and advanced vehicle sensors to collect the vehicle’s
current location, travel direction, and speed (“vehicle travel
information”), only to help provide you with the directions,
traffic reports, or business searches that you request. If you do
not want Ford or its vendors to receive this information, do not
activate the service. Ford Motor Company and the vendors it uses
to provide you with this information do not store your vehicle
travel information. For more information, see Traffic, Directions
and Information, Terms and Conditions. See your SYNC® chapter
for more information.
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING: Some constituents of engine exhaust, certain vehicle
components, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
PERCHLORATE MATERIAL
Note: Certain components in your vehicle, such as airbag modules,
safety belt pretensioners, and remote control batteries, may contain
perchlorate material. Special handling may apply for service or vehicle
end of life disposal. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate for
more information.
12 Introduction
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
FORD CREDIT (U.S. ONLY)
Ford Credit offers a full range of financing and lease plans to help you
acquire your vehicle. If you have financed or leased your vehicle through
Ford Credit, thank you for your business.
For your convenience, we offer a number of ways to contact us, as well
as help manage your account.
Phone: 1-800-727-7000
For more information regarding Ford Credit, as well as access to
Account Manager, please go to www.fordcredit.com.
REPLACEMENT PARTS RECOMMENDATION
Your vehicle has been built to the highest standards using quality parts.
We recommend that you demand the use of genuine Ford and Motorcraft
parts whenever your vehicle requires scheduled maintenance or repair.
You can clearly identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts by looking for
the Ford, FoMoCo or Motorcraft branding on the parts or their
packaging.
Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical Repairs
One of the best ways for you to make sure that your vehicle provides
years of service is to have it maintained in line with our
recommendations using parts that conform to the specifications detailed
in this owner’s manual. Genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts meet or
exceed these specifications.
Collision Repairs
We hope that you never experience a collision, but accidents do happen.
Genuine Ford replacement collision parts meet our stringent
requirements for fit, finish, structural integrity, corrosion protection and
dent resistance. During vehicle development, we validate that these parts
deliver the intended level of protection as a whole system. A great way
to know for sure you are getting this level of protection is to use genuine
Ford replacement collision parts.
Warranty on Replacement Parts
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement parts are the only
replacement parts that benefit from a Ford Warranty. Damage caused to
your vehicle as a result of the failure of non-Ford parts may not be
covered by the Ford Warranty. For additional information, see the terms
and conditions of the Ford Warranty.
Introduction 13
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered by
your vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty, see the warranty
information that is provided to you along with your owner’s manual.
Special Instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic
controls.
WARNING: Please read the Supplementary Restraints System
chapter. Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions
could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Front seat mounted rear-facing child or infant seats
should NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag.
Notice to owners of pickup trucks and utility type vehicles
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover
rate than other types of vehicles.
Before you drive your vehicle, please read this Owner’s Manual carefully.
Your vehicle is not a passenger car. As with other vehicles of this type,
failure to operate your vehicle correctly may result in loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury or death.
Using your vehicle as an ambulance
If your light truck is equipped with the Ford Ambulance Preparation
Package, it may be utilized as an ambulance. Ford urges ambulance
manufacturers to follow the recommendations of the Ford Incomplete
Vehicle Manual, Ford Truck Body Builder’s Layout Book and the
Qualified Vehicle Modifiers (QVM) Guidelines as well as pertinent
supplements. For additional information, please contact the Truck Body
Builders Advisory Service at http://www.fleet.ford.com/truckbbas/ and
then by selecting “Contact Us” or by phone at 1–877–840–4338.
14 Introduction
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Use of your Ford light truck as an ambulance, without the Ford
Ambulance Preparation Package voids the Ford New Vehicle Limited
Warranty and may void the Emissions Warranties. In addition, ambulance
usage without the preparation package could cause high underbody
temperatures, overpressurized fuel and a risk of spraying fuel which
could lead to fires.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Ford Ambulance Preparation
Package, it will be indicated on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label. The label is located on the driver’s side door pillar or on the rear
edge of the driver’s door. You can determine whether the ambulance
manufacturer followed Ford’s recommendations by directly contacting
that manufacturer.
MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT
Using mobile communications equipment is becoming increasingly
important in the conduct of business and personal affairs. However, you
must not compromise your own or others’ safety when using such
equipment. Mobile communications can enhance personal safety and
security when appropriately used, particularly in emergency situations.
Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications
equipment to avoid negating these benefits.
Mobile communication equipment includes, but is not limited to, cellular
phones, pagers, portable email devices, text messaging devices and
portable two-way radios.
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off
the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your
vehicle. We recommend against the use of any handheld device while
driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the
use of electronic devices while driving.
Introduction 15
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
EXPORT UNIQUE (NON–UNITED STATES/CANADA) VEHICLE
SPECIFIC INFORMATION
For your particular global region, your vehicle may be equipped with
features and options that are different from the features and options that
are described in this owner’s manual. A market unique supplement may
be supplied that complements this book. By referring to the market
unique supplement, if provided, you can properly identify those features,
recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle. This
owner’s manual is written primarily for the U.S. and Canadian Markets.
Features or equipment listed as standard may be different on units built
for Export. See this owner’s manual for all other required
information and warnings.
16 Introduction
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety
restraints for children.
WARNING: Always make sure your child is secured properly in a
device that is appropriate for their height, age and weight. Child
safety restraints must be bought separately from your vehicle. Failure
to follow these instructions and guidelines may result in an increased
risk of serious injury or death to your child.
WARNING: All children are shaped differently. The
recommendations for safety restraints are based on probable
child height, age and weight thresholds from NHTSA and other safety
organizations, or are the minimum requirements of law. Ford
recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician (CPST) and consulting your pediatrician to make sure your
child seat is appropriate for your child, and is compatible with and
properly installed in your vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting station
and CPST, contact the NHTSA toll free at 1-888-327-4236 or on the
internet at http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, check with your local
St. John Ambulance office for referral to a CPST or for further
information, contact your provincial ministry of transportation, or locate
your local St. John Ambulance office by searching for St. John
Ambulance on the internet, or Transport Canada at 1–800–333–0371
(http://www.tc.gc.ca). Failure to properly restrain children in safety
seats made especially for their height, age, and weight may result in an
increased risk of serious injury or death to your child.
Child Safety 17
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Child size, height, weight, or
age
Recommended
restraint type
Infants or
toddlers
Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or
less (generally age four or
younger).
Use a child safety seat
(sometimes called an
infant carrier,
convertible seat, or
toddler seat).
Small
children
Children who have outgrown or no
longer properly fit in a child safety
seat (generally children who are
less than 4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m) tall,
are greater than age four (4) and
less than age twelve (12), and
between 40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb
(36 kg) and upward to 100 lb
(45 kg) if recommended by your
child restraint manufacturer).
Use a belt-positioning
booster seat.
Larger
children
Children who have outgrown or no
longer properly fit in a
belt-positioning booster seat
(generally children who are at least
4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m) tall or greater
than 80 lb (36 kg) or 100 lb
(45 kg) if recommended by child
restraint manufacturer).
Use a vehicle safety
belt having the lap
belt snug and low
across the hips,
shoulder belt
centered across the
shoulder and chest,
and seat back upright.
•You are required by law to properly use safety seats for infants and
toddlers in the U.S. and Canada.
•Many states and provinces require that small children use approved
booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 4 feet 9 inches
(1.45 meters) tall, or 80 pounds (36 kilograms). Check your local and
state or provincial laws for specific requirements about the safety of
children in your vehicle.
•When possible, always properly restrain children twelve (12) years of
age and under in a rear seating position of your vehicle. Accident
statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seating positions than in a front seating position.
18 Child Safety
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
CHILD SEAT POSITIONING
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
Never place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If
you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the
vehicle seat upon which the child seat is installed all the way back.
When possible, all children age 12 and under should be properly
restrained in a rear seating position. If all children cannot be seated and
restrained properly in a rear seating position, properly restrain the
largest child in the front seat.
WARNING: Always carefully follow the instructions and
warnings provided by the manufacturer of any child restraint to
determine if the restraint device is appropriate for your child’s size,
height, weight, or age. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions and warnings provided for installation and use in
conjunction with the instructions and warnings provided by your
vehicle manufacturer. A safety seat that is improperly installed or
utilized, is inappropriate for your child’s height, age or weight, or does
not properly fit the child, may increase the risk of serious injury or
death.
WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap
while your vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a crash, which may result in serious injury or death.
WARNING: Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a child.
They can slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or
death in a crash.
WARNING: Always restrain an unoccupied child seat or booster
seat. These objects may become projectiles in a crash or sudden
stop, which may increase the risk of serious injury.
Child Safety 19
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
WARNING: Never place, or allow a child to place, the shoulder
belt under a child’s arm or behind the back because it reduces
the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk
of injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: To avoid risk of injury, do not leave children or pets
unattended in your vehicle.
Restraint
Type
Com-
bined
weight
of child
and
child
re-
straint
seat
Use any attachment method as indicated
below by X.
LATCH
(lower
an-
chors
and
top
tether
an-
chor)
LATCH
(lower
an-
chors
only)
Safety
belt
and
top
tether
anchor
Safety
belt and
LATCH
(lower
anchors
and top
tether
anchor)
Safety
belt
only
Rear-facing
child seat
Up to
65 lb
(29.5 kg)
XX
Rear-facing
child seat
Over
65 lb
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-
facing child
seat
Up to
65 lb
(29.5 kg)
XXX
Forward-
facing child
seat
Over
65 lb
(29.5 kg)
XX
Note: The child seat must rest tightly against the vehicle seat upon
which it is installed. It may be necessary to lift or remove the head
restraint. See the Seats chapter for information on head restraints.
20 Child Safety
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
BOOSTER SEATS
WARNING: Never place, or allow a child to place, the shoulder
belt under a child’s arm or behind the back because it reduces
the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk
of injury or death in a crash.
Use a belt-positioning booster seat for children who have outgrown or no
longer properly fit in a child safety seat (generally children who are less
than 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall, are greater than age four (4) and
less than age twelve (12), and between 40 pounds (18 kilograms) and
80 pounds (36 kilograms) and upward to 100 pounds (45 kilograms) if
recommended by your child restraint manufacturer). Many state and
provincial laws require that children use approved booster seats until
they reach age eight (8), a height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall, or
80 pounds (36 kilograms).
Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these
questions when the child is seated without a booster seat.
•Can the child sit all the way
back against their vehicle seat
with knees bent comfortably at
the edge of the seat cushion?
•Can the child sit without
slouching?
•Does the lap belt rest low across the hips?
•Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest?
•Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
Always use booster seats in conjunction with your vehicle lap and
shoulder belt.
Child Safety 21
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Types of Booster Seats
•Backless booster seats
If your backless booster seat has a removable shield, remove the shield.
If a vehicle seating position has a low seat back or no head restraint, a
backless booster seat may place your child’s head (as measured at the
tops of the ears) above the top of the seat. In this case, move the
backless booster to another seating position with a higher seat back or
head restraint and lap and shoulder belts, or consider using a high back
booster seat.
•High back booster seats
If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot find a seating position that
adequately supports your child’s head, a high back booster seat would be
a better choice.
Children and booster seats vary in size and shape. Choose a booster that
keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips, never up across the
stomach, and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest and
rest snugly near the center of the shoulder. The following drawings
compare the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt uncomfortably close to
the neck and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder. The
drawings also show how the lap belt should be low and snug across the
child’s hips.
22 Child Safety
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat upon which it is being used,
placing a rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster
seat may improve this condition. Do not introduce any item thicker than
this under the booster seat. Check with the booster seat manufacturer’s
instructions.
Child Safety 23
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
INSTALLING CHILD SEATS
Child Seats
Use a child safety seat (sometimes
called an infant carrier, convertible
seat, or toddler seat) for infants,
toddlers or children weighing
40 pounds (18 kilograms) or less
(generally age four or younger).
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
Never place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If
you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the
seat upon which the child seat is installed all the way back.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in the rear
seat whenever possible.
WARNING: Depending on where you secure a child restraint,
and depending on the child restraint design, you may block
access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies or LATCH lower
anchors, rendering those features potentially unusable. To avoid risk of
injury, occupants should only use seating positions where they are able
to be properly restrained.
24 Child Safety
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
When installing a child safety seat with combination lap and shoulder
belts:
•Use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating position.
•Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap
and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the
buckle.
•Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety
seat, with the tongue between the child seat and the release button,
to prevent accidental unbuckling.
•Place the vehicle seat upon which the child seat will be installed in
the upright position.
•Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode. See Step 5. This
vehicle does not require the use of a locking clip.
Perform the following steps when installing the child seat with lap and
shoulder belts:
Note: Although the child seat illustrated is a forward facing child seat,
the steps are the same for installing a rear facing child seat.
1. Position the child safety seat in a
seat with a combination lap and
shoulder belt.
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt
and then grasp the shoulder belt
and lap belt together.
Child Safety 25
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
3. While holding the shoulder and
lap belt portions together, route the
tongue through the child seat
according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure
the belt webbing is not twisted.
4. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) for that seating position until
you hear a snap and feel the latch
engage. Make sure the tongue is
latched securely by pulling on it.
5. To put the retractor in the
automatic locking mode, grasp the
shoulder portion of the belt and pull
downward until all of the belt is
pulled out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is available on the front passenger
and rear seats. This vehicle does not require the use of a locking clip.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove slack. The belt will click as it
retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is
in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt
out). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat Steps 5
and 6.
26 Child Safety
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
8. Remove remaining slack from the
belt. Force the seat down with extra
weight, for example, by pressing
down or kneeling on the child
restraint while pulling up on the
shoulder belt in order to force slack
from the belt.
This is necessary to remove the remaining slack that will exist once the
extra weight of the child is added to the child restraint. It also helps to
achieve the proper snugness of the child seat to your vehicle.
Sometimes, a slight lean toward the buckle will provide extra help to
remove remaining slack from the belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat is equipped). See Using
Tether Straps.
10. Before placing the child in the
seat, forcibly move the seat forward
and back to make sure the seat is
securely held in place.
To check this, grab the seat at the belt path and attempt to move it side
to side and forward and back. There should be no more than 1 inch (2.5
centimeters) of movement for proper installation.
Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger
Safety Technician to make certain the child restraint is properly installed.
In Canada, check with your local St. John Ambulance office for referral
to a Child Passenger Safety Technician.
Child Safety 27
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH)
WARNING: Never attach two child safety seats to the same
anchor. In a crash, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold
two child safety seat attachments and may break, causing serious injury
or death.
The LATCH system is composed of three vehicle anchor points: two
lower anchors located where the vehicle seat back and seat cushion meet
(called the seat bight) and one top tether anchor located behind that
seating position.
LATCH compatible child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted
attachments that connect to the two lower anchors at the LATCH
equipped seating positions in your vehicle. This type of attachment
method eliminates the need to use safety belts to attach the child seat,
however the safety belt can still be used to attach the child seat. For
forward-facing child seats, the top tether strap must also be attached to
the proper top tether anchor, if a top tether strap has been provided
with your child seat.
LATCH lower anchors
Top tether anchors
28 Child Safety
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors, top tether anchors, or both at
the following locations:
•Five passenger crew van
•Seven passenger wagon
•Eight passenger wagon
Child Safety 29
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
•Eleven passenger wagon
•Twelve passenger wagon
•Fifteen passenger wagon
30 Child Safety
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
The LATCH lower anchors are located at the rear section of the rear seat
between the cushion and seatback.
Follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions to properly install a
child seat with LATCH attachments. Follow the instructions on attaching
child safety seats with tether straps.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child seat only to the anchors
shown.
Each time you use the safety seat, check that the seat is properly
attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor, if applicable. Tug the
child seat from side to side and forward and back where it is secured to
the vehicle. The seat should move less than one inch when you do this
for a proper installation. If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the
risk of a child being injured in a crash greatly increases.
Combining Safety Belt and LATCH Lower Anchors for Attaching
Child Safety Seats
When used in combination, either the safety belt or the LATCH lower
anchors may be attached first, provided a proper installation is achieved.
Attach the tether strap afterward, if included with the child seat.
Using Tether Straps
Many forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap
which extends from the back of the child safety seat and hooks
to an anchoring point called the top tether anchor. Tether
straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats.
Contact the manufacturer of your child seat for information about
ordering a tether strap, or to obtain a longer tether strap if the tether
strap on your safety seat does not reach the appropriate top tether
anchor in the vehicle.
Child Safety 31
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate tether anchor as shown.
The tether strap may not work properly if attached somewhere other
than the correct tether anchor.
Note: If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments, and have
attached the top tether strap to the proper top tether anchor, do not
tighten the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off the vehicle seat
cushion when the child is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug
without lifting the front of the child seat. Keeping the child seat just
touching the vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash.
Perform the following steps to install a child safety seat with tether
anchors:
Front passenger seating position
You can attach the tether directly to
the rear of the front seat.
1. Adjust the front passenger seat fully forward.
2. Route the child safety seat tether
strap over the back of the front
right-hand passenger seat as shown.
32 Child Safety
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
3. Clip the tether strap hook to the
seat pedestal at the location shown.
If the tether strap is clipped
incorrectly, the child safety seat
may not be retained properly in the
event of a crash.
4. Adjust the front passenger seat to
the full rearward position.
5. Tighten the child safety seat
tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being
injured in a crash greatly increases.
Second Row Bucket Seats
You can attach the tether strap
directly to the tether bracket under
the back edge of the seat cushion.
1. Route the child safety tether strap over the back of the left hand or
right hand second row bucket seat.
2. Clip the tether strap hook to the
seat pedestal at the location shown.
If the tether strap is clipped
incorrectly, the child safety seat
may not be retained properly in the
event of a crash.
3. Tighten the child safety seat
tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being
injured in a crash greatly increases.
Child Safety 33
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Second, Third, Fourth, and Fifth Row Bench Seats
For the center position of a
three-passenger bench seat, attach
the tether strap directly to the
tether bracket provided under the
back edge of the seat cushion. For
the outboard positions, attach the
tether strap to the slot in the side
of the seat pedestal.
1. For any three-passenger bench seat, place the child safety seat in any
of the seating positions. For the four passenger bench, the tether
anchors are located on the left and right hand positions only.
2. Route the child safety tether
strap over the back of the bench
seat.
3. For any three passenger bench,
clip the center tether strap hook to
the tether bracket mounted under
rear rail of seat cushion frame. For
either the three or four passenger
bench, clip the outboard tether
strap hooks to the tether bracket
slot provided on the left side of
each seat pedestal. The slot is
located between the two holes.
If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly, the child safety seat may not be
retained properly in the event of a crash.
4. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being
injured in a crash greatly increases.
If your child restraint system is equipped with a tether strap, and the
child restraint manufacturer recommends its use, Ford also recommends
its use.
34 Child Safety
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seat back upright
and the lap belt snug and low across the hips.
WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap
while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a crash.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit
where they can be properly restrained.
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver,
should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an
airbag supplemental restraint system is provided. Failure to properly
wear your safety belt could seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
WARNING: It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow
people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a safety belt properly.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a safety
belt.
WARNING: Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific
safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one
tongue that are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt
on the outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the
arm. 2) Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside
shoulder. 3) Never use a single belt for more than one person.
Safety Belts 35
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
WARNING: When possible, all children 12 years old and under
should be properly restrained in a rear seating position. Failure
to follow this could seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
WARNING: Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a
small child. Check seat covers and buckles before you place a child
anywhere near them.
WARNING: Front and rear seat occupants, including pregnant
women, should wear safety belts for optimum protection in an
accident.
All seating positions in this vehicle have lap and shoulder safety belts. All
occupants of the vehicle should always properly wear their safety belts,
even when an airbag supplemental restraint system is provided.
The safety belt system consists of:
•lap and shoulder safety belts.
•shoulder safety belt with automatic locking mode, (except driver
safety belt).
•height adjuster at the front outboard seating positions
•safety belt pretensioner at the front outboard seating positions.
•safety belt warning light and chime. See Safety belt warning
light and indicator chime.
•crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness
indicator. See Crash sensors and airbag indicator in the
Supplemental Restraints System chapter.
The safety belt pretensioners are designed to activate in frontal or
near-frontal crashes and may deploy in rollovers if the vehicle is
equipped with roll stability control. The safety belt pretensioners at the
front seating positions are designed to tighten the safety belts firmly
against the occupant’s body when activated. This helps increase the
effectiveness of the safety belts.
36 Safety Belts
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
FASTENING THE SAFETY BELTS
The front outboard and rear safety restraints in your vehicle are
combination lap and shoulder belts.
1. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) until you hear a snap and feel
it latch. Make sure the tongue is
securely fastened in the buckle.
2. To unfasten, press the release
button and remove the tongue from
the buckle.
Restraint of Pregnant Women
WARNING: Always ride and drive with your seat back upright
and the safety belt properly fastened. The lap portion of the
safety belt should fit snug and be positioned low across the hips. The
shoulder portion of the safety belt should be positioned across the
chest. Pregnant women should also follow this practice. See the
following figure.
Safety Belts 37
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Pregnant women should always
wear their safety belts. The lap belt
portion of a combination lap and
shoulder belt should be positioned
low across the hips below the belly
and worn as tight as comfort will
allow. The shoulder belt should be
positioned to cross the middle of
the shoulder and the center of the
chest.
Safety Belt Locking Modes
WARNING: After any vehicle crash, the safety belt system at all
passenger seating positions must be checked by an authorized
dealer to verify that the automatic locking retractor feature for child
seats is still functioning properly. In addition, all safety belts should be
checked for proper function.
WARNING: The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if
the safety belt assembly automatic locking retractor feature or
any other safety belt function is not operating properly when checked
by an authorized dealer. Failure to replace the belt and retractor
assembly could increase the risk of injury in crashes.
All safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder
belts. The driver safety belt has the first type of locking mode, and the
front outboard passenger and rear seat safety belts have both types of
locking modes described as follows:
Vehicle Sensitive Mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle
movement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner
sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of about 5 mph (8 km/h) or
more, the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce forward
movement of the driver and passengers.
In addition, the retractor is designed to lock if the webbing is pulled out
too quickly. If this occurs, let the belt retract slightly and pull webbing
out again in a slow and controlled manner.
38 Safety Belts
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Automatic Locking Mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will
still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The automatic
locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt.
When to Use the Automatic Locking Mode
This mode should be used any time a child safety seat, except a booster,
is installed in passenger front or rear seating positions. Children 12 years
old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position
whenever possible. See the Child Safety chapter.
How to Use the Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
downward until the entire belt is pulled out.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
indicates the safety belt is now in the
automatic locking mode.
How to Disengage the Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap and shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
Safety Belt Extension Assembly
WARNING: Do not use extensions to change the fit of the
shoulder belt across the torso.
If the safety belt is too short when fully extended, you can obtain a
safety belt extension assembly from an authorized dealer.
Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety
belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on
the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too
short for you when fully extended.
Safety Belts 39
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
SAFETY BELT HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT
WARNING: Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the
belt rests across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust
the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt
and increase the risk of injury in a crash.
Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so the belt rests across the middle
of your shoulder.
To adjust the shoulder belt height,
do the following:
1. Push the button and slide the
height adjuster up or down.
2. Release the button and pull down
on the height adjuster to make sure
it is locked in place.
SAFETY BELT WARNING LIGHT AND INDICATOR CHIME
This lamp illuminates and an audible warning will sound if the
driver’s safety belt has not been fastened when the vehicle’s
ignition is turned on.
Conditions of Operation
If... Then...
The driver’s safety belt is not
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the on
position...
The safety belt warning light
illuminates 1-2 minutes and the
warning chime sounds 4-8 seconds.
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled while the indicator
light is illuminated and the
warning chime is sounding...
The safety belt warning light and
warning chime turn off.
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the on
position...
The safety belt warning light and
indicator chime remain off.
40 Safety Belts
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
SAFETY BELT-MINDER®
This feature supplements the safety belt warning function by providing
additional reminders by intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating
the safety belt warning light when the driver’s seat is occupied and the
safety belt is unbuckled.
If... Then...
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the on
position or less than
1-2 minutes have elapsed since
the ignition switch has been
turned to on...
The Belt-Minder feature will not
activate.
The driver’s safety belt is not
buckled when the vehicle has
reached at least 6 mph
(9.7 km/h) and 1-2 minutes
have elapsed since the ignition
switch has been turned to on...
The Belt-Minder feature is activated -
the safety belt warning light
illuminates and the warning chime
sounds for six seconds every
25 seconds, repeating for about five
minutes or until the safety belts are
buckled.
The driver’s safety belt
becomes unbuckled for about
one minute while the vehicle is
traveling at least 6 mph
(9.7 km/h) and more than
1-2 minutes have elapsed since
the ignition switch has been
turned to on...
The Belt-Minder feature is activated -
the safety belt warning light
illuminates and the warning chime
sounds for six seconds every
25 seconds, repeating for about five
minutes or until the safety belts are
buckled.
Safety Belts 41
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Deactivating and Activating the Belt-Minder® Feature
WARNING: While the design allows you to deactivate your
Belt-Minder, this system is designed to improve your chances of
being safely belted and surviving an accident. We recommend you leave
the Belt-Minder system activated for yourself and others who may use
the vehicle. To reduce the risk of injury, do not deactivate or activate
the Belt-Minder feature while driving the vehicle.
Read Steps1-5thoroughly before proceeding with the programming
procedure.
Before following the procedure, make sure that:
•the parking brake is set
•the transmission selector lever is in position P
•the ignition is off
•all vehicle doors and the hood are closed
•the driver’s safety belt is unbuckled
•the parking lamps and headlamps are off
1. Turn the ignition on. Do not start the engine.
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off (about one minute).
•Step 3 must be completed within 30 seconds after the safety belt
warning light turns off.
3. Buckle then unbuckle the safety belt three times at a moderate speed,
ending with the safety belt in the unbuckled state.
•After Step 3 is complete, the safety belt warning light will be turned
on for three seconds.
4. Within about seven seconds of the light turning off, buckle then
unbuckle the safety belt.
•This will disable the feature for that seating position if it is currently
enabled.
•This will enable the feature for that seating position if it is currently
disabled.
42 Safety Belts
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
CHILD RESTRAINT AND SAFETY BELT MAINTENANCE
Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child safety seat systems periodically
to make sure they work properly and are not damaged. Inspect the
vehicle and child seat safety belts to make sure there are no nicks, tears
or cuts. Replace if necessary. All vehicle safety belt assemblies, including
retractors, buckles, front safety belt buckle assemblies, buckle support
assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder belt height adjusters (if
equipped), shoulder belt guide on seat back (if equipped), child safety
seat LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching hardware, should be
inspected after a crash. Read the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for additional inspection and maintenance information
specific to the child restraint.
Ford Motor Company recommends that all safety belt assemblies in use
in vehicles involved in a crash be replaced. However, if the crash was
minor and an authorized dealer finds that the belts do not show damage
and continue to operate properly, they do not need to be replaced.
Safety belt assemblies not in use during a crash should also be inspected
and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.
For proper care of soiled safety belts, see Cleaning the Interior in the
Vehicle Care chapter.
Safety Belts 43
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
WARNING: Airbags do not inflate slowly or gently, and the risk
of injury from a deploying airbag is the greatest close to the trim
covering the airbag module.
WARNING:
All occupants of your vehicle, including the driver,
should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an airbag
supplemental restraint system is provided. Failure to properly wear your
safety belt could seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back
seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints.
WARNING: Never place your arm over the airbag module, as a
deploying airbag can result in serious arm fractures or other
injuries.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
Never place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If
you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the
seat upon which the child seat is installed all the way back.
WARNING:
Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the airbag
supplemental restraint systems or its fuses as you could be seriously
injured or killed. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING: Several airbag system components get hot after
inflation. Do not touch them after inflation as this may result in
serious injury.
WARNING: If the airbag has deployed, the airbag will not
function again and must be replaced immediately. If the airbag is
not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a
crash.
44 Supplementary Restraints System
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
The airbags are a supplemental restraint system and are designed to
work with the safety belts to help protect the driver and right front
passenger from certain upper body injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly;
there is a risk of injury from a deploying airbag.
Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a cloud of harmless powdery
residue if an airbag deploys. This is normal.
The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly upon activation. After airbag
deployment, it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery residue or smell
the burnt propellant. This may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder (to
lubricate the bag) or sodium compounds (for example, baking soda) that
result from the combustion process that inflates the airbag. Small
amounts of sodium hydroxide may be present which may irritate the skin
and eyes, but none of the residue is toxic.
While the system is designed to help reduce serious injuries, contact
with a deploying airbag may also cause abrasions or swelling. Temporary
hearing loss is also a possibility as a result of the noise associated with a
deploying airbag. Because airbags must inflate rapidly and with
considerable force, there is the risk of death or serious injuries, such as
fractures, facial and eye injuries or internal injuries, particularly to
occupants who are not properly restrained or are otherwise out of
position at the time of airbag deployment. Thus, it is extremely
important that occupants be properly restrained as far away from the
airbag module as possible while maintaining vehicle control.
Routine maintenance of the airbags is not required.
SOS POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM™
The system flashes the turn signal lamps and sounds the horn
(intermittently) in the event of a serious impact that deploys an airbag
equipped on your vehicle, such as front, side, side curtain or Safety
Canopy.
The horn and lamps will turn off when:
•you press the hazard control button
•you press the panic button (if equipped) on the remote entry
transmitter, or
•your vehicle runs out of power.
Supplementary Restraints System 45
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
DRIVER AND PASSENGER AIRBAGS
WARNING: Never place your arm or any objects over an airbag
module. Placing your arm over a deploying airbag can result in
serious arm fractures or other injuries. Objects placed on or over the
airbag inflation area may cause those objects to be propelled by the
airbag into your face and torso causing serious injury.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
Never place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If
you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the
seat upon which the child seat is installed all the way back.
The driver and front passenger
airbags will deploy during significant
frontal and near frontal crashes.
The driver and passenger front airbag system consists of:
•driver and passenger airbag modules
•crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness
indicator. See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator later in
this chapter.
46 Supplementary Restraints System
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating Adjustment
WARNING: The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches (25
centimeters) between an occupant’s chest and the driver airbag
module. Failure to follow this could seriously increase the risk of injury
or death.
To properly position yourself away from the airbag:
•Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.
•Recline the seat slightly (one or two degrees) from the upright
position.
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts, it is
very important that they continue to sit properly. Properly seated
occupants sit upright, lean against the seat back, and center themselves
on the seat cushion, with their feet comfortably extended on the floor.
Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward,
leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of
injury during a crash is greatly increased.
Children and Airbags
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
Never place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If
you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the
seat upon which the child seat is installed all the way back.
Children must always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics
suggest that children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in the front
seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the
risk of injury in a crash.
Supplementary Restraints System 47
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Passenger Airbag ON and OFF Switch (If Equipped)
WARNING: An airbag ON and OFF switch may have been
installed in this vehicle. Before driving, always look at the face of
the switch to be sure the switch is in the proper position in accordance
with these instructions and warnings. Failure to put the switch in a
proper position can increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
crash.
Note: The passenger airbag ON and OFF switch may be on vehicles with
no rear seats and a gross vehicle weight rating greater than 8500 pounds
(3856 kilograms). See the Towing chapter for more information.
Turning the Passenger Airbag Off
WARNING: If the light fails to illuminate when the passenger air
bag switch is in the OFF position and the ignition switch is in
ON, contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING: In order to avoid inadvertent activation of the
switch, always remove the ignition key from the passenger air
bag ON and OFF switch.
WARNING: An infant in a rear-facing seat faces a high risk of
serious or fatal injuries from a deploying passenger airbag. Rear
facing infant seats should never be placed in the front seats, unless the
passenger airbag is turned off.
1. Insert the ignition key, turn the
switch to off, and hold it in the off
position while removing the key.
2. When the ignition is turned to
off, the off light illuminates briefly,
momentarily shuts off and then
turns back on. This indicates that
the passenger airbag is deactivated.
OFF
ON
OFF PASSENGER
AIRBAG
48 Supplementary Restraints System
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Turning the Passenger Airbag Back On
WARNING: The safety belts for the driver and right front
passenger seating positions have been specifically designed to
function together with the airbags in certain types of crashes. When
you turn off your airbag, you not only lose the protection of the airbag,
you also may reduce the effectiveness of your safety belt system, which
was designed to work with the airbag. If you are not a person who
meets the requirements stated in the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration or Transport Canada deactivation criteria, turning off
the airbag can increase the risk of serious injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: If your vehicle has rear seats, always transport
children who are 12 and younger in a rear seating position.
Always use safety belts and child restraints properly. Do not place a
child in a rear facing infant seat in the front seat unless your vehicle is
equipped with an airbag ON and OFF switch and the passenger airbag
is turned off. This is because the back of the infant seat is too close to
the inflating airbag and the risk of a fatal injury to the infant when the
airbag inflates is substantial.
WARNING: If the OFF light is illuminated when the passenger
airbag switch is in the ON position and the ignition switch is in
ON, have the passenger airbag switch serviced at an authorized dealer
immediately.
The passenger airbag remains off until you turn it back on.
1. Insert the ignition key and turn
the switch to on.
2. The OFF light will briefly
illuminate when the ignition is
turned on. This indicates that the
passenger airbag is operational.
OFF
ON
OFF PASSENGER
AIRBAG
Supplementary Restraints System 49
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
The passenger side airbag should always be on (the airbag OFF light
should not be illuminated) unless the passenger is a person who meets
the requirements stated either in Category 1, 2 or 3 of the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration/Transport Canada deactivation
criteria which follows.
The vast majority of drivers and passengers are much safer with an
airbag than without. To do their job and reduce the risk of life
threatening injuries, airbags must open with great force, and this force
can pose a potentially deadly risk in some situations, particularly when a
front seat occupant is not properly buckled up. The most effective way
to reduce the risk of unnecessary airbag injuries without reducing the
overall safety of the vehicle is to make sure all occupants are properly
restrained in the vehicle, especially in the front seat. This provides the
protection of safety belts and permits the airbags to provide the
additional protection they were designed to provide. If you choose to
deactivate your airbag, you are losing the very significant risk reducing
benefits of the airbag and you are also reducing the effectiveness of the
safety belts, because safety belts in modern vehicles are designed to
work as a safety system with the airbags.
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration Deactivation
Criteria (excluding Canada)
WARNING: This vehicle has special energy management safety
belts for the driver and right front passenger. These particular
belts are specifically designed to work with airbags to help reduce the
risk of injury in a crash. The energy management safety belt is designed
to give or release additional belt webbing in some accidents to reduce
concentration of force on an occupant’s chest and reduce the risk of
certain bone fractures and injuries to underlying organs. In a crash, if
the airbag is turned off, this energy management safety belt might
permit the person wearing the belt to move forward enough to incur a
serious or fatal injury. The more severe the crash, and the heavier the
occupant, the greater the risk is. Be sure the airbag is turned on for
any person who does not qualify under the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration deactivation criteria.
50 Supplementary Restraints System
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
1. Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old) must ride in the front seat
because:
•the vehicle has no rear seat;
•the vehicle has a rear seat too small to accommodate a rear-facing
infant seat; or
•the infant has a medical condition which, according to the infant’s
physician, makes it necessary for the infant to ride in the front so that
the driver can constantly monitor the child’s condition.
2. Child age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 must ride in the front seat
because:
•the vehicle has no rear seat;
•although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rear seat(s) whenever
possible, children ages 1 to 12 sometimes must ride in the front
because no space is available in the rear seat(s) of the vehicle; or
•the child has a medical condition which, according to the child’s
physician, makes it necessary for the child to ride in the front seat so
that the driver can constantly monitor the child’s condition.
3. Medical condition. A passenger has a medical condition which,
according to his or her physician:
•causes the passenger airbag to pose a special risk for the passenger;
and
•makes the potential harm from the passenger airbag in a crash greater
than the potential harm from turning off the airbag and allowing the
passenger, even if belted, to hit the dashboard or windshield in a
crash.
Supplementary Restraints System 51
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Transport Canada Deactivation Criteria (Canada Only)
WARNING: This vehicle has special energy management safety
belts for the driver and right front passenger. These particular
belts are specifically designed to work with airbags to help reduce the
risk of injury in a crash. The energy management safety belt is designed
to give or release additional belt webbing in some accidents to reduce
concentration of force on an occupant’s chest and reduce the risk of
certain bone fractures and injuries to underlying organs. In a crash, if
the airbag is turned off, this energy management safety belt might
permit the person wearing the belt to move forward enough to incur a
serious or fatal injury. The more severe the crash, and the heavier the
occupant, the greater the risk is. Be sure the airbag is turned on for
any person who does not qualify under the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration deactivation criteria.
1. Infant: An infant (less than 1 year old) must ride in the front seat because:
•my vehicle has no rear seat;
•the rear seat in my vehicle cannot accommodate a rear-facing infant
seat; or
•the infant has a medical condition which, according to the infant’s
physician, makes it necessary for the infant to ride in the front seat so
that the driver can monitor the infant’s condition.
2. Child age 12 or under: A child age 12 or under must ride in the
front seat because:
•my vehicle has no rear seat;
•although children age 12 and under ride in the rear seat whenever
possible, children age 12 and under have no option but to sometimes
ride in the front seat because rear seat space is insufficient; or
•the child has a medical condition that, according to the child’s
physician, makes it necessary for the child to ride in the front seat so
that the driver can monitor the child’s condition.
3. Medical condition: A passenger has a medical condition that,
according to his or her physician:
•poses a special risk for the passenger if the airbag deploys; and
•makes the potential harm from the passenger airbag deployment
greater than the potential harm from turning off the airbag and
experiencing a crash without the protection offered by the airbag
52 Supplementary Restraints System
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
CRASH SENSORS AND AIRBAG INDICATOR
WARNING: Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of
your vehicle (including frame, bumper, front end body structure
and tow hooks) may affect the performance of the airbag system,
increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify the front end of your
vehicle.
Your vehicle has a collection of crash and occupant sensors which
provide information to the restraints control module which deploys
(activates) the front safety belt pretensioners, driver airbag and
passenger airbag. Based on the type of accident, the restraints control
module will deploy the appropriate safety devices.
The restraints control module also monitors the readiness of the above
safety devices plus the crash and occupant sensors. The readiness of the
safety system is indicated by a warning indicator light in the instrument
cluster or by a backup tone if the warning light is not working. See the
Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the airbag is not
required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
•The readiness light will either flash or stay lit.
•The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after the
ignition is turned on.
•A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem or light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the supplemental
restraint system serviced at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless
serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a crash.
The safety belt pretensioners and the airbag supplemental restraint
system are designed to activate when the vehicle sustains frontal
deceleration sufficient to cause the restraints control module to deploy a
safety device.
Supplementary Restraints System 53
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
The fact that the safety belt pretensioners or airbags did not activate in a
crash does not mean that something is wrong with the system. Rather, it
means the restraints control module determined the accident conditions
(such as crash severity, belt usage) were not appropriate to activate
these safety devices.
•The design of the front airbags is to activate only in frontal and
near-frontal crashes (not rollovers, side impacts or rear impacts)
unless the crash causes sufficient frontal deceleration.
•The design of the safety belt pretensioners is to activate in frontal or
near-frontal crashes and may deploy in rollovers if the vehicle is
equipped with roll stability control.
AIRBAG DISPOSAL
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Airbags must be
disposed of by qualified personnel.
54 Supplementary Restraints System
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION ON RADIO FREQUENCIES
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry
Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment. The term IC before the radio certification number only
signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
The typical operating range for your transmitter is approximately 33 feet
(10 meters). Vehicles with the remote start feature will have a greater
range. A decrease in operating range could be caused by:
•weather conditions
•nearby radio towers
•structures around your vehicle
•other vehicles parked next to your vehicle.
The radio frequency used by your remote control can also be used by
other short-distance radio transmissions, for example amateur radios,
medical equipment, wireless headphones, remote controls and alarm
systems. If the frequencies are jammed, you will not be able to use your
remote control. You can lock and unlock the doors with the key.
Note: Make sure your vehicle is locked before leaving it unattended.
Note: If you are in range, the remote control will operate if you press
any button unintentionally.
Keys and Remote Control 55
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
REMOTE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
If there are problems with the
remote entry system, make sure to
take all remote entry transmitters
with you to the authorized dealer in
order to aid in troubleshooting the
problem.
Note: If the vehicle is equipped with the E-Guard Cargo Protection
System™ the remote transmitter unlock command will only unlock the
front doors. The only way to unlock the side or rear cargo doors from
outside the vehicle is with the key.
Replacing the Battery
Note: Refer to local regulations when disposing of transmitter batteries.
Note: Replacing the battery will not delete the remote control from your
vehicle. The remote control should operate normally after battery
replacement.
The remote entry transmitter uses one coin type three-volt lithium
battery CR2032 or equivalent.
To replace the battery:
1. Twist a thin coin between the two
halves of the remote entry
transmitter near the key ring.
Note: Do not take the rubber cover
and circuit board off the front
housing of the remote entry
transmitter.
56 Keys and Remote Control
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
2. Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals on the back
surface of the circuit board.
3. Remove the old battery.
4. Insert the new battery. Refer to
the diagram inside the remote entry
transmitter for the correct
orientation of the battery. Press the
battery down to ensure that the
battery is fully seated in the battery
housing cavity.
5. Snap the two halves back
together.
Car Finder
Press the button twice within three seconds. The horn will
sound and the turn signals will flash. We recommend you use
this method to locate your vehicle, rather than using the panic
alarm.
Sounding a Panic Alarm
Press the button to activate the alarm. Press the button again
or switch the ignition on to deactivate.
Note: The panic alarm will operate regardless of the ignition position.
REPLACING A LOST KEY OR REMOTE CONTROL
You can purchase replacement or additional keys or remote controls from
an authorized dealer. A dealer can program the transmitters to your
vehicle or you may be able to program them yourself. See the Security
chapter for information on programming spare keys.
PLACE BATTERY
ON OTHER HALF
DO NOT TOUCH
THE TERMINALS
Keys and Remote Control 57
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Reprogramming Your Remote Controls
You must have all remote controls (maximum of four) available before
beginning this procedure. If all remote controls are not present during
programming, the ones missing will no longer operate the vehicle.
Note: Make sure you do not press the brake pedal during this sequence.
To reprogram the remote control:
1. Make sure the vehicle is electronically unlocked.
2. Place the key in the ignition and turn it from lock to off.
3. Cycle eight times rapidly (within 10 seconds) between off and on.
Note: The eighth turn must end in the on position.
4. The doors will lock, and then unlock, to confirm that you have
activated the programming mode.
5. Within 20 seconds press any button on the remote control. Note: If
more than 20 seconds have passed you will need to start the procedure
over.
6. The doors will lock, and then unlock, to confirm that you have
programmed this remote control.
7. Repeat Step 5 to program each additional remote control (up to four).
8. Turn the ignition off after you have finished programming all of the
remote controls.
9. The doors will lock, and then unlock, to confirm that you have exited
the programming mode.
58 Keys and Remote Control
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
You can use the power door lock control or the remote control to lock
and unlock your vehicle.
Power Door Locks (If Equipped)
The power door lock control is located on the driver and front passenger
door panels.
A. Unlock
B. Lock
Remote Control (If Equipped)
You can use the remote control anytime the vehicle is not running.
Unlocking the Doors (Two-Stage Unlock)
Press the button to unlock the driver’s door.
Press the button again within three seconds to unlock all doors.
The turn signals will flash.
Press and hold both the lock and unlock buttons on the remote control
for four seconds to disable or enable two-stage unlocking. Disabling
two-stage unlocking allows all vehicle doors to unlock with one press of
the button. The turn signals will flash twice to indicate the unlocking
mode was changed.
Locking the Doors
Press the button to lock all the doors. The turn signals will
illuminate.
Press the button again within three seconds to confirm that all the doors
are closed. The doors will lock again, the horn will chirp and the turn
signals will illuminate if all the doors are closed.
Note: If any door is not closed, the horn will chirp twice and the lamps
will not illuminate.
Memory Lock
If you lock your doors with the power lock control or the remote control
while the sliding door is open, the door will automatically lock after it is
closed.
A B
Locks 59
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Autolock and Unlock
Note: Your vehicle comes with this feature disabled.
The autolock feature will lock all the doors when:
•all doors are closed,
•the ignition is on,
•you shift into any gear putting the vehicle in motion, and
•the vehicle attains a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h).
If the vehicle was autolocked, the autounlock feature will unlock all
doors when the driver’s door is opened within 10 minutes of switching
the ignition off.
Enabling or Disabling Autolock and Autounlock
These features can be enabled or disabled:
•by your authorized dealer
•through the information display
•using the power door lock procedure.
To enable or disable using the power door locks, do the following:
Note: You will have 30 seconds to complete the procedure.
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Press the power door lock button three times.
3. Switch the ignition off.
4. Press the power door lock button three times.
5. Switch the ignition on. The horn will chirp indicating the programming
mode has been entered.
Autolock: Once in programming mode, press the power door unlock
button then the lock button. The horn will chirp once if autolock was
deactivated or twice (one short and one long chirp) if autolock was
activated.
Autounlock: Once in programming mode, press the power door lock
button then the unlock button. The horn will chirp once if autounlock
was deactivated or twice (one short and one long chirp) if autounlock
was activated.
6. Turn the ignition off. The horn will chirp once to confirm the
procedure is complete.
Note: The autounlock feature can be enabled or disabled independently
of the autolock feature.
60 Locks
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Illuminated Entry
The interior lamps and parking lamps illuminate when the remote entry
system is used to unlock the doors or sound the personal alarm.
The illuminated entry system will turn off the lights if:
•you switch the ignition on
•you press the lock button on the remote control
•after 25 seconds of illumination.
The dome lamp control (if equipped) must not be set to the off position
for the illuminated entry system to operate.
The interior lamps will not turn off if:
•you turn them on with the dimmer control
•any door is open.
Rear Cargo Door Lock (If Equipped)
The passenger side rear cargo door
has a lock control mounted on the
inside of the door. Press to unlock
or lock all the doors.
E-Guard Cargo Protection System™ (If Equipped)
The system insures that the side and cargo doors are double locked for
extra security.
System Features
•The system is available with either power or manual door locks.
•The system provides extra security via a double-locked design.
•The cargo doors can only be unlocked from the outside by using the
keys.
•The power unlock feature (if equipped with power door locks) will
only unlock the front doors.
•The system is equipped with an emergency unlock handle installed in
the door inner panel.
A
B
Locks 61
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
System Procedure – Power Door Locks
•Lock the vehicle with the key, manual door lock, remote control or use
the power door lock on the front door trim panel. The front doors are
locked and the cargo doors are double-locked.
•Unlock the vehicle with the remote control or use the power door lock
on the front door. The front doors are unlocked and the cargo doors
remain double-locked.
Note: The only way to unlock the side or rear cargo doors from outside
the vehicle is with the key.
System Procedure – Manual Door Locks
•The front door locks can be locked by using either the key or the
manual door lock.
•In order to activate the system, use the key or the manual door lock
to lock the side and rear cargo doors.
Note: The cargo doors cannot be unlocked using the manual door lock.
Emergency Lock Release
WARNING: If equipped with E-Guard Cargo Protection
System™ occupants may become trapped in the cargo area
unless the exit procedure is followed. The cargo doors cannot be
unlocked using manual or power door locks or remote control. In an
emergency, to exit the cargo area, locate the emergency handle in the
rear door or side door, pull the emergency handle to unlock the door,
then unlatch the door using the inside release handle.
The emergency handle in the door trim panel unlocks the E-Guard Cargo
Protection System™.
62 Locks
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
The emergency handles are located in the following areas:
•The side door emergency handle
is located on the door inner trim
panel in the speaker cup.
•The rear door handle is located
in the rear door below the glass.
To open the side or rear cargo doors from the inside:
1. Unlock the system using the emergency handle.
2. Unlatch the door using the inside release handle.
Locks 63
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
SECURILOCK® PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: The system is not compatible with non-Ford aftermarket remote
start systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and a loss of security protection.
Note: Metallic objects, electronic devices or a second coded key on the
same key chain may cause vehicle starting issues if they are too close to
the key when starting the engine. Prevent these objects from touching
the coded key while starting the engine. Switch the ignition off, move all
objects on the key chain away from the coded key and restart the engine
if a problem occurs.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key in the vehicle. Always take
your keys and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle.
The system is an engine immobilization system. It helps prevent the
engine from starting unless a coded key programmed to your vehicle is
used. Using the wrong key may prevent the engine from starting. A
message may appear in the information display.
If you are unable to start the engine with a correctly coded key, a
malfunction has happened and a message may appear in the information
display.
Anti-Theft Indicator
The anti-theft indicator is located in the instrument cluster.
•When the ignition is off, the indicator will flash once every
two seconds to indicate the SecuriLock system is functioning
as a theft deterrent.
•When the ignition is on, the indicator will glow for three seconds, then
turn off to indicate normal system functionality.
Vehicles without the SecuriLock Passive Anti-theft system behave as
follows:
•When the ignition is off, the indicator will not flash.
•When the ignition is on, the indicator will glow for three seconds to
indicate the engine is enabled.
Automatic Arming
Your vehicle arms immediately after you switch the ignition off.
Automatic Disarming
Your vehicle disarms when you switch the ignition on with a coded key.
64 Security
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Replacement Keys
If your keys are lost or stolen and you do not have an extra coded key,
you will need to have your vehicle towed to an authorized dealer. The
key codes need to be erased from your vehicle and new coded keys will
need to be programmed.
Replacing coded keys can be very costly. Store an extra programmed key
away from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any
inconveniences. See an authorized dealer to purchase additional spare or
replacement keys.
Programming a Spare Key
Note: A maximum of eight coded keys can be programmed to your
vehicle.
You can program your own coded keys to your vehicle.
Only use SecuriLock® keys.
You must have two previously programmed coded keys and the new
unprogrammed key readily accessible. See your authorized dealer to have
the spare key programmed if two previously programmed coded keys are
not available
Read and understand the entire procedure before you begin.
1. Insert the first previously programmed coded key into the ignition.
2. Turn the ignition from off to on. Keep the ignition on for at least three
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition off and remove the first coded key from the ignition.
4. After three seconds but within 10 seconds of removing the first coded
key, insert the second previously coded key into the ignition.
5. Turn the ignition from off to on. Keep the ignition on for at least one
second, but no more than 10 seconds.
6. Turn the ignition off and remove the second previously programmed
coded key from the ignition.
7. After three seconds but within 10 seconds of turning the ignition off
and removing the previously programmed coded key, insert the new
unprogrammed key into the ignition.
8. Turn the ignition from off to on. Keep the ignition on for at least one
second, but no more than 10 seconds.
9. Remove the newly programmed coded key from the ignition.
Security 65
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
If the key has been successfully programmed it will start the vehicle’s
engine. The theft indicator light will illuminate for three seconds and
then go out.
If the key was not successfully programmed, it will not start your
vehicle’s engine and the theft indicator light will flash rapidly. Wait
20 seconds and repeat Steps 1 through 8. Take your vehicle to your
authorized dealer to have the new key programmed if you are still
unsuccessful.
Wait 20 seconds and then repeat this procedure from Step 1 to program
an additional key.
66 Security
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL
WARNING: Do not adjust the steering wheel when your vehicle
is moving.
1. Pull and hold the steering wheel
release lever.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the
desired position then release the
lever.
VOICE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
A. Voice recognition
B. Phone mode
See the SYNC or Navigation System chapter.
CRUISE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
See the Cruise Control chapter.
1
2
A
B
ON
OFF
RES
SET
ACCEL
COAST
ON
OFF
Steering Wheel 67
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
WINDSHIELD WIPERS
Note:
Fully defrost the windshield before turning on the windshield wipers.
Note: Make sure the windshield wipers are turned off before entering a
car wash.
Note:
Clean the windshield and wiper blades if they begin to leave streaks
or smears. If that does not resolve the issue, install new wiper blades.
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry windshield. This may scratch
the glass, damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper motor to bun out.
Always use the windshield washers before wiping a dry windshield.
Rotate the end of the control:
•away from you to increase the
wiper speed
•toward you to decrease the wiper
speed.
WINDSHIELD WASHERS
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry windshield. This may scratch
the glass, damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper motor to burn out.
Always use the windshield washer before wiping a dry windshield.
Note: Do not operate the washer when the washer reservoir is empty.
This may cause the washer pump to overheat.
Press the end of the stalk to
activate the washer.
•A brief press causes a single wipe
without washer fluid.
•A quick press and hold causes
the wipers to swipe three times
with washer fluid.
•A long press and hold will
activate the wipers and washer
fluid for up to 10 seconds.
A wipe will occur a few seconds after washing to clear any remaining
washer fluid.
68 Wipers and Washers
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
LIGHTING CONTROL
The first position turns the lamps
off.
The second position turns on the
parking lamps, instrument panel
lamps, license plate lamps and tail
lamps.
The third position turns the
headlamps on.
High Beams
•Push the lever toward the
instrument panel to activate.
•Pull the lever toward you to
deactivate.
Headlamp Flasher
Pull the lever toward you slightly
and release it to flash the
headlamps.
P
Lighting 69
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
INSTRUMENT LIGHTING DIMMER
Note: If you disconnect the battery or it becomes discharged, the
dimmer switch will require re-calibration. Rotate the dimmer switch from
the full dim position to the full dome/on position to reset.
Note: Move the control to the full upright position, past detent, to turn
on the interior lamps.
Move the control up or down to
adjust the intensity of the panel
lighting.
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (DRL) (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Always remember to turn on your headlamps at
dusk or during inclement weather. The Daytime Running Lamp
(DRL) system does not activate the tail lamps and generally may not
provide adequate lighting during these conditions. Failure to activate
your headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision.
Turns the headlamps on with a reduced output.
To activate:
•the ignition must be in the on position and
•the headlamp control is in the off or parking lamp position.
70 Lighting
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
TURN SIGNAL CONTROL
•Push down to activate the left
turn signal.
•Push up to activate the right turn
signal.
INTERIOR LAMPS
Dome Lamps with Rear Headliner (If Equipped)
Dome lamps equipped with an on/off
control will light when:
•doors are closed and the control
is in the ON position
•control is in the middle position
and any door is open
•panel dimmer control is moved to the full upright position past the
detent
When the control is in the OFF position, it will not illuminate when you
open the doors or move the dimmer control past the detent.
Cargo Lamps
Cargo lamps equipped with an
on/off control will light when:
•doors are closed and the control
is moved to the right ON position
•control is in the middle position
and any door is open
•panel dimmer control is moved to
the full upright position past the
detent
When the control is moved to the left OFF position, it will not illuminate
when you open the doors or move the dimmer control past the detent.
Lighting 71
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Front and Rear Courtesy/Reading Lamps (If Equipped)
The dome portion of the lamp, the
center light, will light when:
•any door is opened
•panel dimmer control is moved to
the full upright position past the
detent
The reading lamp portion, the two outer lights, can only be toggled on
and off at the lamp.
72 Lighting
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
POWER WINDOWS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Do not leave children unattended in your vehicle
and do not let them play with the power windows. They may
seriously injure themselves.
WARNING: When closing the power windows, you should verify
they are free of obstructions and make sure that children and
pets are not in the proximity of the window openings.
Press the switch to open the
window.
Lift the switch to close the window.
One-Touch Down
Press the switch fully and release it. Press again or lift it to stop the
window.
Accessory Delay
You can use the window switches for several minutes after you turn the
ignition off, or until any door is opened.
AUTO
Windows and Mirrors 73
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power Exterior Mirrors (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirror while your vehicle is in
motion.
A. Left mirror
B. Off
C. Right mirror
To adjust your mirrors:
1. Select the mirror you want to adjust.
2. Move the control in the direction you want to tilt the mirror.
3. Return the control to the center position to lock mirrors in place.
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors
The mirrors can be manually folded forward or backward. Push the
mirror toward or away from the door window glass. Make sure that you
fully engage the mirror in its support when returning it to its original
position.
Telescoping Mirror (If Equipped)
This feature allows the mirror to
extend approximately 3 inches (80
millimeters). It is especially useful
when towing a trailer.
Spotter Mirror (If Equipped)
Note: New spotter mirrors may be stiff, requiring several cycles before
the spotter adjustment effort eases.
B
AC
74 Windows and Mirrors
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
On Standard Mirror
You can tilt the spotter mirror up or
down to increase visibility. Only
apply pressure to the center of the
top or bottom edges when adjusting
the mirror.
Note: Do not apply any force to the
left or right edges. This may
damage the mirror.
On Telescoping Mirror
You can tilt the spotter mirror up or
down and also left or right to
increase visibility.
Integrated Blind Spot Mirrors (If Equipped)
WARNING: Objects in the blind spot mirror are closer than they
appear.
Blind spot mirrors have an integrated convex mirror built into the upper
outboard corner of the exterior mirrors. They are designed to assist you
by increasing visibility along the side of your vehicle.
Check the main mirror first before a lane change, then check the blind
spot mirror. If no vehicles are present in the blind spot mirror and the
traffic in the adjacent lane is at a safe distance, signal that you are going
to change lanes. Glance over your shoulder to verify traffic is clear, and
carefully change lanes.
Windows and Mirrors 75
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
The image of the approaching
vehicle is small and near the inboard
edge of the main mirror when it is at
a distance. The image becomes
larger and begins to move outboard
across the main mirror as the vehicle
approaches (A). The image will
transition from the main mirror and
begin to appear in the blind spot
mirror as the vehicle approaches
(B). The vehicle will transition to
your peripheral field of view as it
leaves the blind spot mirror (C).
INTERIOR MIRROR (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirror when your vehicle is
moving.
Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh
abrasives, fuel or other petroleum or ammonia based cleaning products.
You can adjust the interior mirror to your preference. Some mirrors also
have a second pivot point. This lets you move the mirror head up or
down and from side to side.
Pull the tab below the mirror toward you to reduce glare at night.
A
B
C
76 Windows and Mirrors
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Auto-Dimming Mirror (If Equipped)
Note: Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the mirror.
Mirror performance may be affected. A rear center passenger or raised
rear center head restraint may also block light from reaching the sensor.
The mirror will dim automatically to reduce glare when bright lights are
detected from behind your vehicle. It will automatically return to normal
reflection when you select reverse gear to make sure you have a clear
view when backing up.
SUN VISORS
Illuminated Visor Vanity Mirror (If Equipped)
Lift the cover to switch on the
lamp.
Windows and Mirrors 77
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
GAUGES
Cluster shown in standard measure. Metric similar.
A. Tachometer
B. Fuel gauge
C. Engine coolant temperature gauge
D. Speedometer
E. Battery voltage gauge
F. Information display. See Information displays for more information.
G. Engine oil pressure gauge
Fuel Gauge
Indicates approximately how much fuel is left in the fuel tank (when the
ignition is on). The fuel gauge may vary slightly when the vehicle is in
motion or on a grade. The fuel icon and arrow indicates which side of
the vehicle the fuel filler door is located.
78 Instrument Cluster
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
Indicates engine coolant temperature. At normal operating temperature,
the level indicator will be in the normal range. If the engine coolant
temperature exceeds the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely
possible, switch off the engine and let the engine cool.
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine is running or hot.
Battery Voltage Gauge:
Indicates the battery voltage when the ignition is in the on position. If
the pointer moves and stays outside the normal operating range, have
the vehicle’s electrical system checked by your authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Information Display
Odometer
Located in the bottom of the information display Registers the
accumulated distance your vehicle has travelled.
Trip Computer
See Trip A/B in Information Displays.
Vehicle Settings and Personalization
See Information Displays.
Engine Oil Pressure Gauge
Indicates engine oil pressure. The needle should stay in the normal
operating range. If the needle falls below the normal range, stop the
vehicle, turn off the engine and check the engine oil level. Add oil if
needed. If the oil level is correct, have your vehicle checked at your
authorized dealer.
WARNING LAMPS AND INDICATORS
The following warning lamps and indicators will alert you to a vehicle
condition that may become serious. Some lamps will illuminate when you
start your vehicle to make sure they work. If any lamps remain on after
starting your vehicle, refer to the respective system warning lamp for
further information.
Note: Some warning indicators appear in the information display and
function the same as a warning lamp but do not display when you start
your vehicle.
Instrument Cluster 79
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Airbag – Front
If it fails to illuminate on startup, continues to flash or remains
on, it indicates a malfunction. Have the system checked by your
authorized dealer. A chime will sound when there is a
malfunction in the indicator light.
Anti-Lock Braking System
If it illuminates when you are driving, this indicates a
malfunction. You will continue to have the normal braking
system (without ABS) unless the brake warning lamp is also
illuminated. Have the system checked by your authorized
dealer.
Anti-Theft System
Flashes when the SecuriLockt Passive Anti-theft System has
been activated.
Battery
If it illuminates while driving, it indicates a malfunction. Switch
off all unnecessary electrical equipment and have the system
checked by your authorized dealer
Brake System
It will illuminate when the parking brake is engaged and the
ignition is on.
If it illuminates when you are driving, check that the parking brake is not
engaged. If the parking brake is not engaged, this indicates low brake
fluid level or a brake system malfunction. Have the system checked
immediately by your authorized dealer.
WARNING: Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning
light on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking
performance may occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle.
Have the vehicle checked by your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Driving extended distances with the parking brake engaged can cause
brake failure and the risk of personal injury.
80 Instrument Cluster
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Charging System
It will illuminate when the 12–volt battery is not charging
properly. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
This indicates a problem with the electrical system or a related
component.
Check Fuel Cap
Displays when the fuel cap may not be properly installed.
Continued driving with this light on may cause the Service
Engine Soon warning light to come on.
Cruise Control (if equipped)
It will illuminate when you switch this feature on.
Direction Indicator
Illuminates when the left or right turn signal or the hazard
warning flasher is switched on. If the indicators stay on or flash
faster, check for a burned out bulb.
Engine Oil
If it illuminates with the engine running or when you are
driving, this indicates a malfunction. Stop your vehicle as soon
as it is safe to do so and switch the engine off. Check the
engine oil level.
Note: Do not resume your journey if it illuminates despite the level
being correct. Have the system checked by your authorized dealer.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Illuminates when the engine coolant temperature is high. Stop
the vehicle as soon as possible, switch off the engine and let
cool.
Fasten Safety belt
It will illuminate and a chime will sound to remind you to fasten
your safety belt.
High Beam
It will illuminate when the headlamp high beam is switched on.
It will flash when you use the headlamp flasher.
Instrument Cluster 81
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Low Fuel Level
It will illuminate when the fuel level is low or near empty.
Refuel as soon as possible.
Low Tire Pressure Warning
It will illuminate when your tire pressure is low. If the lamp
remains on with the engine running or when driving, check
your tire pressure as soon as possible.
The lamp also illuminates momentarily when you switch the ignition on
to confirm the lamp is functional. If it does not illuminate when you
switch the ignition on, or begins to flash at any time, have the system
checked by your authorized dealer.
Overdrive Off (if equipped)
It will illuminate when the overdrive function of the
transmission has been turned off. If the light does not
illuminate, have the transmission serviced soon, or damage may
occur.
Powertrain Malfunction/Electronic Throttle Control
It will illuminate when a powertrain fault has been detected.
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Service Engine Soon
The service engine soon indicator light illuminates when the
ignition is first turned to the on position to check the bulb and
to indicate whether the vehicle is ready for
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing. Normally, the “service engine soon”
light will stay on until the engine is cranked, then turn itself off if no
malfunctions are present. However, if after 15 seconds the “service
engine soon” light blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not
ready for I/M testing. See the Readiness for inspection/maintenance
(I/M) testing in the Fuel and Refueling chapter.
Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the on-board
diagnostics system (OBD-II) has detected a malfunction. Refer to
On-board diagnostics (OBD-II) in the Fuel and Refueling chapter. If
the light is blinking, engine misfire is occurring which could damage your
catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid heavy acceleration
and deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced immediately by your
authorized dealer.
82 Instrument Cluster
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
WARNING: Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust
temperatures could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel
system, interior floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly
causing a fire.
Stability Control System
Displays when the AdvanceTrac®/Traction control is active. If
the light remains on, have the system serviced immediately.
Stability Control System Off
It will illuminate when AdvanceTrac®/Traction control has been
disabled by the driver.
Transmission Tow/Haul
It will illuminate when the Tow/Haul feature has been activated.
Refer to the Transmission chapter for transmission function
and operation. If the light flashes steadily, have the system
serviced immediately, damage to the transmission could occur.
AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND INDICATORS
Key In Ignition Warning Chime
Sounds when the key is left in the ignition in the off or accessory
position and the driver’s door is opened.
Headlamps On Warning Chime
Sounds when the headlamps or parking lamps are on, the ignition is off
(the key is not in the ignition) and the driver’s door is opened.
Parking Brake On Warning Chime
Sounds when you have left the parking brake on and drive your vehicle.
If the warning chime remains on after you have released the parking
brake, have the system checked by your authorized dealer immediately.
Instrument Cluster 83
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off
the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your
vehicle. We recommend against the use of any handheld device while
driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the
use of electronic devices while driving..
Various systems on your vehicle can be controlled using the information
display controls on the steering wheel. Corresponding information is
displayed in the information display.
Information Display Controls
Press and release the SELECT/RESET stem, located in the speedometer,
to choose settings and confirm messages. Select or reset the function by
holding the SELECT/RESET stem for more than two seconds.
INFO
TRIP A/B
MILES (km) TO E
XX.X AVG MPG (L/100km)
MPG (L/km)
•TRIP A/B: Registers the distance of individual journeys.
•MILES (km) TO E: This displays an estimate of approximately how far
you can drive with the fuel remaining in your tank under normal
driving conditions. Remember to turn the ignition off when refueling
to allow this feature to correctly detect the added fuel. Distance to
empty is calculated using a running average fuel economy, which is
based on your recent driving history of 500 miles (800 km). This value
is not the same as the average fuel economy display. The running
average fuel economy is re-initialized to a factory default value if the
battery is disconnected.
•XX.X AVG MPG (L/100km): Average fuel economy displays your
average fuel economy in miles/gallon or liters/100 km.
•MPG (L/km): This displays instantaneous fuel economy as a bar graph.
Your vehicle must be moving to calculate instantaneous fuel economy.
Instantaneous fuel economy cannot be reset.
84 Information Displays
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
System Check and Vehicle Feature Customization
Note: When returning to the setup menu and a non-English language
has been selected, HOLD RESET FOR ENGLISH will be displayed to
change back to English. Press and hold the SELECT/RESET stem to
change back to English.
Press and hold the SELECT/RESET stem to get into the setup menu
sequence for the following displays:
SETUP
OIL LIFE
UNITS ENG /
METRIC
press and hold
the
SELECT/RESET
stem
English or Metric
AUTOLOCK (if
equipped)
On or Off
AUTOUNLOCK
(if equipped)
On or Off
REAR PARK AID
(if equipped)
On or Off
COMPASS (if equipped)
TBC MODE (if
equipped)
press and hold
the
SELECT/RESET
stem
Electric or EOH
LANGUAGE =
ENGLISH /
SPANISH /
FRENCH
English / Spanish / French
RESET FOR
SYSTEM CHECK
press and hold
the
SELECT/RESET
stem
XXX% OIL LIFE
ENGINE HOURS (if enabled)
ENGINE IDLE HOURS (if
enabled)
CHARGING SYSTEM
BRAKE SYSTEM
TBC GAIN = XX.X or NO
TRAILER (if equipped)
TBC GAIN = XX.X or OUTPUT =
////// (if equipped)
Information Displays 85
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
•OIL LIFE XXX% HOLD RESET = NEW: This displays the remaining oil
life. An oil change is required whenever indicated by the message
center and according to the recommended maintenance schedule. USE
ONLY RECOMMENDED ENGINE OILS.
To reset the oil monitoring system to 100% after each oil change,
perform the following:
1. Press and release the SELECT/RESET stem to display OIL LIFE
XXX% HOLD RESET = NEW.
2. Press and hold the SELECT/RESET stem for two seconds and release
to reset the oil life to 100%.
To change oil life 100% value (if equipped):
3. Once “OIL LIFE SET TO XXX%” is displayed, release and press the
SELECT/RESET stem to change the oil life start value. Each release and
press will reduce the value by 10%.
•UNITS ENG / METRIC: Displays the current units in English or Metric.
•AUTOLOCK: This feature automatically locks all vehicle doors when
the vehicle is shifted into any gear, putting the vehicle in motion.
•AUTOUNLOCK: This feature automatically unlocks all vehicle doors
when the driver’s door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition
being turned off.
•REAR PARK AID (if equipped): This feature sounds a tone to warn
the driver of obstacles near the rear bumper, and functions only when
R (Reverse) gear is selected.
•COMPASS (if equipped): Displays the vehicle’s heading direction.
The compass reading may be affected when you drive near large
buildings, bridges, power lines and powerful broadcast antenna. Magnetic
or metallic objects placed in, on or near the vehicle may also affect
compass accuracy. If the compass appears to be inaccurate, a manual
calibration may be necessary. Refer to Compass zone adjustment
86 Information Displays
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Compass zone adjustment
1. Determine which magnetic zone
you are in for your geographic
location by referring to the zone
map.
2. Press and release the
SELECT/RESET stem to scroll
through the information displays
until the message center displays
HOLD RESET FOR SETUP MENU.
3. Press and hold the
SELECT/RESET stem to get into
the setup menu. Repeatedly press it again to scroll through the setup
menu until the message center displays COMPASS ZONE XX.
4. Press and hold the SELECT/RESET stem for approximately two
seconds to go to the next zone, then release.
5. Press and hold to go up by one zone then release. Repeat this until
you reach the desired zone.
6. Release the SELECT/RESET stem and allow the setup timer to expire
to exit the procedure
Compass calibration adjustment
Note: For optimum calibration, drive to an open, level location away
from large metallic objects or structures. Switch off all non-essential
electrical accessories (heated rear window, heater, A/C, map lamps,
wiper, etc.) and make sure all the doors are closed
Note: If the SELECT/RESET stem is pressed during the calibration or
three minutes has elapsed since the beginning of the calibration without
driving the vehicle, the message center reverts back to normal operation
and the CAL will display until a successful calibration is carried out.
1. Press and release the SELECT/RESET stem to scroll through the
information displays until the message center displays HOLD RESET
FOR SETUP MENU.
2. Press and hold the SELECT/RESET stem to get into the setup menu.
Repeatedly press it again to scroll through the setup menu until the
message center displays HOLD RESET FOR CALIBRATION.
123
4
5
6 7 8 9 1011
12
13
14
15
Information Displays 87
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
3. Press and hold the SELECT/RESET stem for approximately two
seconds until the message center enters the compass zone adjustment
mode.
4. Press and hold the SELECT/RESET stem until the message center
displays CIRCLE SLOWLY TO CALIBRATE.
5. Slowly drive the vehicle in a circle less than 3 mph (5 km/h ) until the
CIRCLE SLOWLY TO CALIBRATE message changes to CALIBRATION
COMPLETED. This may require up to five circles to complete the
calibration.
•TBC MODE (if equipped): Allows you to choose the trailer brake
mode.
•LANGUAGE = ENGLISH / SPANISH / FRENCH: Allows you to choose
which language the message center will display in.
Waiting four seconds or pressing the SELECT/RESET stem cycles the
message center through each of the language choices.
Press the SELECT/RESET stem to set the language choice when the
language you want appears.
•HOLD RESET FOR SYSTEM CHECK: The message center will begin
to cycle through the vehicle systems and provide a status of the item
if needed. Some systems show a message only if a condition is
present.
88 Information Displays
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
INFORMATION MESSAGES
Press the SELECT/RESET stem to acknowledge and remove some
messages from the information display. Other messages will be removed
automatically after a short time. Certain messages need to be confirmed
before you can access the menus.
AdvanceTrac® /
Traction Control
Messages
Action / Description
SERVICE
ADVANCETRAC
Displayed when the AdvanceTrac® system has
detected a condition that requires service.
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Brake System
Messages
Action / Description
BRAKE FLUID
LEVEL LOW
Indicates the brake fluid level is low and the
brake system should be inspected immediately.
Refer to Brake fluid in the Maintenance
chapter.
CHECK BRAKE
SYSTEM
Displayed when the brake system needs
servicing. If the warning stays on or continues
to come on, contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
PARK BRAKE
ENGAGED
Displayed when the parking brake is set and
the vehicle is in motion.
Fuel Messages Action / Description
XXX MILES TO E
FUEL LEVEL LOW
Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel
condition.
Maintenance
Messages
Action / Description
ENGINE OIL
CHANGE SOON
Displayed when the engine oil life remaining is
between 5% and 0%.
OIL CHANGE
REQUIRED
Displayed when the oil life left reaches 0%.
OIL LIFE OK displays after you have changed
the oil.
Information Displays 89
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Park Aid Messages Action / Description
CHECK REAR PARK
AID
Displayed when the transmission is in R
(Reverse) and the park aid is disabled.
Tire Messages Action / Description
LOW TIRE
PRESSURE
Displays when one or more tires on your
vehicle have low tire pressure.
TIRE PRESSURE
MONITOR FAULT
Displays when the tire pressure monitoring
system is malfunctioning. If the warning stays
on or continues to come on, contact your
authorized dealer.
TIRE PRESSURE
SENSOR FAULT
Displayed when a tire pressure sensor is
malfunctioning, or your spare tire is in use.
For more information on how the system
operates under these conditions refer to the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System in the
Wheels and Tires chapter for more
information. If the warning stays on or
continues to come on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
90 Information Displays
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Trailer Messages Action / Description
TRAILER BRAKE
MODULE FAULT
Displayed and accompanied by a single chime,
in response to faults sensed by the TBC. Refer
to Trailer towing in the Towing chapter for
more information.
TRAILER
CONNECTED
Displayed when a correct trailer connection (a
trailer with electric trailer brakes) is sensed
during a given ignition cycle.
TRAILER
DISCONNECTED
Displayed when a trailer connection becomes
disconnected, either intentionally or
unintentionally, and has been sensed during a
given ignition cycle. Disregard this status if
your vehicle is not equipped with a factory
installed trailer brake controller. This message
may appear when an aftermarket TBC is used
even when the trailer is connected.
WIRING FAULT ON
TRAILER
Displayed if there are certain faults in the
vehicle wiring and trailer wiring/brake system.
Refer to Trailer towing in the Towing
chapter for more information.
Information Displays 91
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
HEATER ONLY SYSTEM
A. Fan speed control: Controls the volume of air circulated in your
vehicle. Adjust to select the desired fan speed or switch off. If you
switch the fan off, the windshield may fog up.
B. Temperature control: Controls the temperature of the air circulated
in your vehicle. Adjust to select the desired temperature.
C. Air distribution control: Adjust to select the desired air
distribution.
•VENT: Select to distribute air through the instrument panel air vents.
•FLR: Select to distribute air through the floor vents.
•OFF: Select to turn the system off.
•MIX: Select to distribute air through the instrument panel and floor
air vents.
Select to distribute air through the windshield air vents. You
can also use this setting to defog and clear the windshield of a
thin covering of ice. You can also increase the temperature and
fan speed to improve clearing.
HI
LO
COOL WARM
VENT
FLR
OFF
MIX
FAN
A B C
92 Climate Control
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL
A. Fan speed control: Controls the volume of air circulated in your
vehicle. Adjust to select the desired fan speed or switch off. If you
switch the fan off, the windshield may fog up.
B. Temperature control: Controls the temperature of the air circulated
in your vehicle. Adjust to select the desired temperature.
C. Air distribution control: Adjust to select the desired air
distribution.
•MAX A/C: Select to distribute maximum air conditioning through the
instrument panel air vents. This mode is more economical and
efficient than normal air conditioning.
•NORM A/C: Select to switch the air conditioning off and on. Air
conditioning cools your vehicle using outside air. To improve air
conditioning when starting your vehicle, drive with the windows
slightly open for two to three minutes.
•VENT: Select to distribute air through the instrument panel air vents.
•OFF: Select to turn the system off.
•FLR: Select to distribute air through the floor vents.
•MIX: Select to distribute air through the instrument panel and floor
air vents.
HI
LO
COOL WARM
VENT
NORM
A/C
MAX
A/C
OFF
MIX
FLR
FAN
A B C
Climate Control 93
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Select to distribute air through the windshield air vents. You
can also use this setting to defog and clear the windshield of a
thin covering of ice. You can also increase the temperature and
fan speed to improve clearing.
REAR FAN SPEED CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
Controls the volume of air circulated in the rear of your vehicle. Adjust
to select the desired fan speed or switch off.
HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE INTERIOR CLIMATE
General Hints
Note: A small amount of air may be felt from the floor air vents
regardless of the air distribution setting.
Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside your vehicle, do not drive with
the system switched off.
Note: Do not place objects under the front seats as this may interfere
with the airflow to the rear seats.
Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the
base of the windshield.
Note: To reduce fogging of the windshield during humid weather, adjust
the air distribution control to the windshield air vents position. Increase
the temperature and fan speed to improve clearing if required.
Heating the Interior Quickly
1 Adjust the fan speed to the highest speed setting.
2 Adjust the temperature control to the highest setting.
3 Adjust the air distribution control to FLR.
REAR
HI
LO
OFF
94 Climate Control
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Recommended Settings for Heating
1 Adjust the fan speed to the second speed setting.
2 Adjust the temperature control to the midway point of the hot
settings.
3 Adjust the air distribution control to MIX.
Cooling the Interior Quickly
1 Adjust the fan speed to the highest speed setting initially, then
adjust to the desired comfort level.
2 Adjust the temperature control to the lowest temperature
setting.
3 Adjust the air distribution control to MAX A/C.
Recommended Settings for Cooling
1 Adjust the fan speed to the second speed setting.
2 Adjust the temperature control to the midway point of the
cold settings.
3 Adjust the air distribution control to NORM A/C.
Vehicle Stationary for Extended Periods during Extreme High
Ambient Temperatures
1 Apply the parking brake.
2 Move the transmission selector lever to position P.
3 Select MAX A/C.
4 Adjust the fan speed to the lowest speed setting.
Side Window Defogging in Cold Weather
1 Adjust the air distribution control to NORM A/C.
2 Adjust the temperature control to the desired setting.
3 Adjust the fan speed to the highest setting.
4 Direct the instrument panel side air vents toward the side
windows.
5 Close the instrument panel vents.
Climate Control 95
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Maximum Cooling Performance in Instrument Panel or Instrument
Panel and Floor Positions
1 Adjust the temperature control to the lowest setting.
2 Adjust the fan speed to the highest setting initially and then
adjust it to suit the desired comfort level.
96 Climate Control
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
SITTING IN THE CORRECT POSITION
WARNING: Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat
back reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion
and affect the passenger sensing system, resulting in serious injury or
death in a crash. Always sit upright against your seat back, with your
feet on the floor.
WARNING: Do not recline the seat back as this can cause the
occupant to slide under the seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe
personal injury in the event of a crash.
WARNING: Do not place objects higher than the seat backs to
reduce the risk of injury in a crash or during heavy braking or
when stopping suddenly.
When you use them properly, the
seat, head restraint, safety belt and
airbags will provide optimum
protection in the event of a crash.
We recommend that you follow
these guidelines:
•Do not recline the seat back more than 30 degrees from vertical.
•Sit in an upright position with the base of your spine as far back as
possible.
•Adjust the head restraint so that the top of it is level with the top of
your head and as far forward as possible, remaining comfortable.
•Keep sufficient distance between yourself and the steering wheel. We
recommend a minimum of 10 inches (250 millimeters) between your
breastbone and the airbag cover.
•Hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent.
•Bend your legs slightly so that you can press the pedals fully.
•Position the shoulder strap of the safety belt over the center of your
shoulder and position the lap strap tightly across your hips.
Seats 97
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Make sure that your driving position is comfortable and that you can
maintain full control of your vehicle.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNING: To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash , the driver and passenger occupants should not sit in and
operate the vehicle until the seat back is placed in its proper position.
The driver should never adjust the head restraint while the vehicle is in
motion.
Front Seat Head Restraints
The front row outboard non-adjustable head restraints consist of a
trimmed foam covering over the upper structure of the seat back.
Properly adjust the seat back to an upright driving or riding position, so
that the head restraint is positioned as close as possible to the back of
your head.
MANUAL SEATS
WARNING: Do not adjust the driver’s seat or seat back when
your vehicle is moving.
WARNING: Rock the seat backward and forward after releasing
the lever to make sure that it is fully engaged.
98 Seats
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Moving the Seats Backward and
Forward (If Equipped)
Recline Adjustment (If
Equipped)
WARNING: Before returning the seatback to its original position,
make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the
seatback. After returning the seat back to its original position, pull on
the seatback to make sure that it has fully latched. An unlatched seat
may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or crash.
Manual Lumbar (If Equipped)
The lumbar support control is located on the inboard side of the driver’s
seat. Turn the control to adjust your support.
Seats 99
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
POWER SEATS
WARNING: Never adjust the driver’s seat when the vehicle is
moving.
The control is located on the outboard side of the seat cushion.
Press A to raise or lower the front
portion of the seat cushion.
Press B to move the seat forward,
backward, up or down.
Press C to raise or lower the rear
portion of the seat cushion.
REAR SEATS
Rear Captains Chair (Passenger Side Only)
Pull the lever to adjust the seat
forward or backward.
A B C
100 Seats
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Quick-Release Captains Chair (Seven Passenger
Configuration-Second Row Only)
WARNING: Check to see that the seat and seat back is latched
securely in position. Keep floor area free of objects that would
prevent proper seat engagement. Never attempt to adjust the seat while
the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING: Make sure that the seat is latched to the vehicle
floor by pushing and pulling on the seat. If not latched, the seat
may cause injury during a sudden stop.
To remove the seat:
1. Disengage the lap and shoulder
belt from the seat by inserting a key
or small screwdriver into the slot in
the detachable anchor and lifting
upward.
2. Pull the seat latch handle, then
pull the seat toward the right side
of the vehicle to disengage four pins
from the floor mount.
3. Remove the seat.
Seats 101
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
To install the seat:
1. Position the seat to the floor
mount.
2. Pull the seat latch handle downward to lock the seat in position.
3. Make sure the safety belt is not twisted. Then, insert the safety belt
tongue into the detachable anchor until it is securely fastened and you
feel the latch engage.
Rear Bench Seat
WARNING: Always latch the vehicle seat to the floor, whether
the seat is occupied or empty. If not latched, the seat may cause
injury during a sudden stop.
WARNING: Do not hang or attach any cargo to the release
straps of the rear bench seats. Doing so could cause the release
straps to inadvertently unlatch the rear bench seat. If not latched, the
seat may cause serious injury during a sudden stop.
To remove the seats:
1. Disengage the lap and shoulder
belt from the seat by inserting a key
or small screwdriver into the slot in
the detachable anchor and lifting
upward (second row passenger side
only).
2. Find the clip attached near the end of the lap belt.
102 Seats
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
3. Clip the end of the belt to the
stationary portion of the shoulder
belt coming out of the trim panel.
The end of the shoulder belt must
be clipped in order to keep it from
striking anything during vehicle
operation.
4. With assistance, pull the seat
latch release straps (A) (located
behind the latch mechanisms) to
release the latch from the rear
strikers.
5. Lift the rear end of the seat upward and rearward by pushing on the
seat back (B) and lifting the seat cushion (C) to disengage the front seat
hook and the rear seat latch from the striker.
6. With assistance, remove the seat assembly.
•To remove the third, fourth, and fifth row seats (if equipped), repeat
Steps 1 through 6.
WARNING: Make sure that the seat is installed or removed from
the striker pins with adequate ergonomic assistance. Due to the
weight of the seat, it must be handled by at least two adults during
installation or removal from the vehicle.
WARNING: Make sure that the seat is latched to the vehicle
floor by pushing and pulling on the seat or seat back (B). If not
latched, the seat may cause injury during a sudden stop.
A
C
B
A
Seats 103
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
To install the seat:
1. Make sure the floor striker area is clean of any debris that would
prevent the seat from latching.
2. With assistance, position the seat in the vehicle.
3. Align the front hooks to the front striker pins prior to lowering the
rear latch mechanism and aligning them with the rear striker pins.
4. Engage the front hooks to the front striker pins.
5. After the front hooks are engaged to the front striker pins, pull the
seat latch release straps to allow engagement of the latch to the striker
pins.
6. Pull and push the seat back forward and backward to check for proper
seat installation.
104 Seats
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
AUXILIARY POWER POINTS
WARNING: Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the
cigarette lighter socket (if equipped). Improper use of the lighter
can cause damage not covered by your warranty, and can result in fire
or serious injury.
Note: If used when the engine is not running, the battery will discharge.
There may be insufficient power to restart your engine.
Note: Do not insert objects other than an accessory plug into the power
point. This will damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
Note: Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the
plug.
Note: Do not use the power point over the vehicle capacity of 12 volts
DC 180 watts or a fuse may blow.
Note: Do not use the power point for operating a cigarette lighter
element.
Note: Improper use of the power point can cause damage not covered
by your warranty.
Note: Always keep the power point caps closed when not in use.
Run the engine for full capacity use of the power point. To prevent the
battery from being discharged:
•Do not use the power point longer than necessary when the engine is
not running.
•Do not leave devices plugged in overnight or when the vehicle is
parked for extended periods.
Locations
Power points may be found:
•on the instrument panel
•in the glove box
•behind the driver’s seat on the upper trim panel (if equipped).
Auxiliary Power Points 105
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
110 Volt AC Power Point (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not keep electrical devices plugged in the
powerpoint whenever the device is not in use. Do not use any
extension cord with the 110 volt AC power point, since it will defeat
the safety protection design. Doing so my cause the powerpoint to
overload due to powering multiple devices that can reach beyond the
150 watt load limit and could result in fire or serious injury.
Note: The cap should always be closed whenever the power point outlet
is not in use.
Note: Keep the engine running to use the power point.
The 110 volt AC power point outlet is used for powering electrical
devices that require up to 150 watt. Exceeding the 150 watt limit will
cause the power point to cut off the power temporarily to provide
overload protection.
The power point is located on the
instrument panel.
The power point is not designed for the following electric appliances;
they may not work properly:
•Cathode ray tube type televisions
•Motor loads, such as vacuum cleaners, electric saws and other electric
power tools, compressor-driven refrigerators, etc.
•Measuring devices, which process precise data, such as medical
equipment, measuring equipment, etc.
•Other appliances requiring an extremely stable power supply:
microcomputer-controlled electric blankets, touch sensor lamps, etc.
The power point can switch to a fault mode when it is overloaded,
overheated, or shorted. Unplug your device and turn the ignition off then
on for overloading and shorting conditions. Let the system cool off, then
turn the ignition off then on for an overheating condition.
106 Auxiliary Power Points
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
The power point can provide power whenever the ignition is on and the
indicator light is on. The indicator light is located in the top left corner
of the power point.
When the indicator light is:
•on — power point is ready to supply power
•off — power point power supply is off; ignition is not on
•blinking — power point is in fault mode
Auxiliary Power Points 107
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce
very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system,
creating the risk of fire or other damage.
WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle on dry grass
or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
WARNING: Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in
other enclosed areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open
the garage door before you start the engine.
WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have
your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer immediately. Do
not drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle may exhibit some unusual
driving characteristics for approximately 5 miles (8 kilometers) after you
connect it. This is because the engine management system must realign
itself with the engine. You may disregard any unusual driving
characteristics during this period.
The powertrain control system meets all Canadian interference-causing
equipment standard requirements regulating the impulse electrical field
or radio noise.
Do not press the accelerator pedal while starting the engine. If you have
difficulty starting the engine, see Failure to start later in this section.
108 Starting and Stopping the Engine
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
IGNITION SWITCH
Note: Do not store the key in the ignition after the vehicle is turned off
and you have left the vehicle. This could cause a drain on the battery.
A. Accessory: Allows the electrical accessories, such as the radio, to
operate while the engine is not running.
B. Lock: Locks the automatic transmission gearshift lever and allows key
removal.
C. Off: Shuts off the engine and all accessories without locking the
steering wheel.
D. On: All the electrical circuits are operational. Warning lights are
illuminated. This is the key position when driving.
E. Start: Cranks the engine. Release the key as soon as the engine
starts.
STARTING A GASOLINE ENGINE
When you start the engine, the idle speed increases, this helps to warm
up the engine. If the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically,
have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer.
Before starting the engine check the following:
•Make sure all occupants have fastened their safety belts.
•Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off.
•Make sure the parking brake is on.
•Make sure the gearshift is in position P.
•Turn the ignition key to the on position. If your vehicle is equipped
with a keyless ignition, see the following instructions.
D
E
C
B
A
Starting and Stopping the Engine 109
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Vehicles with an Ignition Key
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Turn the key to the start position. Release the key when the engine
starts.
Note: The engine may continue cranking for up to 15 seconds or until it
starts.
Note: If you cannot start the engine on the first try, wait for a short
period and try again.
Vehicles with Keyless Start
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Press the button.
The system does not function if:
•The key frequencies are jammed.
•The key battery has no charge.
If you are unable to start your vehicle, do the following:
1. Locate the key backup slot at the
front of the center console storage
compartment.
2. With the buttons facing down,
place the key into backup slot.
3. With the key in this position,
press the brake pedal, then the
button to switch the ignition on
and start your vehicle.
110 Starting and Stopping the Engine
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Fast Restart (Vehicles with Keyless Start)
The fast restart feature allows you to restart the engine within
20 seconds of switching it off, even if a valid key is not present.
Within 20 seconds of switching the engine off, press the brake pedal and
press the button. After 20 seconds have expired, you can no longer start
the engine without the key present inside your vehicle.
Once the engine has started, it remains running until you press the
button, even if the system does not detect a valid key. If you open and
close a door while the engine is running, the system searches for a valid
key. You cannot start the engine if the system does not detect a valid key
within 20 seconds.
Failure to Start
If you cannot start the engine after three attempts, wait 10 seconds and
follow this procedure:
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal and hold it there.
3. Start the engine.
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle Is Stationary
1. Move the transmission selector lever to position P.
2. If your vehicle has an ignition key, turn the key to the off position. If
your vehicle has a keyless start system, press the button once.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Note: This switches off the ignition, all electrical circuits, warning lamps
and indicators.
Note: If the engine is idling for 30 minutes, the ignition and engine
automatically shut down.
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle Is Moving
WARNING: Switching off the engine when the vehicle is still
moving will result in a loss of brake and steering assistance. The
steering will not lock, but higher effort will be required. When the
ignition is switched off, some electrical circuits, warning lamps and
indicators may also be off.
Starting and Stopping the Engine 111
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
1. If your vehicle has an ignition key, move the transmission
selector lever to position Nand use the brakes to bring your vehicle
to a safe stop. When your vehicle has stopped, move the transmission
selector lever to position Pand turn the key to the off position.
2. If your vehicle has a keyless start system, press and hold the
button for one second, or press it three times within two seconds.
Move the transmission selector lever to position Nand use the brakes
to bring your vehicle to a safe stop. When your vehicle has stopped,
move the transmission selector lever to position Pand switch the
ignition off.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Cold Weather Starting (Flexible Fuel Vehicles Only)
Note: Do not crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time as
starter damage may occur. If the engine fails to start, turn the key to off
and wait 30 seconds before trying again.
Note: Do not use starting fluid such as ether in the air intake system.
Such fluid could cause immediate explosive damage to the engine and
possible personal injury.
Note: You may experience a decrease in peak performance when the
engine is cold when operating on E85 ethanol.
The starting characteristics of all grades of E85 ethanol make it
unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C).
Consult your fuel distributor for the availability of winter grade ethanol.
As the outside temperature approaches freezing, ethanol fuel distributors
should supply winter grade ethanol (same as with unleaded gasoline). If
summer grade ethanol is used in cold weather conditions, 0°F to 32°F
(-18°C to 0°C), you may experience increased cranking times, rough idle
or hesitation until the engine has warmed up.
If you should experience cold weather starting problems on E85 ethanol,
and neither an alternative brand of E85 ethanol nor an engine block
heater is available, adding unleaded gasoline to your tank improves cold
starting performance. Your vehicle is designed to operate on E85 ethanol
alone, unleaded gasoline alone, or any mixture of the two.
See Choosing the right fuel in the Fuels and Refueling chapter for
more information on ethanol.
112 Starting and Stopping the Engine
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes
WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have
this checked immediately. Do not drive your vehicle if you smell
exhaust fumes. Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. Take
precautions to avoid its dangerous effects.
Important Ventilating Information
If you stop your vehicle and leave the engine idling for long periods of
time, we recommend that you do one of the following:
•Open the windows at least 1 inch (2.5 centimeters).
•Set your climate control to outside air.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Failure to follow engine block heater instructions
could result in property damage or physical injury.
WARNING: Do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical
systems or two-pronged (cheater) adapters. There is a risk of
electrical shock.
Note: The heater is most effective when outdoor temperatures are below
0°F (-18°C).
The heater acts as a starting aid by warming the engine coolant. This
allows the climate control system to respond quickly. The equipment
includes a heater element (installed in the engine block) and a wire
harness. You can connect the system to a grounded 120–volt A/C
electrical source.
We recommend that you do the following for safe and correct operation:
•Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord that is product certified by
Underwriter’s Laboratory or Canadian Standards Association. This
extension cord must be suitable for use outdoors, in cold
temperatures, and be clearly marked Suitable for Use with Outdoor
Appliances. Never use an indoor extension cord outdoors; it could
result in an electric shock or become a fire hazard.
•Use as short an extension cord as possible.
•Do not use multiple extension cords.
Starting and Stopping the Engine 113
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
•Make sure that when in operation, the extension cord plug and the
heater cord plug connections are free and clear of water. This could
cause an electric shock or fire.
•Make sure your vehicle is parked in a clean area, clear of
combustibles.
•Make sure the heater, heater cord and extension cord are firmly
connected.
•Check for heat anywhere in the electrical hookup once the system has
been operating for approximately 30 minutes.
•Make sure the system is unplugged and properly stowed before driving
your vehicle. Make sure the protective cover seals the prongs of the
block heater cord plug when not in use.
•Keep plug terminals clean and free of dirt and corrosion.
•Make sure the heater system is checked for proper operation before
winter.
Using the Engine Block Heater
Make sure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry prior to use. Clean
them with a dry cloth, if necessary.
The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours of energy per hour of use. The
system does not have a thermostat. It achieves maximum temperature
after approximately three hours of operation. Using the heater longer
than three hours does not improve system performance and
unnecessarily uses electricity.
114 Starting and Stopping the Engine
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an
overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire.
WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If you hear
a hissing sound near the fuel filler inlet, do not refuel until the
sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray out, which could cause serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if
misused or mishandled.
WARNING: The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can
produce static electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped
into an ungrounded fuel container.
WARNING: Fuel ethanol and gasoline may contain benzene,
which is a cancer-causing agent.
WARNING: When refueling always shut the engine off and never
allow sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never smoke
while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain
conditions. Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes.
Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel:
•Extinguish all smoking materials and any open flames before refueling
your vehicle.
•Always turn off the vehicle before refueling.
•Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal if swallowed. Fuel, such as
gasoline, is highly toxic and if swallowed can cause death or
permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed, call a physician immediately,
even if no symptoms are immediately apparent. The toxic effects of
fuel may not be visible for hours.
•Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind
can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases,
excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious
illness and permanent injury.
Fuel and Refueling 115
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
•Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes,
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and
seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could
lead to permanent injury.
•Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is
splashed on the skin or clothing, promptly remove contaminated
clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or
prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.
•
Be particularly careful if you are taking Antabuse or other forms of
disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline vapors, or
skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In sensitive individuals,
serious personal injury or sickness may result. If fuel is splashed on the
skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Consult a
physician immediately if you experience an adverse reaction.
FUEL QUALITY
Note: Use of any fuel other than those recommended may cause
powertrain damage and a loss of vehicle performance; repairs may not be
covered under warranty.
Choosing the Right Fuel
Use only unleaded fuel or unleaded fuel blended with a maximum of 15%
ethanol. Do not use fuel ethanol (E85), diesel fuel, fuel- methanol,
leaded fuel or any other fuel because it could damage or impair the
emission control system.
Choosing the Right Fuel With a Flex Fuel Vehicle (If Equipped)
Note: If your vehicle is flex fuel capable, it will have a yellow bezel
placed over the fuel fill inlet.
Flex fuel vehicles are designed to use unleaded gasoline or an ethanol
fuel blend that contain up to 85% ethanol. It is also acceptable to use
any mixture of unleaded gasoline and ethanol fuel that contains up to
85% ethanol. An ethanol fuel blend that contains 85% ethanol is labeled
as E85 at the service station.
It is best not to alternate repeatedly between gasoline and E85. If you do
switch fuels, it is recommended that you add as much fuel as
possible—at least half a tank. Do not add less than five gallons
(18.9 liters) when refueling. You should drive the vehicle immediately
after refueling for at least 5 miles (8 kilometers) to allow the vehicle to
adapt to the change in ethanol concentration. If you exclusively use E85
fuel, it is recommended to fill the fuel tank with regular unleaded
gasoline at each scheduled oil change.
116 Fuel and Refueling
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Octane Recommendations
Regular unleaded gasoline with a
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87
is recommended. Some stations
offer fuels posted as “Regular” with
an octane rating below 87,
particularly in high altitude areas.
Fuels with octane levels below 87
are not recommended.
Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if
it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using fuel
with the recommended octane rating, see your authorized dealer to
prevent any engine damage.
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse
effect on powertrain components.
If you have run out of fuel:
•You may need to cycle the ignition from off to on several times after
refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to
the engine. On restarting, crank time will be a few seconds longer
than normal. With keyless ignition, just start the engine. Crank time
will be longer than usual.
•Normally, adding 1 gallon (3.8 liters) of fuel is enough to restart the
engine. If the vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep grade, more than
1 gallon (3.8 liters) may be required.
•The service engine soon indicator may come on. For more information
on the service engine soon indicator, see Warning Lamps and
Indicators in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
87
(R+M)/2 METHOD
Fuel and Refueling 117
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
REFUELING
WARNING: Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause
severe injuries. To help avoid injuries to you and others:
•Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island.
•Turn off your engine when you are refueling.
•Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.
•Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials away from fuel.
•Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling your vehicle - this is against the law in some places.
•Keep children away from the fuel pump; never let children pump
fuel.
•Do not use personal electronic devices while refueling.
Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build-up when
filling an ungrounded fuel container:
•Place approved fuel container on the ground.
•DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle (including the
cargo area).
•Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while
filling.
•DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill
position.
Fuel Filler Cap
WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel
filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait
until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise,
fuel may spray out and injure you or others.
WARNING: If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive
vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause
the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in personal
injury.
118 Fuel and Refueling
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Note: If you must replace the fuel filler cap, replace it with a fuel filler
cap that is designed for your vehicle. The customer warranty may be
void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel system if the correct
genuine Ford, Motorcraft® or other certified fuel filler cap is not used.
Your fuel tank filler cap has an indexed design with a 1/4 turn on/off
feature.
When fueling your vehicle:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Carefully turn the filler cap counterclockwise until it spins off.
3. Pull to remove the cap from the fuel filler pipe.
4. To install the cap, align the tabs on the cap with the notches on the
filler pipe.
5. Turn the filler cap clockwise 1/4 of a turn until it clicks at least once.
If the check fuel cap light or a CHECK FUEL CAP message comes on,
the fuel filler cap may not be properly installed. The light or message can
come on after several driving events after you’ve refueled your vehicle.
At the next opportunity, safely pull off of the road, remove the fuel filler
cap, align the cap properly and reinstall it. The check fuel cap light or
check fuel cap message may not reset immediately; it may take several
driving cycles for the check fuel cap light or CHECK FUEL CAP
message to turn off. A driving cycle consists of an engine start-up (after
four or more hours with the engine off) followed by city and highway
driving.
Continuing to drive with the check fuel cap light or “check fuel cap”
message on may cause the “service engine soon” light to turn on as well.
FUEL CONSUMPTION
Filling the Tank
The advertised capacity is the indicated capacity and the empty reserve
combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in the amount of fuel in a
full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates empty. Empty reserve
is the amount of fuel in the tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty.
Note: The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should
not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your vehicle
after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be able to refuel the
full amount of the advertised capacity of the fuel tank due to the empty
reserve still present in the tank.
Fuel and Refueling 119
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
For consistent results when filling the fuel tank:
•Turn the ignition off before fueling; an inaccurate reading results if the
engine is left running.
•Use the same fill rate (low–medium–high) each time the tank is filled.
•Allow no more than two automatic click–offs when filling.
Results are most accurate when the filling method is consistent.
Calculating Fuel Economy
Do not measure fuel economy during the first 1000 miles
(1600 kilometers) of driving (this is your engine’s break-in period); a
more accurate measurement is obtained after 2000 miles–3000 miles
(3200 kilometers–4800 kilometers). Also, fuel expense, frequency of
fill-ups or fuel gauge readings are not accurate ways to measure fuel
economy.
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading.
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added.
3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record
the current odometer reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer
reading.
5. Calculate fuel economy as follows:
Standard: Divide miles traveled by gallons used.
Metric: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by kilometers traveled.
Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city
or highway). This provides an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel
economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records
during summer and winter show how temperature impacts fuel economy.
In general, lower temperatures mean lower fuel economy.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass
or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and
potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment. If you
smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer inspect your
vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
120 Fuel and Refueling
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a
catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with
applicable exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic
converter and other emission control components continue to work
properly:
•Use only the specified fuel listed.
•Avoid running out of fuel.
•Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at
high speeds.
•Have the items listed in Scheduled Maintenance Information
performed according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed in Scheduled Maintenance
Information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle
and to its emissions system.
If other than Ford, Motorcraft® or Ford-authorized parts are used for
maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting
emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine
Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability.
Illumination of the service engine soon indicator, charging system
warning light or the temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors,
smoke or loss of engine power could indicate that the emission control
system is not working properly.
An improperly operating or damaged exhaust system may allow exhaust
to enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or improperly operating exhaust
system inspected and repaired immediately.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By
law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services,
sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not
permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent
it from working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on
the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the
engine. This decal also lists engine displacement.
Please consult your warranty information for complete emission warranty
information.
Fuel and Refueling 121
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
On-board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine’s
emission control system. This system is commonly known as the
on-board diagnostics system (OBD-II). The OBD-II system protects the
environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet
government emission standards. The OBD-II system also assists your
authorized dealer in properly servicing your vehicle.
When the service engine soon indicator illuminates, the OBD-II
system has detected a malfunction. Temporary malfunctions
may cause the service engine soon indicator to illuminate.
Examples are:
1. The vehicle has run out of fuel—the engine may misfire or run poorly.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel—the engine may misfire or run
poorly.
3. The fuel cap may not have been securely tightened. See Fuel filler
cap in this chapter.
4. Driving through deep water—the electrical system may be wet.
These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank
with good quality fuel, properly closing the fuel fill inlet or letting the
electrical system dry out. After three driving cycles without these or any
other temporary malfunctions present, the service engine soon indicator
should stay off the next time the engine is started. A driving cycle
consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed city/highway driving.
No additional vehicle service is required.
If the service engine soon indicator remains on, have your vehicle
serviced at the first available opportunity. Although some malfunctions
detected by the OBD-II may not have symptoms that are apparent,
continued driving with the service engine soon indicator on can result in
increased emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced engine and
transmission smoothness, and lead to more costly repairs.
122 Fuel and Refueling
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) Testing
Some state, provincial and local governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could prevent
you from getting a vehicle registration.
If the service engine soon indicator is on or the bulb does not
work, the vehicle may need to be serviced. See On-board
Diagnostics (OBD-II) in this chapter.
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if the service engine soon
indicator is on or not working properly (bulb is burned out), or if the
OBD-II system has determined that some of the emission control systems
have not been properly checked. In this case, the vehicle is considered
not ready for I/M testing.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has just been serviced, or the
battery has recently run down or been replaced, the OBD-II system may
indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To determine if the
vehicle is ready for I/M testing, turn the ignition key to the on position
for 15 seconds without cranking the engine. If the service engine soon
indicator blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not ready for I/M
testing; if the service engine soon indicator stays on solid, it means that
the vehicle is ready for I/M testing.
The OBD-II system is designed to check the emission control system
during normal driving. A complete check may take several days. If the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, the following driving cycle consisting
of mixed city and highway driving may be performed:
15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway or highway followed by
20 minutes of stop-and-go driving with at least four 30-second idle
periods.
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the
engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The
engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once the
engine is started, do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle
is complete. If the vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing, the above
driving cycle will have to be repeated.
Fuel and Refueling 123
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION
Understanding the Gearshift Positions of the 4–Speed Automatic
Transmission
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the lock
position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
Your vehicle has been designed to improve fuel economy by reducing
fuel usage during coasting or deceleration. When you take your foot off
the accelerator pedal and the vehicle begins to slow down the torque
converter clutch locks up and aggressively shuts off fuel flow to the
engine while decelerating. This fuel economy benefit may be perceived
as a light to medium braking sensation when removing your foot from
the accelerator pedal.
P (Park)
This position locks the transmission and prevents the rear wheels from
turning.
To put your vehicle in gear:
1. Start the engine
2. Press the brake pedal
3. Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear
To put your vehicle in P (Park):
1. Come to a complete stop
2. Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park)
124 Transmission
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
R (Reverse)
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R
(Reverse).
N (Neutral)
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is
free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.
D (Drive with Overdrive)
The normal driving position for the
best fuel economy. Transmission
operates in gears one through four.
Overdrive can be deactivated by
pressing the transmission control
switch on the end of the gearshift
lever.
The O/D OFF lamp will illuminate in the instrument cluster.
Transmission 125
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Drive (not shown)
Drive is activated when the transmission control switch is pressed.
•This position allows for all forward gears except overdrive.
•O/D OFF lamp is illuminated.
•Provides engine braking.
•Use when driving conditions cause excessive shifting from O/D to
other gears. Examples: hilly terrain, heavy loads, trailer towing and
when engine braking is required.
•To return to O/D (Overdrive), press the transmission control switch.
The O/D OFF lamp will not be illuminated.
•O/D (Overdrive) is automatically returned each time the key is turned
off.
2 (Second)
This position allows for second gear only.
•Provides engine braking.
•Use to start-up on slippery roads.
•To return to D (Drive with Overdrive) , move the gearshift lever
into the D (Drive with Overdrive) position.
•Selecting 2 (Second) at higher speeds will cause the transmission to
downshift to second gear at the appropriate vehicle speed.
1 (First)
•Provides maximum engine braking.
•Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever.
•Will not downshift into 1 (First) at high speeds; allows for 1 (First)
when vehicle reaches slower speeds.
Forced downshifts
•Allowed in D (Drive with Overdrive).
•Press the accelerator to the floor.
•Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear.
126 Transmission
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Understanding the Shift Positions of the 5–Speed Automatic
Transmission (If Equipped - 5.4L and 6.8L Gasoline Engines Only)
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the lock
position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
WARNING: Do not use the tow/haul feature when driving in icy
or slippery conditions as the increased engine braking can cause
the rear wheels to slide and the vehicle to swing around with the
possible loss of vehicle control.
Your vehicle has been designed to improve fuel economy by reducing
fuel usage during coasting or deceleration. When you take your foot off
the accelerator pedal and the vehicle begins to slow down the torque
converter clutch locks up and aggressively shuts off fuel flow to the
engine while decelerating. This fuel economy benefit may be perceived
as a light to medium braking sensation when removing your foot from
the accelerator pedal.
P (Park)
This position locks the transmission and prevents the rear wheels from
turning.
To put your vehicle in gear:
1. Start the engine
2. Press the brake pedal
3. Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear
To put your vehicle in P (Park):
1. Come to a complete stop.
2. Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park).
R (Reverse)
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R
(Reverse).
Transmission 127
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
N (Neutral)
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is
free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.
D (Drive with Overdrive) with Tow/Haul off
D (Overdrive) with tow/haul off is the normal driving position for the
best fuel economy. The overdrive function allows automatic upshifts and
downshifts through gears one through five.
D (Drive with Overdrive) with Tow/Haul on
The tow/haul feature improves transmission operation when towing a
trailer or a heavy load. All transmission gear ranges are available when
using tow/haul.
To activate tow/haul, press the
button on the end of the gearshift
lever.
The TOW HAUL indicator light will illuminate in the instrument
cluster.
Tow/haul delays upshifts to reduce frequency of transmission shifting.
Tow/haul also provides engine braking in all forward gears when the
transmission is in the D (Overdrive) position; this engine braking will
slow the vehicle and assist the driver in controlling the vehicle when
descending a grade. Depending on driving conditions and load
conditions, the transmission may downshift, slow the vehicle and control
the vehicle speed when descending a hill, without the accelerator pedal
being pressed. The amount of downshift braking provided will vary based
upon the amount the brake pedal is depressed.
To deactivate the tow/haul feature and return to normal d riving mode,
press the button on the end of the gearshift lever. The TOW HAUL light
will no longer be illuminated.
When you shut-off and restart the engine, the transmission will
automatically return to normal D (Overdrive) mode (Tow/Haul OFF).
128 Transmission
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
3 (Third)
Transmission starts and operates in third gear only.
Used for improved traction on slippery roads. Selecting 3 (Third)
provides engine braking.
2 (Second)
Use 2 (Second) to start-up on slippery roads or to provide additional
engine braking on downgrades.
1 (First)
•Provides maximum engine braking.
•Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever.
•The transmission will not downshift into 1 (First) at high speeds; it
will downshift to a lower gear and then shift into 1 (First) when the
vehicle reaches slower speeds.
Forced downshifts
•Allowed in (D ) (Drive with Overdrive) or Drive.
•Press the accelerator to the floor.
•Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear.
Brake-Shift Interlock
WARNING: Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the
brake lamps are working.
WARNING: When doing this procedure, you will be taking the
vehicle out of park which means the vehicle can roll freely. To
avoid unwanted vehicle movement, always fully set the parking brake
prior to doing this procedure. Use wheel chocks if appropriate.
WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake
warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. See your authorized dealer.
The vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents
the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) unless the brake
pedal is pressed.
Transmission 129
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with the ignition
in the on position and the brake pedal pressed, it is possible that a fuse
has blown or the vehicle’s brake lamps are not operating properly. Refer
to Fuses chapter.
If the fuse is not blown and the brake lamps are working properly, the
following procedure will allow you to move the gearshift lever from P
(Park):
1. Apply the parking brake, and
turn the ignition to the on position.
2. Use a screwdriver to remove the
lower trim panel under the steering
column. Make sure to not disturb
the wires on the electrical
connector.
3. Locate the brake-shift interlock
solenoid underneath the steering
column.
4. Pull back on the solenoid, and at
the same time, shift the
transmission into N (Neutral).
5. Start the vehicle.
See your authorized dealer as soon
as possible if this procedure is used.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck in Mud or Snow
Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
130 Transmission
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Automatic Transmission Adaptive Learning
This feature is designed to increase durability and provide consistent
shift feel over the life of the vehicle. A new vehicle or transmission may
have firm shifts, soft shifts or both. This operation is considered normal
and will not affect function or durability of the transmission. Over time,
the adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation.
Additionally, whenever the battery is disconnected or a new battery
installed, the strategy must be relearned.
AXLE INFORMATION
Traction-Lok axle (if equipped)
This axle provides added traction on slippery surfaces, particularly when
one wheel is on a poor traction surface. Under normal conditions, the
traction-lok axle functions like a standard rear axle. The axle may exhibit
a slight noise or vibration in tight turns with low vehicle speed. This is
normal behavior and indicates the axle is working.
Transmission 131
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous
grinding or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake linings may be
worn out. Have them inspected by an authorized dealer. If your vehicle
has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking,
have your vehicle inspected by an authorized dealer.
Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the wheels, even under normal
driving conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the brakes wear and does
not contribute to brake noise. See the Vehicle Care chapter for wheel
cleaning instructions.
See the Instrument Cluster chapter for information on the
brake system warning light.
Wet brakes result in reduced braking efficiency. Gently press the brake
pedal a few times when driving from a car wash or standing water to dry
the brakes.
Brake Over Accelerator
In the event the accelerator pedal becomes stuck or entrapped, apply
steady and firm pressure to the brake pedal to slow your vehicle and
reduce engine power. If you experience this condition, apply the brakes
and bring your vehicle to a safe stop. Turn the engine off, shift to
position Pand apply the parking brake, then inspect the accelerator
pedal for any interferences. If none are found and the condition persists,
have your vehicle towed to the nearest authorized dealer.
Anti-Lock Brake System
This system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops
by keeping the brakes from locking.
This lamp momentarily illuminates when you turn the ignition
on. If the light does not illuminate during start-up, remains on
or flashes, the anti-lock brake system may be disabled and may
need to be serviced.
If the anti-lock brake system is disabled, normal braking is still
effective. If the brake warning lamp illuminates with the parking
brake released, have your brake system serviced immediately.
132 Brakes
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
HINTS ON DRIVING WITH ANTI-LOCK BRAKES
When the system is operating, the brake pedal will pulse and may travel
further. Maintain pressure on the brake pedal. You may also hear a noise
from the system. This is normal.
The anti-lock braking system will not eliminate the dangers inherent
when:
•you drive too closely to the vehicle in front of you.
•your vehicle is hydroplaning.
•you take corners too fast.
•the road surface is poor.
PARKING BRAKE
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
that the transmission selector lever is securely latched in position
P.
To set the parking brake, press the parking brake pedal down until the
pedal stops.
The brake warning lamp will illuminate and will remain illuminated until
the parking brake is released.
To release, pull the brake release lever located at the lower left side of
the instrument panel.
Brakes 133
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
The traction control system helps avoid drive wheel spin and loss of
traction.
If your vehicle begins to slide, the system applies the brakes to individual
wheels and, when needed, reduces engine power at the same time. If the
wheels spin when accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces, the system
reduces engine power in order to increase traction.
USING TRACTION CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
In certain situations (for example, stuck in snow or mud), turning the
traction control off may be beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin
with full engine power. Turn the traction control system off using the
TCS OFF button located on the instrument panel.
System indicator lights and messages
WARNING: If a failure has been detected within the Traction
Control System, the stability control light will illuminate steadily.
Verify that the Traction Control System was not manually disabled. If
the stability control light still illuminates steadily, have the system
serviced by an authorized dealer immediately. Operating your vehicle
with Traction Control disabled could lead to an increased risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
The stability control light temporarily illuminates on engine
start-up and flashes when a driving condition activates the
stability system.
The stability control off light temporarily illuminates on engine
start-up and stays on when the traction control system is
turned off or if a problem occurs in the stability system.
When the traction control system is turned off or on, a message appears
in the information display showing system status.
134 Traction Control
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
WARNING: Vehicle modifications involving braking system,
aftermarket roof racks, suspension, steering system, tire
construction or wheel and tire size may change the handling
characteristics of the vehicle and may adversely affect the performance
of the AdvanceTrac® system. In addition, installing any stereo
loudspeakers may interfere with and adversely affect the AdvanceTrac®
system. Install any aftermarket stereo loudspeaker as far as possible
from the front center console, the tunnel, and the front seats in order
to minimize the risk of interfering with the AdvanceTrac® sensors.
Reducing the effectiveness of the AdvanceTrac® system could lead to
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
WARNING: Remember that even advanced technology cannot
defy the laws of physics. It’s always possible to lose control of a
vehicle due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Aggressive
driving on any road condition can cause you to lose control of your
vehicle increasing the risk of personal injury or property damage.
Activation of the AdvanceTrac® system is an indication that at least
some of the tires have exceeded their ability to grip the road; this could
reduce the operator’s ability to control the vehicle potentially resulting
in a loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. If
your AdvanceTrac® system activates, SLOW DOWN.
The AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability Control™ system helps you keep
control of your vehicle when on a slippery surface. The electronic
stability control portion of the system helps avoid skids and lateral slides
and roll stability control helps avoid a vehicle rollover. The traction
control system helps avoid drive wheel spin and loss of traction. See the
Traction Control chapter for details on traction control system
operation.
Stability Control 135
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
AVehicle without AdvanceTrac®
with RSC® skidding off its intended
route.
BVehicle with AdvanceTrac® with
RSC® maintaining control on a
slippery surface.
136 Stability Control
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
USING ADVANCETRAC® WITH RSC® (IF EQUIPPED)
The system automatically activates when you start your engine. The
AdvanceTrac® with RSC® system cannot be completely turned off, but
the electronic stability system and roll stability control portions of the
system are disabled when the transmission is in position R. You can turn
off the traction control portion of the system independently. See the
Traction Control chapter.
AdvanceTrac® with RSC® Features
Button
functions
Stability
control
light
TCS OFF
light RSC/ESC TCS
Default at
start-up
Illuminated
during bulb
check
Illuminated
during bulb
check
Enabled Enabled
Button pressed
momentarily
Not
illuminated
Illuminated
solid Enabled
Disabled
below
20 mph
(32 km/h)
Button pressed
again after
deactivation or
driving above
20 mph
(32 km/h)
Not
illuminated
Not
illuminated Enabled Enabled
If you switch off the traction control system below 20 mph (32 km/h),
the TCS OFF light will illuminate steadily. Press the TCS OFF button
again or if the vehicle is above 20 mph (32 km/h) to turn off the TCS
OFF light. The switch will not allow partial traction control system
disabling above 20 mph (32 km/h).
Stability Control 137
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
SENSING SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: To help avoid personal injury, please read and
understand the limitations of the system as contained in this
section. Sensing is only an aid for some (generally large and fixed)
objects when moving in reverse on a flat surface at parking speeds.
Traffic control systems, inclement weather, air brakes, and external
motors and fans may also affect the function of the sensing system; this
may include reduced performance or a false activation.
WARNING: To help avoid personal injury, always use caution
when in R (Reverse) and when using the sensing system.
WARNING: This system is not designed to prevent contact with
small or moving objects. The system is designed to provide a
warning to assist the driver in detecting large stationary objects to
avoid damaging the vehicle. The system may not detect smaller objects,
particularly those close to the ground.
WARNING: Certain add-on devices such as large trailer hitches,
bike or surfboard racks and any device that may block the normal
detection zone of the system, may create false beeps.
Note: Keep the sensors (located on the bumper/fascia) free from snow,
ice and large accumulations of dirt. If the sensors are covered, the
system’s accuracy can be affected. Do not clean the sensors with sharp
objects.
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to the bumper/fascia, leaving it
misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate
measurement of obstacles or false alarms.
The sensing system warns the driver of obstacles within a certain range
of the bumper area. The system turns on automatically whenever the
ignition is switched on and the gearshift lever is placed in R (Reverse).
When receiving a detection warning, the radio volume is reduced to a
predetermined level. After the warning goes away, the radio volume
returns to the previous level.
138 Parking Aids
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Using the Rear Sensing System
The rear sensors are only active when the transmission is in R (Reverse).
As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the rate of the audible
warning increases. When the obstacle is fewer than 10 inches (25
centimeters) away, the warning sounds continuously. If a stationary or
receding object is detected farther than 10 inches (25 centimeters) from
the side of the vehicle, the tone sounds for only three seconds. Once the
system detects an object approaching, the warning sounds again.
A. Coverage area of up to 6 feet
(2 meters) from the rear bumper
(with a decreased coverage area at
the outer corners of the bumper).
The system detects certain objects while the transmission is in R
(Reverse):
•and moving toward a stationary object at a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h)
or less.
•but not moving, and a moving object is approaching the rear of the
vehicle at a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
•and moving at a speed of less than 3 mph (5 km/h) and a moving
object is approaching the rear of the vehicle at a speed of less than
3 mph (5 km/h).
REAR VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: The rear view camera system is a reverse aid
supplement device that still requires the driver to use it in
conjunction with the interior and exterior mirrors for maximum
coverage.
WARNING: Objects that are close to either corner of the
bumper or under the bumper, might not be seen on the screen
due to the limited coverage of the camera system.
A
Parking Aids 139
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
WARNING: Back up as slow as possible since higher speeds
might limit your reaction time to stop the vehicle.
WARNING: Use caution when using the rear video camera and
the liftgate is ajar. If the liftgate is ajar, the camera will be out of
position and the video image may be incorrect. All guidelines (if
enabled) have been removed when the liftgate is ajar.
WARNING: Use caution when turning camera features on or off
while in R (Reverse). Make sure the vehicle is not moving.
The rear view camera system provides a video image of the area behind
the vehicle.
During operation, lines appear in the display which represent your
vehicle’s path and proximity to objects behind the vehicle.
The camera is located on the back
door.
Using the Rear View Camera System
The rear view camera system displays what is behind your vehicle when
you place the transmission in R (Reverse). The system uses two types of
guides to help you see what is behind your vehicle:
1. Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path the vehicle is moving in while
reversing in a straight line, which can be helpful when backing into a
parking space or aligning the vehicle with another object behind the
vehicle.
2. Centerline: Helps align the center of the vehicle with an object (i.e. a
trailer).
Note: If the image comes on while the transmission is not in R
(Reverse), have the system inspected by your authorized dealer.
XX XXXX
XXXXXXXX
140 Parking Aids
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Note: When towing, the camera only sees what is being towed behind
the vehicle. This might not provide adequate coverage as it usually
provides in normal operation and some objects might not be seen. In
some vehicles, the guidelines may disappear once the trailer tow
connector is engaged.
Note: The camera may not operate correctly under the following
conditions:
•Nighttime or dark areas if one or both reverse lamps are not
operating.
•The camera’s view is obstructed by mud, water or debris. Clean the
lens with a soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive cleaner.
•The rear of the vehicle is hit or damaged, causing the camera to
become misaligned.
Adjusting the Rear View Camera Settings
Touch screen display:
To access the rear view camera system settings, make the following
selections when the transmission is not in R (Reverse):
1. Menu
2. Vehicle
3. Rear View Camera
After changing a system setting, the touch screen shows a preview of the
feature(s) selected.
Rearview mirror display:
To access the rear view camera system settings see the Information
Display chapter.
The guidelines options are FIXED and OFF. If the vehicle is equipped
with a rearview mirror display and a standard instrument cluster, the
fixed guidelines will always remain on. There is no option to turn the
fixed guidelines off.
Guidelines and the Centerline
Note: Fixed guidelines are only available when the transmission is in R
(Reverse).
Note: The centerline is only available if fixed guidelines are on.
Parking Aids 141
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
A. Rear bumper
B. Fixed guideline: Red zone
C. Fixed guideline: Yellow zone
D. Fixed guideline: Green zone
E. Centerline
The fixed guidelines fade in and out depending on the steering wheel
position.
Always use caution while reversing. Objects in the red zone are closest
to your vehicle and objects in the green zone are further away. Objects
are getting closer to your vehicle as they move from the green zone to
the yellow or red zones. Use the side view mirrors and rear view mirror
to get better coverage on both sides and rear of the vehicle.
Selectable settings for this feature are FIXED and OFF.
Visual Park Aid Alert
Note: Visual park alert is only available when the transmission is in R
(Reverse).
Note: The reverse sensing system is not effective at speeds above 3 mph
(5 km/h) and may not detect certain angular or moving objects.
The visual park aid alert allows the driver to view the area that is being
detected by the reverse sensing system. The system uses red, yellow and
green highlights which appear on top of the video image when an object
is detected by the reverse sensing system. The alert highlights the
closest object detected. The reverse sensing alert can be disabled and if
visual park aid alert is enabled, highlighted areas are still displayed.
Selectable settings for this feature are ON and OFF.
A
E
D
C
B
142 Parking Aids
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Manual Zoom
WARNING: When manual zoom is on, the full area behind the
vehicle is not shown. Be aware of your surroundings when using
the manual zoom feature.
Note: Manual zoom is only available when the transmission is in R
(Reverse).
Note: When manual zoom is enabled, only the centerline is shown.
Allows the driver to get a closer view of an object behind the vehicle.
The zoomed image keeps the bumper in the image to provide a
reference. The zoom is only active while the transmission is in R
(Reverse), When the transmission is shifted out of R (Reverse), the
feature automatically turns off and must be reset when it is used again.
Selectable settings for this feature are OFF, Level 1, Level 2 or Level 3.
Press the up and down arrows to change the view. The selection level
appears between the buttons (i.e. Level 1). The default setting for the
manual zoom is OFF.
Rear Camera Delay
When shifting the transmission out of R (Reverse) and into any gear
other than P (Park), the camera image remains in the display until the
vehicle speed reaches 6 mph (10 km/h). This occurs when the rear
camera delay feature is on, or until a radio button is selected.
Selectable settings for this feature are ON and OFF. The default setting
for the rear camera delay is OFF.
Parking Aids 143
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
Cruise control lets you maintain a set speed without keeping your foot
on the accelerator pedal.
USING CRUISE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Do not use cruise control in heavy traffic, on
winding roads or when the road surface is slippery. This could
result in loss of vehicle control, serious injury or death.
WARNING: When you are going downhill, your vehicle speed
may increase above the set speed. The system will not apply the
brakes. Change down a gear to assist the system in maintaining the set
speed. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control, serious
injury or death.
Note: Cruise control will disengage if your vehicle speed decreases more
than 10 mph (16 km/h) below your set speed while driving uphill.
The cruise controls are located on
the steering wheel.
Switching Cruise Control On
Press and release ON.
The indicator will turn on in the instrument cluster.
Setting a Speed
1. Accelerate to the desired speed.
2. Press and release SET ACCEL.
3. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
RES
SET
ACCEL
COAST
ON
OFF
144 Cruise Control
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Changing the Set Speed
Note: If you accelerate by pressing the accelerator pedal, the set speed
will not change. When you release the accelerator pedal, you will return
to the speed that you previously set.
•Press and hold SET ACCEL to increase or COAST to decrease the
set speed. Release the control when you reach the desired speed.
•Press and release SET ACCEL to increase or COAST to decrease.
The set speed will change in approximately 1 mph (2 km/h)
increments.
•Press the accelerator or brake pedal until you reach the desired
speed. Press and release SET ACCEL.
Canceling the Set Speed
Tap the brake pedal. You will not erase the set speed.
Resuming the Set Speed
Press and release RES.
Switching Cruise Control Off
Note: You will erase the set speed if you switch the system off.
Press and release OFF or switch the ignition off.
Cruise Control 145
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
STEERING
To help prevent damage to the power steering system:
•Never hold the steering wheel at its furthest turning points (until it
stops) for more than a few seconds when the engine is running.
•Do not operate the vehicle with a low power steering pump fluid level
(If the fluid level is below the MIN line mark on the dipstick).
•Some noise is normal during operation. If the noise is excessive, check
for low power steering pump fluid level before seeking service by your
authorized dealer.
•Heavy or uneven steering efforts may be caused by low power steering
pump fluid level. Check for low power steering pump fluid level before
seeking service by your authorized dealer.
•Do not fill the power steering pump reservoir above the MAX line
mark, as this may result in leaks from the reservoir.
If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turned
off), you can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes more effort.
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
•an improperly inflated tire.
•uneven tire wear.
•loose or worn suspension components.
•loose or worn steering components.
•improper steering alignment.
A high crown in the road or high crosswinds may also make the steering
seem to wander/pull.
146 Driving Aids
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
LOAD LIMIT
Vehicle Loading – With and Without a Trailer
This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and/or
trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating
capability, with or without a trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before loading
your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle’s
Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label:
Base Curb Weight – is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of
fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or
optional equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight – is the weight of your new vehicle when you
picked it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket
equipment.
Payload – is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the
vehicle is carrying. The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found
on the Tire Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door
(vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a Tire
Label). Look for “THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND
CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX lb.” for
maximum payload. The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum
payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If any aftermarket
or authorized-dealer installed equipment has been installed on the
vehicle, the weight of the equipment must be subtracted from the
payload listed on the Tire Label in order to determine the new payload.
Load Carrying 147
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
WARNING: The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can
be limited either by volume capacity (how much space is
available) or by payload capacity (how much weight the vehicle should
carry). Once you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle,
do not add more cargo, even if there is space available. Overloading or
improperly loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle control
and vehicle rollover.
Example only:
148 Load Carrying
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Cargo Weight – includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight,
including cargo and optional equipment. When towing, trailer tongue load
or king pin weight is also part of cargo weight.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) – is the total weight placed on each axle
(front and rear) – including vehicle curb weight and all payload.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These
numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label.
The label shall be affixed to either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver’s seating position. The total load on each axle
must never exceed its GAWR.
Note: For trailer towing information refer to the RV and Trailer Towing
Guide provided by your authorized dealer.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) – is the Vehicle Curb Weight + cargo +
passengers.
Load Carrying 149
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle (including all options, equipment,
passengers and cargo). The GVWR is shown on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The label shall be affixed to
either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the driver’s seating position.
The GVW must never exceed the GVWR.
•Example only:
150 Load Carrying
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
WARNING: Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label
vehicle weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle
handling or performance, engine, transmission and/or structural
damage, serious damage to the vehicle, loss of control and personal
injury.
GCW (Gross Combined Weight) – is the weight of the loaded vehicle
(GVW) plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer.
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer – including all cargo and
passengers – that the vehicle can handle without risking damage.
(Important: The towing vehicle’s braking system is rated for operation at
GVWR, not at GCWR.) Separate functional brakes should be used for
safe control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the
towing vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle.
The GCW must never exceed the GCWR.
Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight – is the highest possible weight of a
fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. It assumes a vehicle with only
mandatory options, no cargo (internal or external), a tongue load of
10–15% (conventional trailer) or king pin weight of 15–25% (fifth wheel
trailer), and driver only (150 lb. [68 kg]). Consult your authorized
dealer (or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your
authorized dealer) for more detailed information.
Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel King Pin Weight – refers to the amount
of the weight that a trailer pushes down on a trailer hitch.
Examples: For a 5,000 lb. (2,268 kg) conventional trailer, multiply 5,000
by 0.10 and 0.15 to obtain a proper tongue load range of 500 to 750 lb.
(227 to 340 kg). For an 11,500 lb. (5,216 kg) fifth wheel trailer, multiply
by 0.15 and 0.25 to obtain a proper king pin load range of 1,725 to
2,875 lb. (782 to 1,304 kg)
Load Carrying 151
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label.
WARNING: Do not use replacement tires with lower load
carrying capacities than the original tires because they may lower
the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a
higher limit than the original tires do not increase the GVWR and
GAWR limitations.
WARNING: Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could
result in serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury.
Steps for determining the correct load limit:
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lb.” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX
kg or XXX lb.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lb. and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lb. (1400-750 (5 x 150)
= 650 lb.).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity:
•Suppose your vehicle has a 1400 lb. (635 kg) cargo and luggage
capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is there enough load capacity to
carry you, 4 of your friends and all the golf bags? You and four friends
average 220 lb. (99 kg) each and the golf bags weigh approximately
30 lb. (13.5 kg) each. The calculation would be: 1400 - (5 x 220) - (5
x 30) = 1400 - 1100 - 150 = 150 lb. Yes, you have enough load
152 Load Carrying
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and your golf bags.
In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (5 x 99 kg) - (5 x
13.5 kg) = 635 - 495 - 67.5 = 72.5 kg.
•Suppose your vehicle has a 1400 lb. (635 kg) cargo and luggage
capacity. You and one of your friends decide to pick up cement from
the local home improvement store to finish that patio you have been
planning for the past 2 years. Measuring the inside of the vehicle with
the rear seat folded down, you have room for 12-100 lb. (45 kg) bags
of cement. Do you have enough load capacity to transport the cement
to your home? If you and your friend each weigh 220 lb. (99 kg), the
calculation would be: 1400 - (2 x 220) - (12 x 100) = 1400 - 440 -
1200 = - 240 lb. No, you do not have enough cargo capacity to carry
that much weight. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg -
(2 x 99 kg) - (12 x 45 kg) = 635 - 198 - 540 = -103 kg. You will need
to reduce the load weight by at least 240 lb. (104 kg). If you remove
3-100 lb. (45 kg) cement bags, then the load calculation would be:
1400 - (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 - 900 = 60 lb. Now you have
the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home. In
metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) - (9 x
45 kg) = 635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kg.
The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your
vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label. The label shall be affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver’s seating position.
Special Loading Instructions for Owners of Pick-up Trucks and
Utility-type Vehicles
WARNING: Loaded vehicles may handle differently than
unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions, such as slower speeds and
increased stopping distance, should be taken when driving a heavily
loaded vehicle.
Your vehicle can haul more cargo and people than most passenger cars.
Depending upon the type and placement of the load, hauling cargo and
people may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle.
Load Carrying 153
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
TOWING A TRAILER
WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on
the certification label.
WARNING: Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended
gross trailer weight exceeds the limit of your vehicle and could
result in engine damage, transmission damage, structural damage, loss
of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and personal injury.
Note: For information on electrical items such as fuses or relays, see the
Fuses chapter.
Your vehicle’s load capacity designation is by weight, not by volume, so
you cannot necessarily use all available space when loading a vehicle.
Towing a trailer places an extra load on your vehicle’s engine,
transmission, axle, brakes, tires and suspension. Inspect these
components periodically during, and after, any towing operation.
Load Placement
To help minimize how trailer movement affects your vehicle when
driving:
•Load the heaviest items closest to the trailer floor.
•Load the heaviest items centered between the left and right side
trailer tires.
•Load the heaviest items above the trailer axles or just slightly forward
toward the trailer tongue. Do not allow the final trailer tongue weight
to go above or below 10–15% of the loaded trailer weight.
•Select a tow bar with the correct rise or drop. When both the loaded
vehicle and trailer are connected, the trailer frame should be level, or
slightly angled down toward your vehicle, when viewed from the side.
When driving with a trailer or payload, a slight takeoff vibration or
shudder may be present due to the increased payload weight. You can
find more information about proper trailer loading and setting your
vehicle up for towing under Load limit in the Load Carrying chapter
and in the RV & Trailer Towing Guide, available at an authorized
dealer.
RECOMMENDED TOWING WEIGHTS
Note: Do not exceed a trailer weight of 5000 pounds (2268 kilograms)
when towing with, or by, bumper only.
154 Towing
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Note: Calculate the maximum trailer weight for all cutaway vehicles by
subtracting the weight of your vehicle (including incomplete vehicle
weight and payload, which includes second unit body weight, cargo and
passengers) from the gross combined weight. Otherwise, maximum
trailer weight is 10000 pounds (4536 kilograms).
Note: Do not exceed the trailer weight for your vehicle configuration
listed in the chart below.
Note: Make sure to take into consideration trailer frontal area. Do not
exceed 60 feet
2
(5.57 meters
2
) trailer frontal area.
Note: Exceeding this limitation may significantly reduce the
performance of your towing vehicle. Selecting a trailer with a low
aerodynamic drag and rounded front design helps optimize performance
and fuel economy.
Note: For high altitude operation, reduce the gross combined weight by
2% per 1000 feet (300 meters) starting at the 1000 foot (300 meter)
elevation point.
Note: Certain states require electric trailer brakes for trailers over a
specified weight. Be sure to check state regulations for this specified
weight. The maximum trailer weights listed may be limited to this
specified weight, as your vehicle’s electrical system may not include the
wiring connector needed to use electric trailer brakes.
Your vehicle may tow a Class I, II or III trailer provided the maximum
trailer weight is less than or equal to the maximum trailer weight listed
for your vehicle configuration on the following chart.
To calculate the maximum loaded trailer weight for your vehicle:
1. Start with the gross combined weight rating for your vehicle model
and axle ratio. See the following chart.
2. Subtract all of the following that apply to your vehicle:
•Vehicle curb weight
•Hitch hardware weight, such as a draw bar, ball, locks or weight
distributing
•Driver weight
•Passenger(s) weight
•Payload, cargo and luggage weight
•Aftermarket equipment weight.
3. This equals the maximum loaded trailer weight for this combination.
Note: The trailer tongue load figures into the payload for your vehicle.
Reduce the total payload by the final trailer tongue weight.
Consult an authorized dealer to determine the maximum trailer weight
allowed for your vehicle if you are not sure.
Towing 155
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Engine Rear axle ratio Maximum GCWR
- lb. (kg)
Maximum trailer
weight - lb. (kg)
E-150 Regular, Recreational and Crew van
4.6L 3.73 11500 (5216) 6000 (2722)
4.6L 4.10 12000 (5443) 6500 (2948)
5.4L 3.73 and 4.10 13000 (5897) 7500 (3402)
E-150 Extended van
4.6L 3.73 11500 (5216) 5900 (2676)
4.6L 4.10 12000 (5443) 6400 (2903)
5.4L 3.73 and 4.10 13000 (5897) 7300 (3311)
E-150 Regular wagon (7 and 8 passenger)
4.6L 3.73 11500 (5216) 5600 (2540)
4.6L 4.10 12000 (5443) 6100 (2767)
5.4L 3.73 and 4.10 13000 (5897) 7000 (3175)
E-250 Regular, Recreational and Crew van
4.6L 3.73 11500 (5216) 6000 (2722)
4.6L 4.10 12000 (5443) 6500 (2948)
5.4L 3.73 and 4.10 13000 (5897) 7400 (3357)
E-250 Extended, Recreational and Crew van
4.6L 3.73 11500 (5216) 5900 (2540)
4.6L 4.10 12000 (5443) 6400 (2903)
5.4L 3.73 and 4.10 13000 (5897) 7300 (3311)
E-350 Regular, Recreational and Crew van
5.4L 3.73 and 4.10 13000 (5897) 7400 (3357)
6.8L 3.73 15000 (6804) 9100 (4128)
6.8L 4.10 18500 (8391) 10000 (4536)
E-350 Extended, Recreational and Crew van
5.4L 3.73 13000 (5897) 7200 (3266)
6.8L 3.73 15000 (6804) 9000 (4082)
6.8L 4.10 18500 (8391) 10000 (4536)
156 Towing
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Engine Rear axle ratio Maximum GCWR
- lb. (kg)
Maximum trailer
weight - lb. (kg)
E-350 Regular wagon (11 and 12 passenger)
5.4L 3.73 and 4.10 13000 (5896) 6700 (3039)
6.8L 3.73 15000 (6804) 8500 (3856)
6.8L 4.10 18500 (8391) 10000 (4536)
E-350 Extended wagon (11 passenger)
5.4L 3.73 and 4.10 13000 (5896) 6500 (2948)
6.8L 3.73 15000 (6804) 8300 (3765)
6.8L 4.10 18500 (8391) 10000 (4536)
E-350 Extended wagon (14 and 15 passenger)
5.4L 3.73 and 4.10 13000 (5896) 6300 (2858)
6.8L 3.73 15000 (6804) 8100 (3674)
6.8L 4.10 18500 (8391) 10000 (4536)
E-350 Cutaway single rear wheel 138–inch wheelbase
5.4L 4.10 13000 (5896) 8000 (3629)
6.8L 4.10 18500 (8391) 10000 (4536)
E-350 Cutaway dual rear wheel 138–inch wheelbase
5.4L 3.73 10050 (4763) 4900 (2223)
5.4L 4.10 13000 (5897) 7700 (3493)
6.8L 4.10 18500 (8391) 10000 (4536)
E-350 Cutaway single rear wheel 158–inch wheelbase
5.4L 4.10 13000 (5896) 8000 (3629)
6.8L 4.10 18500 (8391) 10000 (4536)
E-350 Cutaway dual rear wheel 158–inch and 176–inch
wheelbase
5.4L 3.73 10050 (4763) 4800 (2177)
5.4L 4.10 13000 (5897) 7700 (3493)
6.8L 4.10 18500 (8391) 10000 (4536)
E-350 Stripped chassis dual rear wheel 138–inch wheelbase
5.4L 4.10 13000 (5897) 8400 (3810)
6.8L 4.10 18500 (8391) 10000 (4536)
Towing 157
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Engine Rear axle ratio Maximum GCWR
- lb. (kg)
Maximum trailer
weight - lb. (kg)
E-350 Stripped chassis dual rear wheel 158–inch and 176–inch
wheelbase
5.4L 4.10 13000 (5897) 8300 (3765)
6.8L 4.10 18500 (8391) 10000 (4536)
E-450 Cutaway
5.4L 4.56 14050 (6373) 8500 (3856)
6.8L 4.56 22000 (9979) 10000 (4536)
E-450 Stripped chassis
5.4L 4.56 14050 (6373) 9200 (4173)
6.8L 4.56 22000 (9979) 10000 (4536)
ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS
Follow these guidelines for safe towing:
•Do not tow a trailer until you drive your vehicle at least 1000 miles
(1600 kilometers).
•Consult your local motor vehicle laws for towing a trailer.
•See the instructions included with towing accessories for the proper
installation and adjustment specifications.
•Service your vehicle more frequently if you tow a trailer. See your
scheduled maintenance information.
•If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions the rental agency
gives you.
For load specification terms found on the tire label and Safety
Compliance label and for instructions on calculating your vehicle’s load,
refer to Load limit in the Load Carrying chapter.
Remember to account for the trailer tongue weight as part of your
vehicle load when calculating the total vehicle weight.
158 Towing
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Trailer Towing Connector (Vehicles with a Trailer Towing Package
and 7–Pin Connector)
When attaching the trailer wiring
connector to your vehicle, only use
a proper fitting connector that
works with the vehicle and trailer
functions. If your vehicle has a
trailer towing package, it may have
a 7–pin connector. Some connectors
may have the SAE J2863 logo,
which confirms that it is the proper
wiring connector and works
correctly with your vehicle.
Color Function
1. Yellow Left turn signal and stop lamp
2. White Ground (-)
3. Blue Electric brakes
4. Green Right turn signal and stop lamp
5. Orange Battery (+)
6. Brown Running lights
7. Grey Reverse lights
Hitches
Do not use a hitch that either clamps onto the bumper or attaches to the
axle.
Distribute the trailer load so 10-15% of the total trailer weight is on the
tongue.
Weight-Distributing Hitches
WARNING: Do not adjust a weight-distributing hitch to any
position where the rear bumper of the vehicle is higher than it
was before attaching the trailer. Doing so will defeat the function of the
weight-distributing hitch, which may cause unpredictable handling, and
could result in serious personal injury.
Towing 159
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
When hooking-up a trailer using a weight-distributing hitch, always use
the following procedure:
1. Park the loaded vehicle, without the trailer, on a level surface.
2. Measure the height to the top of your vehicle’s front wheel opening
on the fender. This is H1.
3. Securely attach the loaded trailer to your vehicle without the
weight-distributing bars connected.
4. Measure the height to the top of your vehicle’s front wheel opening
on the fender a second time. This is H2.
5. Install and adjust the tension in the weight-distributing bars so that
the height of your vehicle’s front wheel opening on the fender is
approximately halfway between H1 and H2.
6. Check that the trailer is level or slightly nose down toward your
vehicle. If not, adjust the ball height accordingly and repeat
Steps 2–6.
Once the trailer is level or slightly nose down toward the vehicle:
•Lock the bar tension adjuster in place.
•Check that the trailer tongue securely attaches and locks onto the
hitch.
•Install safety chains, lighting, and trailer brake controls as required by
law or the trailer manufacturer.
Safety Chains
Note: Do not attach safety chains to the bumper.
Always connect the trailer’s safety chains to the frame or hook retainers
of your vehicle hitch.
To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross the chains under the trailer
tongue and allow enough slack for turning tight corners. Do not allow the
chains to drag on the ground.
Trailer Brakes
WARNING: Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system
directly to your vehicle’s brake system. Your vehicle may not have
enough braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly
increase.
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or surge-type trailer brakes are
safe if you install them properly and adjust them to the manufacturer’s
specifications. The trailer brakes must meet local and federal regulations.
160 Towing
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
The rating for the tow vehicle’s braking system operation is at
the gross vehicle weight rating, not the gross combined weight
rating.
Separate functioning brake systems are required for safe control
of towed vehicles and trailers weighing more than 1500 pounds
(680 kilograms) when loaded.
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller (If Equipped)
WARNING: The Ford TBC has only been verified to be
compatible with trailers having electric-actuated drum brakes
(one to four axles) and some electric-over-hydraulic (EOH) brakes. It
will not activate hydraulic surge-style trailer brakes. It is the
responsibility of the customer to ensure that the trailer brakes are
adjusted appropriately, functioning normally and all electric connections
are properly made. Failure to do so may result in loss of vehicle
control, crash or serious injury.
When used properly, the trailer brake controller assists in smooth and
effective trailer braking by powering the trailer’s electric or
electric-over-hydraulic brakes with a proportional output based on the
towing vehicle’s brake pressure.
The controller user interface consists of the following:
A. + and - (Gain adjustment buttons): Pressing these buttons adjusts
the controller’s power output to the trailer brakes in 0.5 increments. You
can increase the gain setting to 10.0 (maximum trailer braking) or
decrease it to 0 (no trailer braking). Pressing and holding a button raises
or lowers the setting continuously. The gain setting displays in the
message center as follows: TBC GAIN = XX.X.
B
A
Towing 161
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
The controller shows gain setting, output bar graph, and trailer
connectivity status in the information display. They appear in the
information display as follows:
•TBC GAIN = XX.X NO TRAILER: Shows the current gain setting
during a given ignition cycle and when adjusting the gain. This also
displays if you use the manual control lever or make gain adjustments
with no trailer connected.
•TBC GAIN = XX.X OUTPUT=//////:Displays when you push
your vehicle’s brake pedal, or when you use the manual control. Bar
indicators illuminate in the information display to indicate the amount
of power going to the trailer brakes relative to the brake pedal or
manual control input. One bar indicates the least amount of output;
six bars indicate maximum output.
•TRAILER CONNECTED: Displays when the system senses a
correct trailer wiring connection (a trailer with electric trailer brakes)
during a given ignition cycle.
•TRAILER DISCONNECTED: Displays, accompanied by a single
audible chime, when the system senses a trailer connection and then
a disconnection, either intentional or unintentional, during a given
ignition cycle. It also displays if a truck or trailer-wiring fault occurs
causing the trailer to appear disconnected. This message can also
display if you use the manual control lever without a trailer
connected.
B. Manual control lever: Slide the control lever to the left to turn on
the trailer’s electric brakes independent of the tow vehicle’s brakes. See
the following Procedure for adjusting gain section for instructions on
proper use of this feature. If you use the manual control while the brake
is also applied, the greater of the two inputs determines the power sent
to the trailer brakes.
•Stop lamps: Using the manual control lever illuminates both the
trailer brake lamps and your vehicle brake lamps except the center
high-mount stop lamp, if you make the proper electrical connection
to the trailer. Pressing your vehicle brake pedal also illuminates both
trailer and vehicle brake lamps.
162 Towing
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Procedure for Adjusting Gain
Note: Only perform this procedure in a traffic-free environment at
speeds of approximately 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h).
The gain setting sets the trailer brake controller for the specific towing
condition. You should change the setting as towing conditions change.
Changes to towing conditions include trailer load, vehicle load, road
conditions and weather.
The gain should be set to provide the maximum trailer braking assistance
while making sure the trailer wheels do not lock when using the brakes.
Locked trailer wheels may lead to trailer instability.
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good working condition,
functioning normally and properly adjusted. See your trailer dealer if
necessary.
2. Hook up the trailer and make the electrical connections according to
the trailer manufacturer’s instructions.
3. When you plug in a trailer with electric or electric-over-hydraulic
brakes, TRAILER CONNECTED appears in the information display.
4. Use the gain adjustment (+ and -) buttons to increase or decrease
the gain setting to the desired starting point. A gain setting of 6.0 is a
good starting point for heavier loads.
5. In a traffic-free environment, tow the trailer on a dry, level surface at
a speed of 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h) and squeeze the manual control
lever completely.
6. If the trailer wheels lock up, indicated by squealing tires, reduce the
gain setting. If the trailer wheels turn freely, increase the gain setting.
Repeat Steps 5 and 6 until the gain setting is at a point just below
trailer wheel lock-up. If towing a heavier trailer, trailer wheel lock-up
may not be attainable even with the maximum gain setting of 10.
Explanation of Information Display Warning Messages
Note: An authorized dealer can diagnose the trailer brake controller to
determine exactly which trailer fault has occurred. However, your Ford
warranty does not cover this diagnosis if the fault is with the trailer.
TRAILER BRAKE MODULE FAULT: Displays in response to faults
sensed by the trailer brake controller, accompanied by a single chime. If
this message appears, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible
for diagnosis and repair. The controller may still function, but
performance may be degraded.
Towing 163
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
WIRING FAULT ON TRAILER: Displays when there is a short circuit
on the electric brake output wire. If the WIRING FAULT ON TRAILER
message displays, accompanied by a single chime, with no trailer
connected, the problem is with your vehicle wiring between the trailer
brake controller and the 7–pin connector at the bumper. If the message
only displays with a trailer connected, the problem is with the trailer
wiring. Consult your trailer dealer for assistance. This can be a short to
ground (such as a chaffed wire), short to voltage (such as a pulled pin
on trailer emergency breakaway battery) or the trailer brakes may be
drawing too much current.
Points to Remember
Note: Do not attempt removal of the trailer brake controller without
consulting the Workshop Manual. Damage to the unit may result.
•Adjust gain setting before using the trailer brake controller for the
first time.
•Adjust gain setting, using the procedure above, whenever road,
weather and trailer or vehicle loading conditions change from when
the gain was initially set.
•Only use the manual control lever for proper adjustment of the gain
during trailer setup. Misuse, such as application during trailer sway,
could cause instability of trailer or tow vehicle.
•Avoid towing in adverse weather conditions. The trailer brake
controller does not provide anti-lock control of the trailer wheels.
Trailer wheels can lock up on slippery surfaces, resulting in reduced
stability of trailer and tow vehicle.
•The trailer brake controller is equipped with a feature that reduces
output at vehicle speeds below 11 mph (18 km/h) so trailer and
vehicle braking is not jerky or harsh. This feature is only available
when applying the brakes using your vehicle’s brake pedal, not the
controller.
•The controller interacts with the brake control system and powertrain
control system of your vehicle to provide the best performance on
different road conditions.
•Your vehicle’s brake system and the trailer brake system work
independently of each other. Changing the gain setting on the
controller does not affect the operation of your vehicle’s brakes
whether you attach a trailer or not.
•When you turn the engine off, the controller output is disabled and
the display and module shut down. The controller module and display
turn on when you turn the ignition on.
•The trailer brake controller is only a factory-installed or
dealer-installed item. Ford is not responsible for warranty or
performance of the controller due to misuse or customer installation.
164 Towing
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Trailer Lamps
WARNING: Never connect any trailer lamp wiring to the
vehicle’s tail lamp wiring; this may damage the electrical system
resulting in a fire. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible for
assistance in proper trailer tow wiring installation. Additional electrical
equipment may be required.
Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Make sure all running
lights, brake lights, turn signals and hazard lights are working.
Using a Step Bumper (If Equipped)
The rear bumper is equipped with an integral hitch and only requires a
ball with a one-inch (25.4 millimeter) shank diameter. The bumper has a
5000-pound (2268 kilogram) trailer weight and a 500-pound (227
kilogram) tongue weight capacity.
If it is necessary to relocate the hitch ball position, you must install a
frame-mounted trailer hitch.
Before Towing a Trailer
Practice turning, stopping and backing up to get the feel of your
vehicle-trailer combination before starting on a trip. When turning, make
wider turns so the trailer wheels clear curbs and other obstacles.
When Towing a Trailer
•Do not drive faster than 70 mph (113 km/h) during the first 500 miles
(800 kilometers).
•Do not make full-throttle starts.
•Check your hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts
thoroughly after you have traveled 50 miles (80 kilometers).
•When stopped in congested or heavy traffic during hot weather, place
the gearshift in position Pto aid engine and transmission cooling and
to help A/C performance.
•Turn off the speed control with heavy loads or in hilly terrain. The
speed control may turn off automatically when you are towing on
long, steep grades.
•Shift to a lower gear when driving down a long or steep hill. Do not
apply the brakes continuously, as they may overheat and become less
effective.
•If your transmission is equipped with a Grade Assist or Tow/Haul
feature, use this feature when towing. This provides engine braking
and helps eliminate excessive transmission shifting for optimum fuel
economy and transmission cooling.
Towing 165
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
•If your vehicle is equipped with AdvanceTrac™ with RSC, this system
may turn on during typical cornering maneuvers with a heavily loaded
trailer. This is normal. Turning the corner at a slower speed while
towing may reduce this tendency.
•If you are towing a trailer frequently in hot weather, hilly conditions,
at the gross combined weight rating (or any combination of these
factors), consider refilling your rear axle with synthetic gear lubricant
(if the axle is not already filled with it). See the Capacities and
Specifications chapter for the lubricant specification.
•Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached. Anticipate
stops and brake gradually.
•Avoid parking on a grade. However, if you must park on a grade:
1. Turn the steering wheel to point your vehicle tires away from
traffic flow.
2. Set your vehicle parking brake.
3. Place the automatic transmission in position P.
4. Place wheel chocks in front and back of the trailer wheels.
(Chocks not included with vehicle.)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a temporary or conventional spare
tire. A “temporary” spare tire is different in size (diameter or width),
tread-type (All-Season or All-Terrain) or is from a different manufacturer
than the road tires on your vehicle. Consult information on the tire label
or Safety Compliance label for limitations when using.
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal Watercraft (PWC)
Note: Disconnect the wiring to the trailer before backing the trailer into
the water.
Note: Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after removing the trailer from
the water.
When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval:
•Do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of
the rear bumper.
•Do not allow waves to break higher than 6 inches (15 centimeters)
above the bottom edge of the rear bumper.
Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter vehicle components:
•Causing internal damage to the components.
•Affecting driveability, emissions, and reliability.
Replace the rear axle lubricant anytime the rear axle submerges in
water. Water may have contaminated the rear axle lubricant, which does
not normally require checking or changing unless it is leaking or other
axle repair is required.
166 Towing
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE
If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing
service or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, your
roadside assistance service provider.
We recommend the use of a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment
to tow your vehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford Motor Company
has not approved a slingbelt towing procedure. Vehicle damage may
occur if towed incorrectly, or by any other means.
Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow
truck operators. Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for
proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle.
If your vehicle is equipped with an air dam, we recommend using wheel
lift or flatbed equipment if towing from the front. This prevents damage
to the air dam.
Towing 167
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON FOUR WHEELS
Emergency Towing
If your vehicle becomes inoperable (without access to wheel dollies,
car-hauling trailer, or flatbed transport vehicle), it can be flat-towed (all
wheels on the ground, regardless of the powertrain and transmission
configuration) under the following conditions:
•Your vehicle is facing forward for towing in a forward direction.
•Place the transmission in position N. See Automatic transmission in
the Transmission chapter if you cannot move the transmission into
N.
•Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
•Maximum distance is 50 miles (80 kilometers).
Recreational Towing
Note: Put your climate control system in recirculated air mode to
prevent exhaust fumes from entering your vehicle. See the Climate
Control chapter.
Follow these guidelines if you have a need for recreational towing, such
as towing your vehicle behind a motorhome. We designed these
guidelines to prevent damage to your transmission.
Do not tow your vehicle with any wheels on the ground, as vehicle or
transmission damage may occur. It is recommended to tow your vehicle
with all four (4) wheels off the ground such as when using a car-hauling
trailer. Otherwise, you cannot tow your vehicle.
168 Towing
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
PREPARING TO DRIVE
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover
rate than other types of vehicles.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
WARNING:
Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility
vehicles and trucks handle differently than vehicles with a lower
center of gravity. Utility vehicles and trucks are not designed for
cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low-slung
sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road
conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed or abrupt maneuvers in
these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in an increased risk
of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
WARNING: Loaded vehicles, with a higher center of gravity, may
handle differently than unloaded vehicles. Do not overload your
vehicle and use extra precautions, such as driving at slower speeds,
avoiding abrupt steering changes and allowing for increased stopping
distance, when driving a heavily loaded vehicle. Over-loading or loading
the vehicle improperly can deteriorate handling capability and
contribute to loss of vehicle control and vehicle rollover.
Utility vehicles and trucks have larger tires and increased ground
clearance, giving the vehicle a higher center of gravity than a passenger
car.
Vehicle stability and handling
This van or wagon, like any vehicle designed to carry very heavy loads,
must be driven differently from a passenger car. The extra weight can
affect stopping distance and maneuverability. The higher center of
gravity and other features may reduce the ability to make abrupt
maneuvers and may increase the risk of rollover compared to a
passenger car. Do not place any loads on the roof of passenger wagons.
This raises the center of gravity, which increases the risk of rollover.
When loading your wagon, passengers should fill the front rows of seats
first. Do not exceed the weight limits specified on the certification label.
Driving Hints 169
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could result in serious
damage to the vehicle, loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover or personal
injury.
The van should be operated by an experienced driver. An organization
that owns a 15–passenger van should select one or two experienced
drivers to drive the van on a regular basis. These drivers will gain
valuable experience handling the van. This experience will help make
each trip safer.
The van should be operated at a safe speed which, in some conditions,
may be less than the posted speed limit.
Further, all occupants should be properly restrained. Most people killed
in rollover crashes were unbelted. Occupants can dramatically reduce
their risk of being killed or seriously injured in a rollover crash by simply
using their seat belts. Organizations that own 15–passenger vans should
have a written seat belt use policy. Drivers should be responsible for
enforcing the policy.
Emergency Maneuvers
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as
utility and four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than
vehicles with a lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive
vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger
cars any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform
satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive
speed and abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive
cautiously could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
•In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn
must be made, remember to avoid “over-driving” your vehicle, i.e.,
turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid
the emergency. Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control,
not more. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or
brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are
called for. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration or braking which could
result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover
and/or personal injury. Use all available road surface to return the
vehicle to a safe direction of travel.
•In the event of an emergency stop, avoid skidding the tires and do not
attempt any sharp steering wheel movements.
170 Driving Hints
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
•If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (i.e., from
concrete to gravel) there will be a change in the way the vehicle
responds to a maneuver (steering, acceleration or braking). Again,
avoid these abrupt inputs.
•If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but
avoid severe brake application, ease the vehicle back onto the
pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering
wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface.
•It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow
down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may lose
control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too
sharply or abruptly.
•It often may be less risky to strike small objects, such as highway
reflectors, with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a
sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide
sideways out of control or roll over. Remember, your safety and the
safety of others should be your primary concern.
BREAKING-IN
You need to break in new tires for approximately 1000 miles
(1600 kilometers). During this time, your vehicle may exhibit some
unique driving characteristics. Avoid driving too fast during the first
1000 miles (1600 kilometers). Vary your speed frequently and change up
through the gears early. Do not labor the engine. Do not tow during the
first 1000 miles (1600 kilometers).
ECONOMICAL DRIVING
Fuel economy is affected by several things, such as how you drive, the
conditions you drive under and how you maintain your vehicle.
There are some things to keep in mind that may improve your fuel
economy:
•Accelerate and slow down in a smooth, moderate fashion.
•Drive at steady speeds without stopping.
•Anticipate stops; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop.
•Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving.
•Close the windows for high-speed driving.
•Drive at reasonable speeds (traveling at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15%
less fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105 km/h]).
Driving Hints 171
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
•Keep the tires properly inflated and use only the recommended size.
•Use the recommended engine oil.
•Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.
There are also some things you may not want to do because they may
reduce your fuel economy:
•Sudden or hard accelerations.
•Rev the engine before turning it off.
•Idle for periods longer than one minute.
•Warm up your vehicle on cold mornings.
•Use the air conditioner or front defroster.
•Use the speed control in hilly terrain.
•Rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving.
•Drive a heavily loaded vehicle or tow a trailer.
•Carry unnecessary weight (approximately 1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is lost for
every 400 pounds [180 kilograms] of weight carried).
•Add particular accessories to your vehicle (e.g.; bug deflectors,
rollbars or light bars, running boards, ski racks).
•Drive with the wheels out of alignment.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Note:Driving through deep water may allow water into the transmission
and engine causing internal damage. If you drove through deep water,
check the transmission and engine fluid. If water is found, see your
authorized dealer immediately for fluid replacement.
Do not drive quickly through standing water, especially if the depth is
unknown. Traction or brake capability may be limited and if the ignition
system gets wet, your engine may stall. Water may also enter your
engine’s air intake and severely damage your engine.
172 Driving Hints
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
If driving through deep or standing
water is unavoidable, proceed very
slowly. Never drive through water
that is higher than the bottom of
the hubs (for trucks) or the bottom
of the wheel rims (for cars).
Once through the water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop
the vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by
moving your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake
pedal.
FLOOR MATS
WARNING: Always use floor mats that are designed to fit the
footwell of your vehicle. Only use floor mats that leave the pedal
area unobstructed. Only use floor mats that are firmly secured to
retention posts so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere
with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
•Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and
increase the risk of serious personal injury.
•Always make sure that the floor mats are properly attached to the
retention posts in the carpet that are supplied with your vehicle.
Floor mats must be properly secured to both retention posts to
ensure mats do not shift out of position.
Driving Hints 173
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
WARNING (Continued)
•Never place floor mats or any other covering in the vehicle footwell
that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and
interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle.
•Never place floor mats or any other covering on top of already
installed floor mats. Floor mats should always rest on top of the
vehicle carpeting surface and not another floor mat or other
covering. Additional floor mats or any other covering will reduce the
pedal clearance and potentially interfere with pedal operation.
•Check attachment of floor mats on a regular basis. Always properly
reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning
or replacement.
•Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver footwell
while the vehicle is moving. Objects that are loose can become
trapped under the pedals causing a loss of vehicle control.
•Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or attachment
instructions can potentially cause interference with pedal operation
causing loss of control of vehicle.
•To install floor mats, position the floor mat so that the eyelet is over
the retention post and press down to lock in.
•To remove the floor mat, reverse the installation procedure.
174 Driving Hints
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Vehicles Sold in the U.S.: Getting Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor
Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This
program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service
is available:
•24 hours a day, seven days a week
•for the coverage period listed on the Roadside Assistance Card
included in your owner’s manual portfolio.
Roadside assistance will cover:
•a flat tire change with a good spare (except vehicles that have been
supplied with a tire inflation kit).
•battery jump start.
•lock-out assistance (key replacement cost is the customer’s
responsibility).
•fuel delivery – Independent Service Contractors, if not prohibited by
state, local or municipal law, shall deliver up to 2.0 gallons (7.5 liters)
of gasoline or 5.0 gallons (18.9 liters) of diesel fuel to a disabled
vehicle. Fuel delivery service is limited to two no-charge occurrences
within a 12-month period.
•winch out – available within 100 feet (30.5 meters) of a paved or
county maintained road, no recoveries.
•towing – Ford and Lincoln eligible vehicles towed to an authorized
dealer within 35 miles (56 kilometers) of the disablement location or
to the nearest authorized dealer. If a member requests to be towed to
an authorized dealer more than 35 miles (56 kilometers) from the
disablement location, the member shall be responsible for any mileage
costs in excess of 35 miles (56 kilometers).
Trailers shall be covered up to $200 if the disabled eligible vehicle
requires service at the nearest authorized dealer. If the trailer is disabled,
but the towing vehicle is operational, the trailer does not qualify for any
roadside services.
Roadside Emergencies 175
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Vehicles Sold in the U.S.: Using Roadside Assistance
Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. This card is found in the owner’s manual
portfolio in the glove compartment.
U.S. Ford vehicle customers who require Roadside Assistance, call
1-800-241-3673.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor
Company will reimburse a reasonable amount for towing to the nearest
dealership within 35 miles (56 kilometers). To obtain reimbursement
information, U.S. Ford vehicle customers call 1-800-241-3673. Customers
will be asked to submit their original receipts.
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting Roadside Assistance
Canadian customers who require roadside assistance, call
1–800–665–2006.
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using Roadside Assistance
For your convenience, you may complete the roadside assistance
identification card found in the centerfold of this warranty guide and
retain for future reference.
Canadian roadside coverage and benefits may differ from the U.S.
coverage. If you require more information, please refer to the coverage
section of your warranty guide, call us in Canada at 1-800-665-2006, or
visit our website at www.ford.ca.
176 Roadside Emergencies
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
HAZARD FLASHER CONTROL
Note: With extended use, the flasher may run down your battery.
The hazard flasher is located on the
steering column, just behind the
steering wheel. The hazard flashers
will operate when the ignition is in
any position or if the key is not in
the ignition.
•Press the flasher control and all
front and rear direction signals
flash.
•Press the flasher control again to
turn them off.
Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
Fuel Pump Shut-off
WARNING: Failure to inspect and, if necessary, repair fuel leaks
after a collision may increase the risk of fire and serious injury.
Ford Motor Company recommends that the fuel system be inspected by
an authorized dealer after any collision.
In the event of a moderate to severe collision, this vehicle is equipped
with a fuel pump shut-off feature that stops the flow of fuel to the
engine. Not every impact will cause a shut-off.
Should your vehicle shut off after a collision due to this feature, you may
restart your vehicle by doing the following:
1. Turn the ignition off.
2. Turn the ignition on.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to re-enable fuel pump.
In some instances the vehicle may not restart the first time you try to
restart and may take one additional attempt.
Roadside Emergencies 177
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
JUMP-STARTING THE VEHICLE
WARNING: The gases around the battery can explode if exposed
to flames, sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could result in
injury or vehicle damage.
WARNING: Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin,
eyes and clothing, if contacted.
Do not attempt to push-start your automatic transmission vehicle.
Automatic transmissions do not have push-start capability. Attempting to
push-start a vehicle with an automatic transmission may cause
transmission damage.
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the
automatic transmission must relearn its shift strategy. As a result, the
transmission may exhibit a combination of firm and soft shifts. This
operation is considered normal and will not affect function or durability
of the transmission. Over time, the adaptive learning process will fully
update transmission operation.
Preparing Your Vehicle
Note: Use only a 12–volt supply to start your vehicle.
Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could
damage the vehicle’s electrical system.
1. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle
making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on
both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving
parts.
2. Check all battery terminals. Remove the positive terminal cover (if
equipped) and any excessive corrosion before you attach the battery
cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight and level.
3. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect from any electrical
surges. Turn all other accessories off.
178 Roadside Emergencies
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Connecting the Jumper Cables
WARNING: Do not connect the end of the second cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may
cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery.
Note: Do not attach the negative (-) cable to fuel lines, engine rocker
covers, the intake manifold or electrical components as grounding points.
Note: In the illustration, the vehicle on the bottom is used to designate
the assisting (boosting) battery.
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) terminal of
the discharged battery.
2. Connect the other end of the
positive (+) cable to the positive
(+) terminal of the assisting battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to
the negative (-) terminal of the
assisting battery.
4. Make the final connection of the
negative (-) cable to an exposed
metal part of the stalled vehicle’s
engine, away from the battery and
the carburetor or fuel injection
system.
Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of both
engines, or any fuel delivery system parts.
Jump Starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at a
moderately increased speed.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an
additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables.
4
2
1
3
Roadside Emergencies 179
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Removing the Jumper Cables
Note: In the illustration, the vehicle on the bottom is used to designate
the assisting (boosting) battery.
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were
connected.
1. Remove the jumper cable from
the ground metal surface.
2. Remove the jumper cable on the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle’s battery.
3. Remove the jumper cable from
the positive (+) terminal of the
booster vehicle’s battery.
4. Remove the jumper cable from
the positive (+) terminal of the
disabled vehicle’s battery.
After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables
removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can
relearn its idle conditions.
4
1
3
2
180 Roadside Emergencies
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be performed by an authorized
dealer. While any authorized dealer handling your vehicle line will
provide warranty service, we recommend you return to your selling
authorized dealer who wants to ensure your continued satisfaction.
Please note that certain warranty repairs require special training,
equipment or both, so not all authorized dealers are authorized to perform
all warranty repairs. This means that, depending on the warranty repair
needed, you may have to take your vehicle to another authorized dealer.
A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair after taking your
vehicle to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be made using Ford or
Motorcraft parts, or remanufactured or other parts that are authorized by
Ford.
Away from Home
If you are away from home when your vehicle needs service, contact the
Ford Customer Relationship Center or use the online resources listed
below to find the nearest authorized dealer.
In the United States:
Mailing Address
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
Telephone
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
Online
Additional information and resources are available online at
www.fordowner.com.
These are some of the items that can be found online:
•U.S. Dealer Locator by Dealer Name, City/State, or Zip Code
•Owner Manuals
•Maintenance Schedules
•Recalls
•Ford Extended Service Plans
•Ford Genuine Accessories
•Service specials and promotions.
Customer Assistance 181
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
In Canada:
Mailing address
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6K 0C8
Telephone
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
Online
www.ford.ca
Additional Assistance
If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you
are receiving, follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your selling or
servicing authorized dealer.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales
Manager, Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company
policies, please contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center.
In order to help serve you better, please have the following information
available when contacting a Customer Relationship Center:
•Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
•Your telephone number (home and business)
•The name of the authorized dealer and city where located
•The vehicle’s current odometer reading.
In some states, you must directly notify Ford in writing before pursuing
remedies under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is also allowed a final
repair attempt in some states.
In the United States, a warranty dispute must be submitted to the BBB
AUTO LINE before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing replacement
or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This dispute
handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights
or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act or state replacement or repurchase laws.
182 Customer Assistance
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer
or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the
vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of
attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the
vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or
payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer
use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer
has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its
applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership
of a new vehicle or the first 18000 mi (29 000 km), whichever occurs
first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity
likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity (a
defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety of
the vehicle) OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of
more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time).
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the
manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the
following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
You are required to submit your warranty dispute to BBB AUTO LINE
before asserting in court any rights or remedies conferred by California
Civil Code Section 1793.22(b). You are also required to use BBB AUTO
LINE before exercising rights or seeking remedies created by the Federal
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose
to seek redress by pursuing rights and remedies not created by California
Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) or the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act,
resorting to BBB AUTO LINE is not required by those statutes.
Customer Assistance 183
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE PROGRAM
(U.S. ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor Company and to your dealer.
If a warranty concern has not been resolved using the three-step
procedure outlined earlier in this chapter in the Getting the Services
You Need section, you may be eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO
LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts – mediation and
arbitration. During mediation, a representative of the BBB will contact
both you and Ford Motor Company to explore options for settlement of
the claim. If an agreement is not reached during mediation or you do not
want to participate in mediation, and if your claim is eligible, you may
participate in the arbitration process. An arbitration hearing will be
scheduled so that you can present your case in an informal setting
before an impartial person. The arbitrator will consider the testimony
provided and make a decision after the hearing.
Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are usually decided
within 40 days after you file your claim with the BBB. You are not bound
by the decision, and may reject the decision and proceed to court where
all findings of the BBB Auto Line dispute, and decision, are admissible in
the court action. Should you choose to accept the BBB AUTO LINE
decision, Ford is then bound by the decision, and must comply with the
decision within 30 days of receipt of your acceptance letter.
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the information provided below,
please call or write to request a program application. You will be asked
for your name and address, general information about your new vehicle,
information about your warranty concerns, and any steps you have
already taken to try to resolve them. A Customer Claim Form will be
mailed that will need to be completed, signed and returned to the BBB
along with proof of ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will review the
claim for eligibility under the Program Summary Guidelines.
You can get more information by calling BBB AUTO LINE at
1-800-955-5100, or writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
3033 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600
Arlington, Virginia 22201
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be requested by calling the Ford
Motor Company Customer Relationship Center at 1-800-392-3673.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility
limitations, modify procedures, or to discontinue this process at any time
without notice and without obligation.
184 Customer Assistance
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
UTILIZING THE MEDIATION or ARBITRATION PROGRAM (CANADA
ONLY)
This pertains to vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers. In
those cases, where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of
Canada and the authorized dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle
service concern have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in
an impartial third party mediation or arbitration program administered by
the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straightforward and relatively speedy
alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a
settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal
proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct
hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal
environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final as the arbitrator’s
award is binding on both you and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all Canadian territories and provinces.
For more information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP
Provincial Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685 or visit
www.camvap.ca.
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the
appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you
of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel.
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti-knock
index lower than is recommended for your vehicle, contact our Customer
Relationship Center.
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may
damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause
engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company or Ford
of Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper
fuel. Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle
back into the United States.
Customer Assistance 185
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living
in Asia-Pacific Region, Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands,
Central America, the Caribbean, and Israel, contact the nearest
authorized dealer. If the authorized dealer cannot help you,
contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS & GLOBAL INITIATIVES
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
FAX: (313) 390-0804 Email: expcac@ford.com
For customers in Guam, the Commonwealth of the Northern
Mariana Islands (CNMI), America Samoa, and the U.S. Virgin
Islands, please feel free to call our Toll-Free Number: (800)
841-FORD (3673)
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living
in Puerto Rico, contact the nearest authorized dealer. If the
authorized dealer cannot help you, contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS & GLOBAL INITIATIVES
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
FAX: (313) 390-0804 Email: www.ford.com.pr
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living
in the Middle East, contact the nearest authorized dealer. If the
authorized dealer cannot help you, contact:
Ford Middle East
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 21470 Dubai, United Arab Emirates
Telephone: +971 4 3326084
Toll-Free Number of the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia: 800 8971409
Local Telephone Number of Kuwait: 24810575
FAX: +971 4 3327299
Email: menacac@ford.com
www.me.ford.com
186 Customer Assistance
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate to any of the
above locations, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and
new address with Ford Motor Company Export Operations & Global
Growth Initiatives by emailing expcac@ford.com.
If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest
authorized dealer. In the event your inquiry is unresolved,
communicate your concern with the dealership’s Sales Manager,
Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager. If you require
additional assistance or clarification, please contact the
respective Customer Relationship Center as previously listed.
Customers in the U.S. should call 1-800-392-3673.
ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER’S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
47911 Halyard Drive
Plymouth, Michigan 48170
Attention: Customer Service
Or to order a free publication catalog, call toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by their website:
www.helminc.com.
(Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card, check or
money order.)
Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual
A French owner’s manual can be obtained from your authorized dealer or
by contacting Helm, Incorporated using the contact information listed
previously in this section.
Customer Assistance 187
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a crash
or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition
to notifying Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and
if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue, Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport
Canada, using their toll-free number: 1–800–333–0510, or online at:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/menu.htm
188 Customer Assistance
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
CHANGING A FUSE
Fuses
WARNING: Always replace a fuse with one that has the
specified amperage rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage
rating can cause severe wire damage and could start a fire.
If electrical components in your
vehicle are not working, a fuse may
have blown. Blown fuses are
identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate
fuses before replacing any electrical
components.
Standard Fuse Amperage Rating and Color
COLOR
Fuse
rating
Mini
fuses
Standard
fuses
Maxi
fuses
Cartridge
maxi
fuses
Fuse link
cartridge
2A Grey Grey — — —
3A Violet Violet — — —
4A Pink Pink — — —
5A Tan Tan — — —
7.5A Brown Brown — — —
10A Red Red — — —
15A Blue Blue — — —
20A Yellow Yellow Yellow Blue Blue
25A Natural Natural — Natural Natural
30A Green Green Green Pink Pink
40A — — Orange Green Green
50A — — Red Red Red
60A — — Blue Yellow Yellow
70A — — Tan — Brown
80A — — Natural Black Black
15
Fuses 189
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART
Power Distribution Box
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery before servicing high
current fuses.
WARNING: To reduce risk of electrical shock, always replace the
cover to the power distribution box before reconnecting the
battery or refilling fluid reservoirs.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with a dual battery, disconnecting the
primary under-hood battery does not remove power from all circuits.
The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment. It has
high-current fuses that protect your vehicle’s main electrical systems
from overloads.
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, refer to
Changing the Vehicle Battery in the Maintenance chapter.
190 Fuses
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
The high-current fuses are coded as follows:
Fuse or relay
location
Fuse amp
rating
Protected components
1 HC micro relay Powertrain control module
2 HC micro relay Starter solenoid
3 HC micro relay Wiper
4 HC micro relay Trailer tow battery charge
5 HC micro relay Fuel pump
6 HC micro relay Trailer tow park lamp
7 HC micro relay Auxiliary switch #4
8 HC micro relay Auxiliary switch #3
9 HC micro relay Modified vehicle and stripped
chassis run/start
10 — Not used
11 — Not used
12 40A** Modified vehicle and stripped
chassis run/start
13 30A** Starter solenoid relay
14 40A** Run start relay
15 40A** Modified vehicle and stripped
chassis battery
16 50A** Auxiliary air conditioning blower
17 50A** Trailer tow battery charge, Trailer
tow park feed
18 30A** Electric trailer brake, Trailer
brake controller
19 30A** Auxiliary switch #1
20 30A** Auxiliary switch #2
21 — Not used
22 — Not used
23 G8VA relay Air conditioning clutch
24 G8VA relay Horn relay (stripped chassis)
25 HC micro relay Run/start
26 — Not used
Fuses 191
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Fuse or relay
location
Fuse amp
rating
Protected components
27 — Not used
28 20A* Back-up lamp
29 10A* Air conditioning clutch
30 10A* Brake on/off switch
31 10A* Cluster battery (stripped chassis)
32 50A** Blower motor
33 40A** Anti-lock brake system pump
34 20A** Stripped chassis horn
35 40A** Powertrain control module relay
36 20A** Ignition switch (stripped chassis)
37 G8VA relay Trailer tow stop — left turn signal
38 G8VA relay Trailer tow stop — right turn
signal
39 G8VA relay Back up lamp
40 ISO relay Blower motor
41 — Not used
42 15A* Diagnostic connector (stripped
chassis)
43 20A* Fuel pump
44 10A* Auxiliary switch #3
45 15A* Auxiliary switch #4
46 10A* Powertrain control module keep
alive power, Canister vent,
Powertrain control module relay
coil
47 40A** Anti-lock brake system coil
48 20A** Trailer tow stop lamp/turn signal
49 30A** Wiper motor
50 — Not used
51 20A** Cutaway
52 10A* Stripped chassis and modified
vehicle run/start relay coil
192 Fuses
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Fuse or relay
location
Fuse amp
rating
Protected components
53 10A* Anti-lock brake system run/start
feed
54 10A* Fuel pump relay coil
55 — Not used
56 — Not used
57 20A* Trailer tow park lamp
58 15A* Trailer tow backup lamp
59 — Not used
60 — One-touch integrated start
(diode)
61 — Not used
62 HC micro relay Auxiliary switch #2
63 30A** Trailer tow battery charge
64 — Not used
65 20A** Power point 2 (glove box)
66 20A** Power point 3 (left B-pillar)
67 20A** Power point 1 (instrument panel)
68 50A** Modified vehicle
69 — Not used
70 30A** Stripped chassis
71 — Not used
72 20A** Cigar lighter / Power point
73 — Not used
74 30A** Power seat
75 20A* Vehicle power 1, Powertrain
control module power
76 20A* Vehicle power 2, Powertrain
control module – emission related
powertrain components
77 10A* Vehicle power 3, Powertrain
control module – general
powertrain components
Fuses 193
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Fuse or relay
location
Fuse amp
rating
Protected components
78 15A* Vehicle power 4, Fuel pump relay
coil
79 10A* Vehicle power 5, Transmission
80 10A* Cluster run/start (stripped
chassis)
81 — Not used
82 — Not used
83 — Fuel pump (diode)
84 — Not used
85 HC micro relay Auxiliary switch #1
* Mini fuses ** A1S fuses
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery before servicing high
current fuses.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with a dual battery, disconnecting the
primary under-hood battery does not remove power from all circuits.
The fuse panel is located to the left of the brake pedal and mounted
onto the lower left cowl panel. Remove the fuse panel cover to access
the fuses.
To remove a fuse, use the fuse puller tool provided on the inside of the
fuse panel cover.
194 Fuses
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
The fuses are coded as follows:
Fuse or relay
location
Fuse amp
rating
Protected components
1 30A Inverter B+
2 15A Not used (spare)
3 15A Not used (spare)
4 30A Not used (spare)
5 10A Passenger compartment fuse
panel, Brake-shift interlock
6 20A Turn signal, Hazard, Stop lamps
7 10A Left low beam
8 10A Right low beam
9 15A Courtesy lamps
10 15A Switch illumination
11 10A Not used (spare)
Fuses 195
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Fuse or relay
location
Fuse amp
rating
Protected components
12 7.5A Not used (spare)
13 5A Mirrors
14 10A SYNC, Global positioning system
module
15 10A Not used (spare)
16 15A Not used (spare)
17 20A Door locks
18 20A Not used (spare)
19 25A Not used (spare)
20 15A Diagnostic connector (except
stripped chassis)
21 15A Not used (spare)
22 15A Park lamps, License plate lamps
23 15A High beams
24 20A Horn (except stripped chassis)
25 10A Demand lighting
26 10A Cluster (except stripped chassis)
27 20A Ignition switch feed
28 5A Audio mute (start)
29 5A Cluster (except stripped chassis)
30 5A Not used (spare)
31 10A Not used (spare)
32 10A Restraints module
33 10A Trailer brake controller
34 5A Not used (spare)
35 10A Reverse park aid, Rear video
camera, Cutaway run/start
36 5A Passive anti-theft system radio
frequency module
37 10A Climate control, Stripped chassis
instrument panel #1 run/start
38 20A Not used (spare)
196 Fuses
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Fuse or relay
location
Fuse amp
rating
Protected components
39 20A Radio, Navigation
40 20A Amplifier
41 15A Radio, Switch illumination,
Reverse camera mirror, Automatic
dimming rear view mirror,
Inverter
42 10A Auxiliary switch
43 10A Stripped chassis instrument panel
connector #1
44 10A Trailer tow battery charge relay
45 5A Wipers, Stripped chassis Engine
connector 3
46 7.5A Passenger airbag deactivation
indicator
47 30A circuit
breaker
Windows accessory delay
48 Relay Delayed accessory
Fuses 197
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help maintain its roadworthiness
and resale value. There is a large network of Ford authorized dealers
who are there to help you with their professional servicing expertise. We
believe that their specially trained technicians are best qualified to
service your vehicle properly and expertly. They are supported by a wide
range of highly specialized tools developed specifically for servicing your
vehicle.
To help you service your vehicle, we provide Scheduled Maintenance
Information which makes tracking routine service easy.
If your vehicle requires professional service, your authorized dealer can
provide the necessary parts and service. Check your warranty
information to find out which parts and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts
conforming to specifications. Motorcraft® parts are designed and built to
provide the best performance in your vehicle.
Precautions
•Do not work on a hot engine.
•Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts.
•Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed
space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation.
•Keep all open flames and other burning material (such as cigarettes)
away from the battery and all fuel related parts.
Working with the Engine Off
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P(Park).
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key (if equipped).
3. Block the wheels.
Working with the Engine On
WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage or personal
burn injuries, do not start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the engine is running.
1. Set the parking brake and shift to positionP.
2. Block the wheels.
198 Maintenance
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
OPENING AND CLOSING THE HOOD
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood
release handle located under the
bottom left corner of the instrument
panel.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and push the auxiliary latch, located in
the center top of the grille, to the left in order to release the hood.
3. Lift the hood and secure it with the prop rod.
Maintenance 199
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW
A. Battery
B. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
C. Engine oil filler cap
D. Automatic transmission fluid dipstick
E. Air filter assembly
F. Engine oil dipstick
G. Power steering fluid reservoir
H. Brake fluid reservoir
I. Engine coolant reservoir
J. Power distribution box
A B C D E F G H I J
200 Maintenance
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
A. MIN
B. MAX
ENGINE OIL CHECK
Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate
intervals for checking the engine oil.
1. Make sure the vehicle is on level ground.
2. Turn the engine off and wait 15 minutes for the oil to drain into the
oil pan.
3. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P
(Park).
4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat.
5. Locate and carefully remove the engine oil level dipstick. See the
Under Hood Overview in this chapter for location of dipstick.
6. Wipe the dipstick clean. Insert the dipstick fully, then remove it again.
If the oil level is between the lower and upper holes or between the MIN
and MAX marks (depending on application), the oil level is acceptable.
DO NOT ADD OIL.
If the oil level is below the lower hole or the MIN mark, add enough oil
to raise the level within the lower and upper holes or within the
MIN-MAX range.
Oil levels above the upper hole or the MAX mark may cause engine
damage. Some oil must be removed from the engine by an authorized
dealer.
7. Put the dipstick back in and ensure it is fully seated.
A B
Maintenance 201
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Adding Engine Oil
Note: Do not remove the engine oil level dipstick or the filler cap when
the engine is running.
Note: Do not add engine oil further than the MAX mark. Oil levels above
the MAX mark may cause engine damage.
Only use oils certified for gasoline engines by the
American Petroleum Institute (API). An oil with this
trademark symbol conforms to the current engine and
emission system protection standards and fuel
economy requirements of the International Lubricants
Specification Advisory Council (ILSAC), comprised of
U.S. and Japanese automobile manufacturers.
1. Check the engine oil level.
2. If the engine oil level is not within the normal range, add engine oil
that meets Ford specifications. See Capacities and Specifications for
more information. Remove the engine oil filler cap and use a funnel to
pour the engine oil into the opening.
3. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure the oil level is not above the
normal operating range on the engine oil level dipstick.
4. Install the dipstick and ensure it is fully seated.
5. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise
until three clicks are heard or until the cap is fully seated.
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK
Checking the Engine Coolant
The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the
intervals listed in Scheduled Maintenance Information.
Note: Make sure that the level is at the FULL COLD level or within the
COLD FILL RANGE in the coolant reservoir.
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The level may extend beyond the
COLD FILL RANGE.
If the level is below the COLD FILL RANGE, add coolant immediately.
See Adding Engine Coolant in this chapter.
The coolant concentration should be maintained within 50%, which
equates to a freeze point between -34°F (-37°C).
202 Maintenance
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Note: For best results, coolant concentration should be tested with a
refractometer such as Rotunda tool 300ROB75240 available from your
dealer. Ford does not recommend the use of hydrometers or coolant test
strips for measuring coolant concentrations.
Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not use engine
coolant/antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified
function and vehicle location.
Adding Engine Coolant
WARNING: Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot.
Steam and scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system
can burn you badly. Also, you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts.
WARNING: Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer
fluid container. If sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant
could make it difficult to see through the windshield.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, make sure the
engine is cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap.
The cooling system is under pressure; steam and hot liquid can come
out forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly.
WARNING: Do not add coolant further than the MAX mark.
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets or cooling system sealants or
additives as they can cause damage to the engine cooling and/or heating
systems. This damage would not be covered under your vehicle’s
warranty.
•DO NOT MIX different colors or types of coolant in your vehicle. Make
sure the correct coolant is used. Mixing of engine coolants may harm
your engine’s cooling system. The use of an improper coolant may
harm engine and cooling system components and may void the
warranty.
Maintenance 203
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
•In case of emergency, a large amount of water without engine coolant
may be added in order to reach a vehicle service location. In this
instance, the cooling system must be drained, chemically cleaned with
Motorcraft Premium Cooling System Flush, and refilled with engine
coolant as soon as possible. Water alone (without engine coolant) can
cause engine damage from corrosion, overheating or freezing.
•Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or any engine coolants mixed with
alcohol or methanol antifreeze (coolant). Alcohol and other liquids can
cause engine damage from overheating or freezing.
•Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These can be
harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine
coolant.
Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure will escape as you unscrew the
cap.
Add prediluted engine coolant meeting the Ford specification. See
Capacities and Specifications for more information.
Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle. If
necessary, add enough prediluted engine coolant to bring the coolant
level to the proper level.
Recycled Engine Coolant
Ford Motor Company does not recommend the use of recycled engine
coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is not yet available.
Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate
manner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling
and disposing of automotive fluids.
Severe Climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates:
•It may be necessary to have a Ford authorized dealer increase the
coolant concentration above 50%.
•A coolant concentration of 60% will provide improved freeze point
protection. Engine coolant concentrations above 60% will decrease the
overheat protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may
cause engine damage.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
•It may be necessary to have a Ford authorized dealer decrease the
coolant concentration to 40%.
204 Maintenance
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
•A coolant concentration of 40% will provide improved overheat
protection. Engine coolant concentrations below 40% will decrease the
corrosion/freeze protection characteristics of the engine coolant and
may cause engine damage.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use
prediluted engine coolant for optimum cooling system and engine
protection.
What You Should Know About Fail-Safe Cooling
If the engine coolant supply is depleted, this feature allows the vehicle to
be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred.
The fail-safe distance depends on ambient temperatures, vehicle load and
terrain.
How Fail-Safe Cooling Works
If the engine begins to overheat, the engine coolant temperature gauge
will move to the red (hot) area and:
The coolant temperature warning light will illuminate.
The service engine soon indicator will illuminate.
If the engine reaches a preset over-temperature condition, the engine
will automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation. Each disabled
cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs the vehicle will still operate. However:
•The engine power will be limited.
•The air conditioning system will be disabled.
Continued operation will increase the engine temperature and the engine
will completely shut down, causing steering and braking effort to
increase.
Once the engine temperature cools, the engine can be restarted. Take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible to minimize
engine damage.
Maintenance 205
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
When Fail-Safe Mode is Activated
WARNING: Fail-safe mode is for use during emergencies only.
Operate the vehicle in fail-safe mode only as long as necessary to
bring the vehicle to rest in a safe location and seek immediate repairs.
When in fail-safe mode, the vehicle will have limited power, will not be
able to maintain high-speed operation, and may completely shut down
without warning, potentially losing engine power, power steering assist,
and power brake assist, which may increase the possibility of a crash
resulting in serious injury.
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine is running or hot.
You have limited engine power when in the fail-safe mode, so drive the
vehicle with caution. The vehicle will not be able to maintain high-speed
operation and the engine will run rough. Remember that the engine is
capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine
damage, therefore:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine.
2. Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to an authorized dealer.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level and replenish if low.
5. Restart the engine and take your vehicle to an authorized dealer.
Note: Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem increases
the chance of engine damage. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
206 Maintenance
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
TRANSMISSION FLUID CHECK
Checking Automatic Transmission Fluid (If Equipped)
Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for scheduled
intervals for fluid checks and changes. Your transmission does not
consume fluid. However, the fluid level should be checked if the
transmission is not working properly, i.e., if the transmission slips or
shifts slowly or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage.
Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed. To obtain an
accurate fluid check, drive the vehicle until it is at normal operating
temperature (approximately 20 miles [30 kilometers]). If your vehicle has
been operated for an extended period at high speeds, in city traffic
during hot weather or pulling a trailer, the vehicle should be turned off
for about 30 minutes to allow fluid to cool before checking.
1. Drive the vehicle 20 miles (30 kilometers) or until it reaches normal
operating temperature.
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake.
3. With the engine running, parking brake engaged and your foot on the
brake pedal, move the gearshift lever through all of the gear ranges.
Allow sufficient time for each gear to engage.
4. Latch the gearshift lever in P (Park) and leave the engine running.
5. Remove the dipstick, wiping it clean with a clean, dry lint free rag.
6. Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in the filler tube.
7. Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid level. The fluid should be in
the designated area for normal operating temperature or ambient
temperature.
Maintenance 207
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Low Fluid Level
Do not drive the vehicle if there is no indication of fluid on the dipstick
and the ambient temperature is above 50°F (10°C).
208 Maintenance
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Correct Fluid Level
The transmission fluid should be checked at normal operating temperature
150°F-170°F (66°C-77°C) on a level surface. The normal operating
temperature can be reached after approximately 20 miles (30 km) of driving.
You can check the fluid without driving if the ambient temperature is above
50°F (10°C). However, if fluid is added at this time, an overfill condition
could result when the vehicle reaches normal operating temperature.
The transmission fluid should be in this range if at normal operating
temperature (150°F-170°F [66°C-77°C]).
Maintenance 209
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
The transmission fluid should be in this range if at ambient temperature
(50°F-95°F [10°C-35°C]).
210 Maintenance
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
High Fluid Level
Fluid levels above the safe range may result in transmission failure.
An overfill condition of transmission fluid may cause shift and/or
engagement concerns and/or possible damage.
High fluid levels can be caused by an overheating condition.
H
C
Maintenance 211
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Adjusting Automatic Transmission Fluid Levels
Note: Use of a non-approved automatic transmission fluid may cause
internal transmission component damage.
Note: An overfill condition of transmission fluid may cause shift and/or
engagement concerns and/or possible damage.
Note: Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments
or cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission
operation and result in damage to internal transmission components.
Before adding any fluid, make sure the correct type is used. The type of
fluid used is normally indicated on the dipstick. Refer to the Technical
Specifications table in the Capacities and Specifications chapter.
If necessary, add fluid in 1/2 pint (250 ml) increments through the filler
tube until the level is correct.
212 Maintenance
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
If an overfill occurs, excess fluid should be removed by an authorized
dealer.
Maintenance 213
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Automatic Transmission Fluid Filter
The TorqShift® automatic
transmission is equipped with a
serviceable transmission fluid filter
located inside the transmission
bottom pan.
Refer to your Scheduled
Maintenance Information for
service intervals for automatic
transmission fluid and transmission
filter.
For transmission filter maintenance,
see your authorized dealer.
DRIVELINE UNIVERSAL JOINT AND SLIP YOKE
Your vehicle may be equipped with universal joints that require
lubrication. Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Information for
maintenance intervals. If the original universal joints are replaced with
universal joints equipped with grease fittings, lubrication will also be
necessary.
BRAKE FLUID CHECK
Fluid levels between the MIN and MAX lines are within the normal
operating range; there is no need to add fluid. If the fluid levels are
outside of the normal operating range, the performance of the system
could be compromised; seek service from your authorized dealer
immediately.
214 Maintenance
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
POWER STEERING FLUID CHECK
WARNING: For E-350 and E-450 vehicles with the Hydro-Boost
Brake System, do not press the brake pedal after the engine has
been turned off. Pressing the brake pedal after the engine has been
turned off will give a false power steering fluid level reading.
Note: Do not operate the vehicle with a low power steering pump fluid
level (if the fluid level is below the MIN line on the reservoir).
Note: Do not fill the power steering pump reservoir above the MAX line,
as this may result in leaks from the reservoir.
Check the power steering fluid at the appropriate intervals. Refer to the
scheduled maintenance information.
1. Start the engine and let it run until it reaches normal operating
temperature.
2. While the engine idles, turn the steering wheel left and right several
times.
3. Turn the engine off.
4. Check the fluid level in the reservoir. It should be between the MIN
and MAX lines on the reservoir. Do not add fluid if the level is in this
range.
5. If the fluid is low, add fluid in small amounts, continuously checking
the level until it reaches the range between the MIN and MAX lines. Be
sure to put the cap back on the reservoir. Refer to the technical
specifications table in the Capacities and Specifications chapter for the
proper fluid type.
FUEL FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime fuel filter that is integrated with
the fuel tank. Regular maintenance or replacement is not needed.
WASHER FLUID CHECK
WARNING: If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below
40°F (5°C), use washer fluid with antifreeze protection. Failure
to use washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could
result in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or
accident.
Maintenance 215
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is low. Only use a washer fluid
that meets Ford specifications. See the technical specifications chart in
the Capacities and Specifications chapter.
State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the
use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive.
Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the
vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.
CHANGING THE VEHICLE BATTERY
WARNING: This vehicle may be equipped with more than one
battery, removal of cable from only one battery does not
disconnect the vehicle electrical system. Be sure to disconnect cables
from all batteries when disconnecting power. Failure to do so may
cause serious personal injury or property damage.
WARNING: Batteries normally produce explosive gases which
can cause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks
or lighted substances to come near the battery. When working near the
battery, always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide
proper ventilation.
WARNING: When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive
pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the
vent caps, resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or
battery. Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners.
WARNING:
Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries
contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against possible
splashing of acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or eyes, flush
immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt
medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician immediately.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
216 Maintenance
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Note: If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled after
the battery has been cleaned or replaced.
Note: Electrical or electronic accessories or components added to the
vehicle by the dealer or the owner may adversely affect battery
performance and durability.
Your vehicle is equipped with a Motorcraft® maintenance-free battery
which normally does not require additional water during its life of
service.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and
dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to
the battery terminals.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables
from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the
acid with a solution of baking soda and water.
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, the
transmission must learn its adaptive strategy. As a result of this, the
transmission may shift firmly. This operation is considered normal and
will fully update transmission operation to its optimum shift feel.
It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be
disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an
extended period of time. This will minimize the discharge of your battery
during storage.
For information on transmission operation after the battery has been
disconnected, refer to Automatic transmission operation in the
Driving chapter.
Dual Batteries (If Equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a frame-mounted battery located on
the passenger side frame rail, behind the front passenger door. This
battery is connected in parallel with the battery in the engine
compartment. Both batteries are used to start the vehicle.
Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by a computer,
some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. When
the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the engine must
relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and
performance. Flexible fuel vehicles (FFV) must also relearn the ethanol
content of the fuel for optimum driveability and performance. To begin
this process:
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake.
Maintenance 217
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
2. Put the gearshift in P (Park), turn off all accessories and start the
engine.
3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
6. Release the parking brake. With your foot on the brake pedal and with
the A/C on, put the vehicle in D (Drive) and allow the engine to idle for
at least one minute.
7. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process.
•The vehicle may need to be driven 10 miles (16 km) or more to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy along with the ethanol content
for flexible fuel vehicles.
•Note: If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle
quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle trim is
eventually relearned.
•For flexible fuel vehicles, if you are operating on E85, you may
experience poor starts or an inability to start the engine and
driveability problems until the fuel trim and ethanol content have been
relearned.
If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed,
the clock and radio settings must be reset once the battery is
reconnected.
•Always dispose of automotive
batteries in a responsible manner.
Follow your local authorized
standards for disposal. Call your
local authorized recycling center
to find out more about recycling
automotive batteries.
LEAD
RETURN
RECYCLE
218 Maintenance
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
CHECKING THE WIPER BLADES
Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of the blade
to check for roughness.
Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid or water
applied with a soft sponge or cloth.
CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES
Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance.
To replace the wiper blades:
1. Fold back the wiper arm and
position the wiper blade at a right
angle to the wiper arm.
2. To remove the wiper blade, press
the retaining clip (A) to disengage
the wiper blade, then pull the blade
down toward the windshield to
remove it from the arm.
3. Install the new wiper blade on
the arm and press it into place until a click is heard.
Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the wiper blades and
windshield. Refer to Windows and wiper blades in the Cleaning
chapter.
To prolong the life of the wiper blades, it is highly recommended to
scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers. The
layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the
wiper rubber element.
AIR FILTER CHECK
WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and or
personal burn injuries, do not start your engine with the air
cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running.
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe
engine damage. The customer warranty may be void for any damage to
the engine if the correct air filter element is not used.
A
Maintenance 219
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
When changing the air filter element, use only the air filter element
listed. See Motorcraft® Part Numbers in the Capacities and
Specifications chapter.
See Scheduled Maintenance Information for the appropriate intervals
for changing the air filter element.
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe
engine damage. The customer warranty may be void for any damage to
the engine if the correct air filter element is not used.
Changing the Air Filter Element
1. Disconnect the fresh air inlet
tube from the radiator support.
2. Open the clamp that secures the
two halves of the air filter housing
together.
3. Carefully separate the two
halves of the air filter housing.
4. Remove the air filter element
from the housing.
5. Install a new air filter element.
Be careful not to crimp the filter
element edges between the air
filter housing. This could cause
filter damage and allow unfiltered
air to enter the engine if not
properly seated.
6. Replace the two halves of the air filter housing and secure the clamp.
7. Connect the fresh air inlet tube to the radiator support.
220 Maintenance
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS
The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant.
If your vehicle has been in an accident, the alignment of your headlamps
should be checked by your authorized dealer.
Vertical and Horizontal Aim Adjustment (Sealed Beam Headlamps)
The headlamps on your vehicle are intended to be aimed using
mechanical aimers. If mechanical aimers are used and the cross-car sight
line is in any way blocked, set the legs of the universal adaptor all to the
same setting, such that the cross-car sight line is no longer blocked, per
the instructions for the brand of mechanical aimer used. You can also
aim the headlamps visually using the procedure below.
To adjust the headlamps:
1. Park your vehicle on a level surface about 25 feet (7.6 meters) away
from a vertical plain surface. Check your headlamp alignment at night or
in a dark area so that you can see the headlamp beam pattern.
•(A) 8 feet (2.4 meters)
•(B) Center height of lamp to
ground
•(C) 25 feet (7.6 meters)
•(D) Horizontal reference line
•(E) Vertical reference line for the
center of the headlamp
•(F) Vertical reference line for the
center of the vehicle
2. The center of the headlamp is marked either on the lens (a circle or
cross marker) or on the bulb shield, internal to the lamp (mark or
feature). Measure the height from the center of your headlamp to the
ground (B) and mark an 8 foot (2.4 meter) long horizontal line on the
wall or screen (D) at this height (masking tape works well).
B
D
E
FA
C
Maintenance 221
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps
and open the hood.
4. Locate the high intensity area of
the beam pattern and place the top
edge of the intensity zone even with
the horizontal reference line (D). If
the top edge of the high intensity
area is not even with the horizontal
line, follow the next step to adjust
it.
5. Locate the vertical adjuster (A)
for each headlamp. Turn the
adjuster control either clockwise or
counterclockwise to adjust the
vertical aim of the headlamp.
6. In addition to the horizontal line
marked in step 2, a pair of vertical
lines (E) must be marked at the
center line of the headlamps on the
wall or screen.
7. On the wall or screen, locate the high intensity area of the beam
pattern. The left edge of the high intensity area should be even with the
vertical line corresponding to the headlamp under adjustment. If the left
edge of the high intensity area is not even with the vertical line, follow
the next step to adjust it.
8. Locate the horizontal adjuster (B) for each headlamp. Turn it
clockwise or counterclockwise to place the left edge of the high intensity
area even with the vertical line corresponding to the headlamp under
adjustment.
Vertical Aim Adjustment (Aerodynamic Headlamps)
The headlamps on your vehicle can only be vertically adjusted. Your
vehicle does not require horizontal aim adjustments.
To adjust the headlamps:
1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters) away.
A
B
222 Maintenance
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
•(A) 8 feet (2.4 meters)
•(B) Center height of lamp to
ground
•(C) 25 feet (7.6 meters)
•(D) Horizontal reference line
2. Measure the height from the
center of your headlamp (indicated
by a 3.0 millimeter circle on the
lens) to the ground and mark an
8 foot (2.4 meter) horizontal
reference line on the vertical wall or screen at this height (a piece of
masking tape works well).
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and
open the hood. Cover one of the headlamps so no light hits the wall.
4. On the wall or screen you will
observe a light pattern with a
distinct horizontal edge towards the
right. If this edge is not at the
horizontal reference line, the beam
will need to be adjusted so the edge
is at the same height as the
horizontal reference line.
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on
the back of each headlamp, then
use a long Phillips #2 screwdriver to
turn the adjuster either
counterclockwise or clockwise in
order to adjust the vertical aim of
the headlamp. The upper edge of
the light pattern should align with
the horizontal reference line.
6. Repeat step 3–5 for the other
headlamp.
7. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.
C
A
B
D
Maintenance 223
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
CHANGING A BULB
Lamp Assembly Condensation
Exterior lamps are vented to accommodate normal changes in pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product of this design. When moist air
enters the lamp assembly through the vents, there is a possibility that
condensation can occur when the temperature is cold. When normal
condensation occurs, a thin film of mist can form on the interior of the
lens. The thin mist eventually clears and exits through the vents during
normal operation. Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours under dry
weather conditions.
These are examples of acceptable condensation:
•Presence of thin mist (no streaks, drip marks or droplets).
•Fine mist covers less than 50% of the lens.
These are examples of unacceptable moisture (usually caused by a lamp
water leak):
•Water puddle inside the lamp.
•Large water droplets, drip marks or streaks present on the interior of
the lens.
Take your vehicle to a dealer for service if any of the above conditions of
unacceptable moisture are present.
Replacing Headlamp Bulbs (Aerodynamic)
WARNING: Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep
out of children’s reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base
and do not touch the glass. The oil from your hand could cause the
bulb to break the next time the headlamps are operated.
Note: If the bulb is accidentally touched, it should be cleaned with
alcohol before being used.
224 Maintenance
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is in the off position, then open the
hood.
2. Remove the three screws from
the headlamp assembly and pull the
assembly straight out.
3. Disconnect the electrical
connector by squeezing the release
tab and pushing the connector
forward, then pulling it rearward.
4. Remove the bulb assembly by
turning it counterclockwise and
pulling it straight out.
To install the new bulb, follow the
removal procedures in reverse
order.
Replacing Headlamps (Sealed Beam)
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is in the off position, then open the hood.
2. Remove the four screws from the
headlamp assembly and carefully
remove the lamp/bezel.
3. Remove the four screws and the
retaining ring.
4. Disconnect the electrical
connector from the lamp and
remove the lamp.
To install the new lamp, follow the
removal procedures in reverse
order.
Maintenance 225
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Replacing Front Parking Lamp and Turn Signal Bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamp control is in the off position.
2. Remove the headlamp assembly. Refer to Replacing headlamp bulbs
in this section.
Aerodynamic
Sealed Beam
3. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove.
4. Carefully pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
To complete installation, follow the removal procedures in reverse order.
226 Maintenance
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Replacing Side Marker Bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamp control is in the off position.
2. Remove the headlamp assembly. Refer to Replacing headlamp bulbs
in this section.
Aerodynamic
Sealed Beam
3. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove.
4. Carefully pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
To complete installation, follow the removal procedures in reverse order.
Maintenance 227
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Replacing High-Mount Brake Lamp Bulbs
On vehicles without a rear headliner, the interior cargo lamp (if
equipped) must be removed from under the high-mount brake lamp
assembly located inside the vehicle. Then, do the following:
1. Remove the two screws from the
high-mount brake lamp assembly
and lift the lamp from the vehicle.
2. Remove the bulb socket from the
lamp assembly by turning it
counterclockwise.
3. Carefully pull the bulb straight
out of the socket.
To install the new bulb, follow the removal procedure in reverse order.
Replacing License Plate Lamp Bulbs
1. Turn the headlamp switch to the
off position.
2. Remove the two screws and the
license plate lamp assembly from
the rear door.
3. Remove bulb socket from lamp
assembly by turning it
counterclockwise.
4. Pull the bulb out from socket and
push in the new bulb.
To install the new bulb, follow the removal procedures in reverse order.
228 Maintenance
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Replacing Stop, Turn, Tail, Side Marker, and Backup Lamp Bulbs
The stop, turn, tail, side marker, and backup lamp bulbs are located in
the tail lamp assembly. Follow the same steps to replace any of the
bulbs:
1. Turn the headlamp switch to the
off position, then remove the four
screws and the lamp assembly from
the vehicle.
2. Rotate the bulb socket
counterclockwise and remove it
from lamp assembly.
3. Carefully pull the bulb straight
out of the socket and push in the
new bulb.
To install the lamp, follow the removal procedures in reverse order.
Maintenance 229
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
BULB SPECIFICATION CHART
Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs
must be marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for North America and an
“E” for Europe to ensure lamp performance, light brightness and pattern
and safe visibility. The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly
or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn
time.
Function Number of
bulbs
Trade number
Headlamps
(aerodynamic)
2 H13/9008
Headlamps (sealed
beam)
2 H6054
Park lamp with
aerodynamic
2 3157A or 3157AK
Park lamp with sealed
beam
2 3157K
Side marker with
aerodynamic
2 168
Side marker with
sealed beam
2 194
Back-up lamps 2 3156K or 3156
License plate lamp 1 168
Stop/tail/turn/side
marker lamp
2 3157K
High-mount brake
lamp
2 912
Cargo lamp 1 578
Dome lamp (standard) 1 912
Map/reading lamp 2 578
All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted.
To replace all instrument panel lights - see your authorized dealer
230 Maintenance
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Your Ford or Lincoln authorized dealer has many quality products
available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes.
CLEANING PRODUCTS
For best results, use the following products or products of equivalent
quality:
Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover (ZC-42)
Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15)
Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A)
Motorcraft Dusting Cloth (ZC-24)
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (U.S. only) (ZC-20)
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo (Canada only) (CXC-66-A)
Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-101)
Motorcraft Premium Glass Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-100)
Motorcraft Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid (Canada only)
[CXC-37-(A, B, D or F)]
Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Concentrates (U.S. only)
(ZC-32A1 or ZC-32-B1)
Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54)
Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (U.S. only) (ZC-14)
Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (ZC-23)
Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-93)
Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A)
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral
pH shampoo, such as Motorcraft® Detail Wash.
•Do not use a commercial or high-pressure wand on the surface or
edge of stripes and graphics. This can cause damage to the film and
cause the edge of the film to peel away from the vehicle surface.
•Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing
or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted
surfaces.
•Never wash a vehicle that is hot to the touch or during exposure to
strong, direct sunlight.
Vehicle Care 231
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
•Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to
eliminate water spotting.
•Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings
and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle’s
paintwork and trim over time. Use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover.
•Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted
surface; if these substances come in contact with your vehicle, wash it
off as soon as possible.
•Remove any exterior accessories before entering a car wash.
Stripes or Graphics (if equipped)
Do not use a commercial or high-pressure wand on the surface or edge
of stripes and graphics. This can cause damage to the film and cause the
edge of the film to peel away from the vehicle surface.
Exterior Chrome
Note: Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic pads as
they can scratch the chrome surface.
Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal cleaner or polish on wheels and
wheel covers.
•Wash the vehicle first, using cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH
shampoo, such as Motorcraft Detail Wash.
•
Use Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner. Apply the product as you
would a wax to clean bumpers and other chrome parts; allow the cleaner
to dry for a few minutes, then wipe off the haze with a clean, dry rag.
•Do not apply cleaning product to hot surfaces and do not leave
cleaning product on chrome surfaces for a period of time exceeding
that which is recommended.
•Note: Using other non-recommended cleaners can result in severe
and permanent cosmetic damage.
Underbody
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and
door drain holes free from packed dirt.
Cleaning Plastic Exterior Parts
Use only approved products to clean plastic parts.
•For routine cleaning, use Motorcraft® Detail Wash.
•
If tar or grease spots are present, use Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover.
232 Vehicle Care
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
WAXING
Regular waxing is necessary to protect your car’s paint from the
elements. We recommend that you wash and wax the painted surface
once or twice a year.
When washing and waxing, park your vehicle in a shaded area out of
direct sunlight. Always wash your vehicle before applying wax.
•Use a quality wax that does not contain abrasives.
•Follow the manufacturer’s instructions to apply and remove the wax.
•Apply a small amount of wax in a back-and-forth motion, not in
circles.
•Do not allow wax to come in contact with any non-body (low-gloss
black) colored trim. The wax will discolor or stain the parts over
time, such as:
•Bumpers
•Grained door handles
•Side mouldings
•Mirror housings
•Windshield cowl area.
•Do not apply wax to glass areas.
•After waxing, your car’s paint should feel smooth, and be free of
streaks and smudges.
REPAIRING MINOR PAINT DAMAGE
Your authorized dealer has touch-up paint to match your vehicle’s color.
Take your color code (printed on a sticker in the driver’s door jamb) to
your authorized dealer to make sure you get the correct color.
•Remove particles, such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout, before repairing paint chips.
•Always read the instructions before using the products.
CLEANING THE ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt
buildup keep the engine warmer than normal.
When washing:
•Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The
high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause
damage.
•Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the
engine block or other engine components.
Vehicle Care 233
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
•Spray Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo and Degreaser on all parts that
require cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In Canada, use Motorcraft®
Engine Shampoo.
•Never wash or rinse the engine while it is hot or running; water in the
running engine may cause internal damage.
•Never wash or rinse any ignition coil, spark plug wire or spark plug
well, or the area in and around these locations.
•Cover the battery, power distribution box, and air filter assembly to
prevent water damage when cleaning the engine.
CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES
The windows and wiper blades should be cleaned regularly. If the wipers
do not wipe properly, substances on the vehicle’s glass or the wiper
blades may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades, and
streaking and smearing of the windshield. To clean these items, follow
these tips:
•The windows may be cleaned with a non-abrasive cleaner such as
Motorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner.
•The wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or
Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Concentrates in the U.S., or
Motorcraft Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid in Canada.
Replace your wiper blades when they appear worn or do not function
properly.
•Do not use abrasive materials, as they may cause scratches.
•Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts.
If you cannot remove those streaks after cleaning with the glass cleaner
or if the wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion, clean the outer
surface of the windshield and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft
cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-abrasive cleaning solution. After
cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water. The
windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the windshield
with water.
Note: Do not use sharp objects, such as a razor blade, to clean the
inside of the rear window or to remove decals, as it may cause damage
to the rear window defroster’s heated grid lines.
234 Vehicle Care
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
WARNING: Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the
vehicle’s safety belts, as these actions may weaken the belt
webbing.
WARNING: On vehicles equipped with seat-mounted airbags, do
not use chemical solvents or strong detergents. Such products
could contaminate the side airbag system and affect performance of the
side airbag in a collision.
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts and seats equipped with side
airbags:
•Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
•Apply a layer of high quality foam cleaner, designed for automotive
interiors, to the dry stained area (s) of the item being cleaned and
allow to soak for one minute.
•If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first
with Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover. In Canada, use Motorcraft
Multi-Purpose Cleaner.
•If a ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate) or the ring will set.
•Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of
the seat materials.
CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL AND INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER LENS
WARNING: Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents
when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid
contamination of the airbag system.
Clean the instrument panel and cluster lens with a clean, damp, white,
cotton cloth, then use a clean and dry, white, cotton cloth to dry these
areas.
•Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion
of the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the
driver from undesirable windshield reflection.
Vehicle Care 235
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
•
Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in contact
with certain products, such as insect repellent and suntan lotion, in
order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted surfaces.
•Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the
finish of the instrument panel, interior trim and cluster lens.
•Do not allow air fresheners and hand sanitizers to spill on interior
surfaces. If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately. Damage may not be
covered by your warranty.
If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has been spilled on the instrument
panel or on interior trim surfaces, clean as follows:
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean, white, cotton cloth.
2.
Wipe the surface with a damp, clean, white, cotton cloth. For more
thorough cleaning, use a mild soap and water solution. If the spot cannot
be completely cleaned by this method, the area may be cleaned using a
commercially available cleaning product designed for automotive interiors.
3. If necessary, apply more soap and water solution or cleaning product
to a clean, white, cotton cloth and press the cloth onto the soiled area;
allow this to set at room temperature for 30 minutes.
4. Remove the soaked cloth, and if it is not soiled badly, use this cloth to
clean the area by using a rubbing motion for 60 seconds.
5. Following this, wipe area dry with a clean, white, cotton cloth.
CLEANING LEATHER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
•Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
•Clean spills and stains as quickly as possible.
•For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth. For
more thorough cleaning, wipe the surface with a mild soap and water
solution. In Canada, use Motorcraft® Vinyl Cleaner. Dry the area with
a soft cloth.
•If the leather cannot be completely cleaned using a mild soap and
water solution, the leather may be cleaned using a commercially
available leather cleaning product designed for automotive interiors.
•To check for compatibility, first test any cleaner or stain remover on
an inconspicuous part of the leather.
•Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions,
oil/petroleum-based leather conditioners, or solvents or cleaners
intended specifically for rubber, vinyl and plastics. These products
may cause premature wearing or damage to the leather.
236 Vehicle Care
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
CLEANING THE ALLOY WHEELS
Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal cleaner or polish on wheels and
wheel covers.
Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clearcoat paint
finish. In order to maintain their condition:
•Clean weekly with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner. Use a sponge to
remove heavy deposits of dirt and brake dust accumulation. Rinse
thoroughly with a strong stream of water when you have completed
the cleaning process.
•To remove tar and grease, use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover.
•Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or
covers.
•Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your
wheel rims or covers.
•Industrial-strength (heavy-duty) cleaners, or cleaning chemicals, in
combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust and dirt, could
wear away the clearcoat finish over time.
•Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel
cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent.
•If you intend parking your vehicle for an extended period after
cleaning the wheels with a wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few
minutes before doing so. This will reduce the risk of increased
corrosion of the brake discs.
•If you intend parking your vehicle for an extended period after
cleaning the wheels with a wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few
minutes before doing so. This will reduce the risk of increased
corrosion of the brake discs.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you plan on storing your vehicle for an extended period of time
(30 days or more), read the following maintenance recommendations to
make sure your vehicle stays in good operating condition.
All motor vehicles and their components were engineered and tested for
reliable, regular driving. Long-term storage under various conditions may
lead to component degradation or failure unless specific precautions are
taken to preserve the components.
Vehicle Care 237
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
General
•Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated place.
•Protect from sunlight, if possible.
•If vehicles are stored outside, they require regular maintenance to
protect against rust and damage.
Body
•Wash vehicle thoroughly to remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from
exterior surfaces, rear-wheel housing and underside of front fenders.
•Periodically wash vehicles stored in exposed locations.
•Touch up raw or primed metal to prevent rust.
•
Cover chrome and stainless steel parts with a thick coat of auto wax to
prevent discoloration. Re-wax as necessary when the vehicle is washed.
•Lubricate hood latch, all door latches and trunk lid hinges with a light
grade oil.
•Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
•Keep all rubber parts free from oil and solvents.
Engine
•The engine oil and filter should be changed prior to storage, as used
engine oil contains contaminates that may cause engine damage.
•Start the engine every 15 days. Run at fast idle until it reaches normal
operating temperature.
•With your foot on the brake, shift through all the gears while the
engine is running.
Fuel system
•Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel until the first automatic shutoff
of the fuel pump nozzle.
Note: During extended periods of vehicle storage (30 days or more),
fuel may deteriorate due to oxidation. Add a quality gas stabilizer
product to the vehicle fuel system whenever actual or expected storage
periods exceed 30 days. Follow the instructions on the additive label.
The vehicle should then be operated at idle speed to circulate the
additive throughout the fuel system.
Cooling system
•Protect against freezing temperatures.
•
When removing vehicle from storage, check coolant fluid level. Confirm
there are no cooling system leaks, and fluid is at the recommended level.
238 Vehicle Care
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Battery
•Check and recharge as necessary. Keep connections clean.
•If storing your vehicle for more than 30 days without recharging the
battery, it may be advisable to disconnect the battery cables to ensure
battery charge is maintained for quick starting.
Note: If battery cables are disconnected, it will be necessary to reset
memory features.
Brakes
•Make sure brakes and parking brake are fully released.
Tires
•Maintain recommended air pressure.
Miscellaneous
•Make sure all linkages, cables, levers and pins under vehicle are
covered with grease to prevent rust.
•Move vehicles at least 25 feet (8 meters) every 15 days to lubricate
working parts and prevent corrosion.
Removing Vehicle from Storage
When your vehicle is ready to come out of storage, do the following:
•Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt or grease film build-up on
window surfaces.
•Check windshield wipers for any deterioration.
•Check under the hood for any foreign material that may have collected
during storage (mice/squirrel nests).
•Check the exhaust for any foreign material that may have collected
during storage.
•Check tire pressures and set tire inflation per the Tire Label.
•Check brake pedal operation. Drive the vehicle 15 feet (4.5 meters)
back and forth to remove rust build-up.
•Check fluid levels (including coolant, oil and gas) to make sure there
are no leaks and fluids are at recommended levels.
•If the battery was removed, clean the battery cable ends and inspect.
Contact your authorized dealer if you have any concerns or issues.
Vehicle Care 239
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Notice to Utility Vehicle, Van and Truck Owners
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover
rate than other types of vehicles. To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death from a rollover or other crash you must:
•Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers;
•Drive at safe speeds for the conditions;
•Keep tires properly inflated;
•Never overload or improperly load your vehicle; and
•Make sure every passenger is properly restrained.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
All occupants must wear seat belts. Children and infants must use
appropriate restraints to minimize the risk of injury or ejection.
Utility vehicles, vans and trucks handle
differently than passenger cars in the
various driving conditions that are
encountered on streets, highways and
off-road. Utility vehicles, vans and
trucks are not designed for cornering
at speeds as high as passenger cars
any more than low-slung sports cars
are designed to perform satisfactorily
under off-road conditions.
240 Wheels and Tires
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
How Your Vehicle Differs from Other Vehicles
Sport-utility vehicles, vans and
trucks can differ from some other
vehicles in a few noticeable ways.
Your vehicle may be:
•Higher – to allow higher load
carrying capacity and to allow it
to travel over rough terrain
without getting hung up or
damaging underbody
components.
•Shorter – to give it the capability
to approach inclines and drive
over the crest of a hill without
getting hung up or damaging
underbody components. All other
things held equal, a shorter
wheelbase may make your vehicle quicker to respond to steering
inputs than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase.
•Narrower – to provide greater
maneuverability in tight spaces,
particularly in off-road use.
As a result of the above dimensional
differences, sport-utility vehicles,
vans and trucks often will have a
higher center of gravity and a
greater difference in center of
gravity between the loaded and
unloaded condition.
These differences that make your
vehicle so versatile also make it
handle differently than an ordinary
passenger car.
Wheels and Tires 241
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
TIRE CARE
Information About Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires. The Tire
Quality Grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall between
tread shoulder and maximum section
width. For example:
•Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United
States Department of Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires. They do
not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or
temporary use spare tires, light truck or LT type tires, tires with nominal
rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in
Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).
U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S.
Department of Transportation requires Ford Motor Company to give you
the following information about tire grades exactly as the government
has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear 1
1
⁄
2
times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The
relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
242 Wheels and Tires
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Traction AA A B C
WARNING: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Temperature A B C
WARNING: The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 139. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by
law.
Glossary of Tire Terminology
•Tire label: A label showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle
can carry.
•Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of
each tire providing information about the tire brand and
manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacture. Also referred
to as DOT code.
Wheels and Tires 243
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
•Inflation pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire.
•Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
maximum load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires]. Increasing
the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s
load-carrying capability.
•Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric tires].
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase
the tire’s load-carrying capability.
•kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure.
•PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure.
•Cold tire pressure: The tire pressure when the vehicle has been
stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and prior to
the vehicle being driven for 1 mile (1.6 kilometers).
•Recommended inflation pressure: The cold inflation pressure found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the
door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the driver’s seating position) or Tire Label
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
•B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the
front door.
•Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.
•Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.
•Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle.
•Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly
upon which the tire beads are seated.
244 Wheels and Tires
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.
Information on P Type Tires
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a
tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that
the tire size, load index and speed
rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)
A. P:
Indicates a tire, designated by the Tire and Rim Association, that may
be used for service on cars, sport utility vehicles, minivans and light trucks.
Note: If your tire size does not begin with a letter, this may mean it is
designated by either the European Tire and Rim Technical Organization
or the Japan Tire Manufacturing Association.
B. 215: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width.
D. R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
F. 95: Indicates the tire’s load index. It is an index that relates to how
much weight a tire can carry. You may find this information in your
owner’s manual. If not, contact a local tire dealer.
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
CDEFG
Wheels and Tires 245
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
G. H: Indicates the tire’s speed rating. The speed rating denotes the
speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of
time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure. The tires
on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation
pressure. These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference
in conditions. The ratings range from 81 mph (130 km/h) to 186 mph
(299 km/h). These ratings are listed in the following chart.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
Letter rating Speed rating - mph (km/h)
M 81 (130)
N 87 (140)
Q 99 (159)
R 106 (171)
S 112 (180)
T 118 (190)
U 124 (200)
H 130 (210)
V 149 (240)
W 168 (270)
Y 186 (299 )
Note: For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For
those with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire
manufacturers always use the letters ZR.
H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with the
letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The
next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was
manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example,
the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers
go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The
numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This
information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall.
246 Wheels and Tires
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
J. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number of
plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and
sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the
tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
K. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the tire. See the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch
post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver’s seating position), for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle.
L. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades
•Treadwear: The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (1
1
⁄
2
) times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
•Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
•Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
M. Maximum Inflation Pressure: Indicates the tire manufacturer’s
maximum permissible pressure or the pressure at which the maximum
load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally higher than the
vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation pressure, which can
be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either
the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the driver’s seating position), or Tire Label which
is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The cold
inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended
pressure on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings, such
as standard load or radial tubeless.
Wheels and Tires 247
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Additional Information Contained on the Tire Sidewall for LT Type
Tires
LT type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P type
tires. These differences are
described below.
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association,
that is intended for service on light
trucks.
B. Load Range/Load Inflation
Limits: Indicates the tire’s
load-carrying capabilities and its
inflation limits.
C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a dual, defined
as four tires on the rear axle (a total of six or more tires on the vehicle).
D. Maximum Load Single lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single,
defined as two tires (total) on the rear axle.
A
BC
B
D
248 Wheels and Tires
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Information on T Type Tires
T type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P type
tires. These differences are
described below.
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire
size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example. Tire Quality Grades
do not apply to this type of tire.
A. T: Indicates a type of tire, designated by the Tire and Rim
Association, that is intended for temporary service on cars, sport-utility
vehicles, minivans and light trucks.
B. 145: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio, which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width. Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall.
D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire. R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
Location of the Tire Label
You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size
and other important information located on the B-Pillar or the edge of
the driver’s door. See the payload description and graphic in the Load
Carrying chapter.
A
BCD
E
Wheels and Tires 249
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
INFLATING YOUR TIRES
Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly
inflated. Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure
without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check your tires. If one looks lower than the
others, use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust if
required.
At least once a month and before long trips, inspect each tire and check
the tire pressure with a tire gauge (including spare, if equipped). Inflate
all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Ford Motor Company.
WARNING: Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire
failures and may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation
or blowout, with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk
of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling
resistance, resulting in heat build-up and internal damage to the tire. It
also may result in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle
control and accidents. A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and
not appear to be flat!
You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic
service station gauges may be inaccurate. Ford recommends the use of a
digital or dial-type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick-type tire
pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause
uneven treadwear patterns.
Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure
even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found
on the tire. The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver’s seating position), or Tire Label which is located
on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. Failure to follow the tire
pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your vehicle handles.
250 Wheels and Tires
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Maximum Inflation Pressure is the tire manufacturer’s maximum
permissible pressure or the pressure at which the maximum load can be
carried by the tire. This pressure is normally higher than the
manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation pressure, which can be found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver’s seating position), or Tire Label which is located
on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The cold inflation
pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label.
When weather temperature changes occur, tire inflation pressures also
change. A 10°F (6°C) temperature drop can cause a corresponding drop
of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures
frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label.
To check the pressure in your tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning they are not hot from driving
even a mile.
Note: If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot (for
example, driven more than 1 mile [1.6 kilometers]), never bleed or
reduce air pressure. The tires are hot from driving and it is normal for
pressures to increase above recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at
or below recommended cold inflation pressure could be significantly
under-inflated.
Note: If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire(s), check
and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure
when you get to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat up and the air
pressure inside to go up as you drive.
2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, then firmly press the tire
gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure.
3. Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure.
Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by pressing on the metal stem in
the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare.
Wheels and Tires 251
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Note: Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the
other tires. For T-type mini-spare tires, see the Dissimilar Spare Tire
and Wheel Assembly Information section. Store and maintain at 60 psi
(4.15 bar). For full-size and dissimilar spare tires, see Dissimilar Spare
Tire and Wheel Assembly Information under Changing a Road Wheel
in this chapter. Store and maintain at the higher of the front and rear
inflation pressure as shown on the Tire Label.
6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other
objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air
leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts or bulges.
Tire Inflation Information
WARNING: An inflated tire and rim can be very dangerous if
improperly used, serviced or maintained. To reduce the risk of
serious injury, never attempt to re-inflate a tire which has been run flat
or seriously under-inflated without first removing the tire from the
wheel assembly for inspection. Do not attempt to add air to tires or
replace tires or wheels without first taking precautions to protect
persons and property.
252 Wheels and Tires
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
All tires with Steel Carcass Plies (if equipped):
This type of tire utilizes steel cords in the sidewalls. As such, they
cannot be treated like normal light truck tires. Tire service, including
adjusting tire pressure, must be performed by personnel trained,
supervised and equipped according to Federal Occupational Safety and
Health Administration regulations. For example, during any procedure
involving tire inflation, the technician or individual must utilize a remote
inflation device, and make sure that all persons are clear of the
trajectory area.
Wheels and Tires 253
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
WARNING: Stay out of the trajectory (1) as indicated in the
illustration.
Inspecting Your Tires and Wheel Valve Stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and
remove objects such as stones, nails or glass that may be wedged in the
tread grooves. Check the tire and valve stems for holes, cracks, or cuts
that may permit air leakage and repair or replace the tire and replace
the valve stem. Inspect the tire sidewalls for cracking, cuts, bruises and
other signs of damage or excessive wear. If internal damage to the tire is
suspected, have the tire demounted and inspected in case it needs to be
repaired or replaced. For your safety, tires that are damaged or show
signs of excessive wear should not be used because they are more likely
to blow out or fail.
254 Wheels and Tires
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear
abnormally. Inspect all your tires, including the spare, frequently, and
replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist:
Tire Wear
When the tread is worn down to
1/16th of an inch (2 millimeters),
tires must be replaced to help
prevent your vehicle from skidding
and hydroplaning. Built-in
treadwear indicators, or wear bars,
which look like narrow strips of
smooth rubber across the tread will
appear on the tire when the tread is
worn down to 1/16th of an inch (2
millimeters).
When the tire tread wears down to the same height as these wear bars,
the tire is worn out and must be replaced.
Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage (such as
bulges in the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the tread groove and
separation in the tread or sidewall). If damage is observed or suspected,
have the tire inspected by a tire professional. Tires can be damaged
during off-road use, so inspection after off-road use is also
recommended.
WARNING: Age
Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as
weather, storage conditions, and conditions of use (such as load, speed,
inflation pressure) the tires experience throughout their lives.
In general, tires should be replaced after six years regardless of tread
wear. However, heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading
conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to be
replaced more frequently.
You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires or
after six years due to aging even if it has not been used.
Wheels and Tires 255
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.
This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all
federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code
designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size
code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was
built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After
2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in between are identification codes used for
traceability. This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect
requires a recall.
Tire Replacement Requirements
WARNING: Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the
same size, load index, speed rating and type (such as P-metric
versus LT-metric or all-season versus all-terrain) as those originally
provided by Ford. The recommended tire and wheel size may be found
on either the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either
the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the driver’s seating position), or the Tire Label
which is located on the B-Pillar or edge of the driver’s door. If this
information is not found on these labels, then you should contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible. Use of any tire or wheel not
recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your
vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. Additionally the use
of non-recommended tires and wheels could cause steering, suspension,
axle, transfer case or power transfer unit failure. If you have questions
regarding tire replacement, contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
256 Wheels and Tires
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
WARNING: To reduce the risk of serious injury, when mounting
replacement tires and wheels, you should not exceed the
maximum pressure indicated on the sidewall of the tire to set the beads
without additional precautions listed below. If the beads do not seat at
the maximum pressure indicated, re-lubricate and try again.
When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi (1.38 bar)
greater than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall, the following
precautions must be taken to protect the person mounting the tire:
1. Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size.
2. Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again.
3. Stand at a minimum of 12 feet (3.66 meters) away from the tire
wheel assembly.
4. Use both eye and ear protection.
For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than the
maximum pressure, a Ford dealer or other tire service professional
should do the mounting.
Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the person
inflating standing at a minimum of 12 feet (3.66 meters) away from the
tire wheel assembly.
Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and
handling capability.
Important: Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road
tires are replaced on your vehicle.
The two front tires or two rear tires should generally be replaced as a
pair.
The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels (originally installed on
your vehicle) are not designed to be used in aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Ford Motor Company
may affect the operation of your tire pressure monitoring system.
If the tire pressure monitoring system indicator is flashing, the system is
malfunctioning. Your replacement tire might be incompatible with your
tire pressure monitoring system, or some component of the system may
be damaged.
Safety Practices
WARNING:
If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, or sand, do not
rapidly spin the tires. Spinning the tires can tear the tire and cause
an explosion. A tire can explode in as little as three to five seconds.
Wheels and Tires 257
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h).
The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety.
•Observe posted speed limits.
•Avoid fast starts, stops and turns.
•Avoid potholes and objects on the road.
•Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking.
Highway Hazards
No matter how carefully you drive, there is always the possibility that
you may eventually have a flat tire on the highway. Drive slowly to the
closest safe area out of traffic. This may further damage the flat tire, but
your safety is more important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving, or you
suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your
speed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and
inspect the tires for damage. If a tire is under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove the wheel and replace it with your spare tire and
wheel. If you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the
nearest repair facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.
Tire and Wheel Alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your
vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires. If your
vehicle seems to pull to one side when you are driving, the wheels may
be out of alignment. Have an authorized dealer check the wheel
alignment periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid
treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer.
Front-wheel drive vehicles and those with an independent rear
suspension may require alignment of all four wheels.
The tires should also be balanced periodically. An unbalanced tire and
wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear.
258 Wheels and Tires
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Tire Rotation
WARNING: If the tire label shows different tire pressures for the
front and rear tires and the vehicle is equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system, then the settings for the system sensors
need to be updated. Always perform the system reset procedure after
tire rotation. If the system is not reset, it may not provide a low tire
pressure warning when necessary. See the TPMS reset procedure in
this chapter.
Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask an authorized dealer to check
for and correct any wheel misalignment, tire imbalance or mechanical
problem involved before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire and
wheel assembly. A dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly is defined as
a spare tire or wheel that is different in brand, size or appearance from
the road tires and wheels. If you have a dissimilar spare tire and wheel
assembly, it is intended for temporary use only and should not be used
in a tire rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checked
and adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
Rotating your tires at the recommended interval (as indicated in the
scheduled maintenance information) will help your tires wear more
evenly, providing better tire performance and longer tire life.
•Rear-wheel drive
vehicles/Four-wheel drive vehicles
(front tires at top of diagram)
Wheels and Tires 259
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
•Dual rear wheel vehicles – six
tire rotation
If your vehicle is equipped with dual
rear wheels, it is recommended that
the front and rear tires (in pairs) be
rotated only side to side. We do not
recommend splitting up the dual
rear wheels. Rotate them side to
side as a pair. After tire rotation,
inflation pressures must be adjusted
for the tires new positions in
accordance with vehicle
requirements.
Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires.
USING SNOW CHAINS
WARNING: Snow tires must be the same size, load index, speed
rating as those originally provided by Ford. Use of any tire or
wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance
of your vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. Additionally, the use
of non-recommended tires and wheels could cause steering, suspension,
axle, transfer case or power transfer unit failure.
The tires on your vehicle have all-weather treads to provide traction in
rain and snow. However, in some climates, you may need to use snow
tires and chains. If you need to use chains, it is recommended that steel
wheels (of the same size and specifications) be used, as chains may chip
aluminum wheels.
Note: The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle
damage. Do not remove these components from your vehicle when using
snow tires and chains.
260 Wheels and Tires
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains:
•If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle.
•Use only SAE Class S chains.
•Install chains securely, verifying that the chains do not touch any
wiring, brake lines or fuel lines.
•Drive cautiously. If you hear the chains rub or bang against your
vehicle, stop and retighten the chains. If this does not work, remove
the chains to prevent damage to your vehicle.
•Remove the tire chains when they are no longer needed. Do not use
tire chains on dry roads.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
WARNING: The tire pressure monitoring system is NOT a
substitute for manually checking tire pressure. The tire pressure
should be checked periodically (at least monthly) using a tire gauge.
See Inflating Your Tires in this chapter. Failure to properly maintain
your tire pressure could increase the risk of tire failure, loss of control,
vehicle rollover and personal injury.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Wheels and Tires 261
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator
to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as
the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions
may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function properly.
The tire pressure monitoring system complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Changing Tires with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Note: Each road tire is equipped
with a tire pressure sensor located
inside the tire and wheel assembly
cavity. The pressure sensor is
attached to the valve stem. The
pressure sensor is covered by the
tire and is not visible unless the tire
is removed. Take care when
changing the tire to avoid damaging
the sensor.
You should always have your tires serviced by an authorized dealer.
Check the tire pressure periodically (at least monthly) using an accurate
tire gauge. See Inflating Your Tires in this chapter.
262 Wheels and Tires
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System
The tire pressure monitoring system measures pressure in your four road
tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle. The low tire
pressure warning light will turn on if the tire pressure is significantly low.
Once the light is illuminated, your tires are under-inflated and need to be
inflated to the manufacturer’s recommended tire pressure. Even if the
light turns on and a short time later turns off, your tire pressure still
needs to be checked.
When your temporary spare tire is installed
When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the temporary
spare, the tire pressure monitoring system will continue to identify an
issue to remind you that the damaged road wheel or tire needs to be
repaired and put back on your vehicle.
To restore the full function of the tire pressure monitoring system, have
the damaged road wheel and tire assembly repaired and remounted on
your vehicle. For additional information, see Changing Tires with a
Tire Pressure Monitoring System in this section.
Wheels and Tires 263
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
When you believe your system is not operating properly
The main function of the tire pressure monitoring system is to warn you
when your tires need air. It can also warn you in the event the system is
no longer capable of functioning as intended. See the following chart for
information concerning your tire pressure monitoring system:
Low tire
pressure
warning light
Possible
cause
Customer action required
Solid warning light Tire(s)
under-inflated
1. Make sure tires are at the
proper pressure. See Inflating
your tires in this chapter.
2. After inflating your tires to the
manufacturer’s recommended
pressure as shown on the Tire
Label (located on the edge of
driver’s door or the B-Pillar), the
vehicle must be driven for at least
two minutes over 20 mph
(32 km/h) before the light turns
off.
Spare tire in
use
Repair the damaged road wheel
and tire asssembly and reinstall it
on the vehicle to restore system
function. For a description on how
the system functions, see When
your temporary spare tire is
installed in this section.
TPMS
malfunction
If the tires are properly inflated
and the spare tire is not in use but
the light remains on, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Tire rotation
without sensor
training
On vehicles with different front
and rear tire pressures, the tire
pressure monitoring system must
be retrained following every tire
rotation. See Tire rotation in this
chapter.
264 Wheels and Tires
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Low tire
pressure
warning light
Possible
cause
Customer action required
Flashing warning
light
Spare tire in
use
Repair the damaged road wheel
and tire assembly and reinstall it
on the vehicle to restore system
function. For a description on how
the system functions, see When
your temporary spare tire is
installed in this section.
TPMS
malfunction
If the tires are properly inflated
and the spare tire is not in use but
the light remains on, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
When inflating your tires
When putting air into your tires (such as at a gas station or in your
garage), the tire pressure monitoring system may not respond
immediately to the air added to your tires.
It may take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the
light to turn off after you have filled your tires to the recommended
inflation pressure.
How temperature affects your tire pressure
The tire pressure monitoring system monitors tire pressure in each
pneumatic tire. While driving in a normal manner, a typical passenger
tire inflation pressure may increase approximately 2 to 4 psi (14 to
28 kPa) from a cold start situation. If the vehicle is stationary overnight
with the outside temperature significantly lower than the daytime
temperature, the tire pressure may decrease approximately 3 psi
(21 kPa) for a drop of 30°F (17°C) in ambient temperature. This lower
pressure value may be detected by the system as being significantly
lower than the recommended inflation pressure and activate the system
warning light for low tire pressure. If the low tire pressure warning light
is on, visually check each tire to verify that no tire is flat. If one or more
tires are flat, repair as necessary. Check air pressure in the road tires. If
any tire is under-inflated, carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest
location where air can be added to the tires. Inflate all the tires to the
recommended inflation pressure.
Wheels and Tires 265
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Reset Procedure
WARNING: To determine the required pressure(s) for your
vehicle, see the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to
either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the driver’s seating position), or Tire
Label located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. See the
Load Carrying chapter for more information.
Note: The system reset procedure needs to be performed after each tire
rotation on vehicles that require different recommended tire pressures in
the front tires as compared to the rear tires.
Overview
To provide the vehicle’s load carrying capability, some vehicles require
different recommended tire pressures in the front tires as compared to
the rear tires. The tire pressure monitoring system equipped on these
vehicles is designed to illuminate the low tire pressure warning light at
two different pressures; one for the front tires and one for the rear tires.
Since tires need to be rotated to provide consistent performance and
maximum tire life, the tire pressure monitoring system needs to know
when the tires are rotated to determine which set of tires are on the
front and which are on the rear. With this information, the system can
detect and properly warn of low tire pressures.
System reset tips:
•To reduce the chances of interference from another vehicle, the
system reset procedure should be performed at least three feet (one
meter) away from another Ford Motor Company vehicle undergoing
the system reset procedure at the same time.
•Do not wait more than two minutes between resetting each tire sensor
or the system will time-out and the entire procedure will have to be
repeated on all four wheels.
•A double horn chirp indicates the need to repeat the procedure.
266 Wheels and Tires
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Performing the System Reset Procedure
It is recommended that you read the entire procedure before attempting.
1. Drive the vehicle above 20 mph (32 km/h) for at least two minutes
and then park in a safe location where you can easily get to all four tires
and have access to an air pump.
2. Place the ignition in the off position and keep the key in the ignition.
3. Cycle the ignition to the on position with the engine off.
4. Turn the hazard flashers on then off three times. This must be
accomplished within 10 seconds.
If the reset mode has been entered successfully, the horn will sound
once, the system indicator will flash and the message center (if
equipped) will display TRAIN LEFT FRONT TIRE. If this does not
occur, please try again starting at Step 2.
If after repeated attempts to enter the reset mode, the horn does not
sound, the system indicator does not flash and the message center (if
equipped) does not display TRAIN LEFT FRONT TIRE, seek service
from your authorized dealer.
5. Train the tire pressure monitoring system sensors in the tires using
the following system reset sequence starting with the left front tire in
the following clockwise order:
•Left front (Driver’s side front tire)
•Right front (Passenger’s side front tire)
•Right rear (Passenger’s side rear tire)
•Left rear (Driver’s side rear tire)
6. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the left front tire;
decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds.
Note: The single horn chirp confirms that the sensor identification code
has been learned by the module for this position. If a double horn is
heard, the reset procedure was unsuccessful, and must be repeated.
7. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the right front tire;
decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds.
8. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the right rear tire;
decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds.
9. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the left rear tire;
decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds.
Wheels and Tires 267
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Training is complete after the horn sounds for the last tire trained
(driver’s side rear tire), the system indicator stops flashing, and the
message center (if equipped) displays:
TRAINING COMPLETE.
10. Turn the ignition off. If two short horn beeps are heard, the reset
procedure was unsuccessful and must be repeated.
If after repeating the procedure and two short beeps are heard when the
ignition is turned to off, seek assistance from your authorized dealer.
11. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure as indicated on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label.
Full-size matching spare tire and wheel information
This spare tire and wheel will match the road tire and wheel. When
driving with the full size matching spare tire and wheel, do not exceed
70 mph (113 km/h). It is intended for temporary use only. This means if
you need to use it, you should replace it as soon as possible.
CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL
WARNING: The use of tire sealants may damage your tire
pressure monitoring system and should not be used. However, if
you must use a sealant, have an authorized dealer install a new tire
pressure monitoring system sensor and valve stem.
WARNING: See Tire Pressure Monitoring System in this
chapter for important information. If the tire pressure monitoring
sensor becomes damaged, it will no longer function.
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system indicator light will illuminate
when the spare tire is in use. To restore the full function of the
monitoring system, all road wheels equipped with tire pressure
monitoring sensors must be mounted on this vehicle.
If you get a flat tire while driving, do not apply the brake heavily.
Instead, gradually decrease your speed. Hold the steering wheel firmly
and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road.
Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer in order to prevent damage
to the system sensors. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System earlier in
this chapter. Replace the spare tire with a road tire as soon as possible.
During repairing or replacing of the flat tire, have the authorized dealer
inspect the tire pressure monitoring system sensor for damage.
268 Wheels and Tires
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Dissimilar Spare Tire and Wheel Assembly Information
WARNING: Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an
increased risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
If you have a dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly, then it is intended
for temporary use only. This means that if you need to use it, you should
replace it as soon as possible with a road tire and wheel assembly that is
the same size and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally
provided by Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged, it
should be replaced rather than repaired.
A dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly is defined as a spare tire or
wheel that is different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires
and wheels and can be one of three types:
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire begins with the letter T for tire
size and may have Temporary Use Only molded in the sidewall.
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label on wheel: This spare tire has
a label on the wheel that states: THIS TIRE AND WHEEL FOR
TEMPORARY USE ONLY
When driving with one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above, do not:
•exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
•load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the
Safety Compliance Label.
•tow a trailer.
•
use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire.
•use more than one dissimilar spare tire at a time.
•use commercial car washing equipment.
•try to repair the dissimilar spare tire.
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above at any one wheel
location can lead to impairment of the following:
•Handling, stability and braking performance
•Comfort and noise
•Ground clearance and parking at curbs
•Winter weather driving capability
•Wet weather driving capability
•All-wheel driving capability
Wheels and Tires 269
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without label on wheel
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly,
do not:
•exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).
•use more than one dissimilar spare tire and wheel at a time.
•use commercial car washing equipment.
•use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire and wheel.
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly can lead
to impairment of the following:
•Handling, stability and braking performance
•Comfort and noise
•Ground clearance and parking at curbs
•Winter weather driving capability
•Wet weather driving capability
•All-wheel driving capability (if applicable)
•Load leveling adjustment (if applicable)
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly,
additional caution should be given to:
•towing a trailer.
•driving vehicles equipped with a camper body.
•driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack.
Drive cautiously when using a full-size dissimilar spare tire and wheel,
and seek service as soon as possible.
Tire Change Procedure
WARNING: When one of the front wheels is off the ground, the
transmission alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or
slipping off the jack, even if the transmission selector lever is in
position P.
WARNING: To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you
change a tire, be sure to place the transmission selector lever in
position P, set the parking brake and block (in both directions) the
wheel that is diagonally opposite (other side and end of the vehicle) to
the tire being changed.
270 Wheels and Tires
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
WARNING: Never get underneath a vehicle that is supported
only by a jack. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone
else could be seriously injured.
WARNING: Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to
avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the
wheel.
WARNING: Always use the jack provided as original equipment
with your vehicle. If using a jack other than the one provided as
original equipment with your vehicle, make sure the jack capacity is
adequate for the vehicle weight, including any vehicle cargo or
modifications.
WARNING: Never use wheels or lug nuts different than the
original equipment as this could damage the wheel or mounting
system. This damage could allow the wheels to come off while the
vehicle is being driven.
Note: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is
being jacked.
Spare Tire Information
The spare tire for your vehicle is stowed under the rear of your vehicle
(except cutaway and stripped chassis models).
Park on a level surface, activate the warning flashers, and place the
transmission selector lever in position P. Then, apply the parking brake
and turn the engine off.
Wheels and Tires 271
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
To remove the spare tire:
1. Open the rear doors and remove
the thumb screw and anti-theft
bracket. If finger pressure will not
remove the thumb screw, use the
lug wrench to loosen the screw.
2. Remove the access plug under
the left door.
3. Remove the jack handle from the
right side compartment and insert the
tip of the jack handle through the
access hole and into the tube.
4. Turn the jack handle
counterclockwise until the cable is
slack and the tire can be slid from
under the vehicle.
5. Remove the retainer from the spare tire.
To stow the cable retainer with the spare removed, turn the jack handle
clockwise until all slack is removed.
6. Block the wheel that is diagonally opposite the tire you are changing.
On E-450 vehicles, the parking brake is on the transmission. Therefore,
the vehicle will not be prevented from moving when a rear wheel is
lifted, even if the parking brake is applied. Be sure to block both
directions of the wheel that is diagonally opposite to the wheel that is
being lifted.
7. Remove the spare tire and jack from the storage location.
272 Wheels and Tires
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
•The jack is located in the rear
right-hand side of the cargo area.
8. Remove any wheel trim. Insert the tapered end of the lug nut wrench
behind wheel covers or hubcaps and twist off.
9. Loosen the wheel nut by pulling up on the handle of the lug nut
wrench about one-half turn (counterclockwise). Do not remove the
wheel lug nuts until you raise the tire off the ground.
Replacing the Tire
1. Assemble the jack handle sections together and lock into the jack. Use
the jack handle to slide the jack under the vehicle.
2. Position the jack to raise the front or rear wheel.
Note: Jack at the specified locations to avoid damage to the vehicle.
Wheels and Tires 273
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Rear axle jacking points - All
models except E-350 dual rear
wheel and E-450
Rear axle jacking points - E-350
dual rear wheel and E-450
Front axle jacking points:
Note: Do not place the jack under
or on the steering linkage.
Place the jack under the pin on the
front surface of the front axle.
3. Raise the jack until the wheel is
completely off the ground. Turn the
jack handle clockwise if your vehicle
is equipped with a screw-type jack
or pump the jack if equipped with a
hydraulic jack.
4. Remove the lug nuts with the lug nut wrench.
5. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire.
If your vehicle has single rear wheels, thread the lug nuts on the studs
with the beveled face toward the wheel.
If your vehicle has dual rear wheels, thread the two element swiveling
lug nuts on the studs with the flange facing toward the wheel.
6. Use the lug nut wrench to screw the lug nut snugly against the wheel.
7. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
274 Wheels and Tires
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
8. Remove the jack and fully tighten
the lug nuts in the following
pattern. See Wheel Lug Nut Torque
Specifications in this chapter for
the proper lug nut torque
specification.
9. Install any wheel covers,
ornaments or hub caps. Make sure
they are snapped in place.
10. Stow the jack, handle and lug
wrench.
11. Unblock the wheels.
Stowing the Flat or Spare Tire
Note: Failure to follow spare tire stowage instructions may result in
failure of cable or loss of spare tire.
1. Lay the tire on the ground with the valve stem facing in the direction
specified on the Tire Changing Instructions located with the jack
hardware.
2. Slide the wheel partially under the vehicle and install the retainer
through the wheel center. Pull on the cable to align the components at
the end of the cable.
3. Turn the jack handle clockwise until the tire is raised to its stowed
position underneath the vehicle. The effort to turn the jack handle
increases significantly and the spare tire carrier ratchets or slips when
the tire is raised to the maximum tightness. Tighten to the best of your
ability, to the point where the ratchet/slip occurs, if possible. The spare
tire carrier will not allow you to overtighten. If the spare tire carrier
ratchets or slips with little effort, take the vehicle to your authorized
dealer for assistance at your earliest convenience.
4. Check that the tire lies flat against the frame and is properly
tightened. Try to push or pull, then turn the tire to be sure it will not
move. Loosen and retighten, if necessary. Failure to properly stow the
spare tire may result in failure of the winch cable and loss of the tire.
5. Repeat this tightness check procedure when servicing the spare tire
pressure (every six months, as per your scheduled maintenance
information), or at any time that the spare tire is disturbed through
service of other components.
6. If removed, install the spare tire lock into the bumper drive tube with
the spare tire lock key and jack handle.
1
7
3
5
6
4
8
2
Wheels and Tires 275
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications
WARNING: When a wheel is installed, always remove any
corrosion, dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting
surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or
brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure that any fasteners that
attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with
the mounting surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct
metal-to-metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the
wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in
motion, resulting in loss of control.
On vehicles equipped with single rear wheels, retighten the lug nuts to
the specified torque at 100 miles (160 kilometers) after any wheel
disturbance (such as tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal).
On vehicles equipped with dual rear wheels, retighten the wheel lug nuts
to the specified torque at 100 miles (160 kilometers), and again at
500 miles (800 kilometers) of new vehicle operation and after any wheel
disturbance (such as tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal).
Bolt size and wheel
lug nut type
Wheel lug nut torque*
ft-lb N•m
9/16 x 18 conical lug
nut
150 200
9/16 x 18 two-piece
lug nut
140 190
* Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and
rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners.
276 Wheels and Tires
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
On all two-piece flat wheel nuts, apply one drop of motor oil between the
flat washer and the nut. Do not apply motor oil to the wheel nut threads
or the wheel stud threads.
Note: Inspect the wheel pilot hole
and mounting surface prior to
installation. Remove any visible
corrosion or loose particles.
Wheels and Tires 277
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
Engine 4.6L V8 engine 5.4L V8 engine 6.8L V10 engine
Cubic inches 281 330 415
Required fuel
Minimum
87 octane or
E85
1
Minimum
87 octane or
E85
1
Minimum
87 octane
Firing order 1-3-7-2-6-5-4-8 1-3-7-2-6-5-4-8 1-6-5-10-2-7-3-8-4-9
Ignition
system Coilonplug Coilonplug Coilonplug
Spark plug
gap
0.041–0.047 inch
(1.04–1.20 mm)
0.051–0.057 inch
(1.29–1.45 mm)
0.052–0.056 inch
(1.32–1.42 mm)
Compression
ratio 9.38:1 9.0:1 9.0:1
1
4.6L V8 and 5.4L V8 FFV engines only.
Engine Drivebelt Routing
•4.6L V8, 5.4L V8 and 6.8L V10 engines without A/C
278 Capacities and Specifications
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
•4.6L V8, 5.4L V8 and 6.8L V10 engines with A/C
Capacities and Specifications 279
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Item Capacity Ford part name or
equivalent
Ford part number / Ford
specification
Brake fluid
Between MIN
and MAX on
reservoir
Motorcraft® High
Performance DOT 4 LV
Motor Vehicle Brake
Fluid
PM-20 / WSS-M6C65-A2 and
ISO4925 Class 6
Door weatherstrips — Silicone Spray
Lubricant
XL-6 /
ESR-M13P4-A
Hinges, latches, striker plates and
rotors, seat tracks, fuel filler door
hinge and spring
—Multi-Purpose Grease
(Lithium grease)
XL-5 or equivalent /
ESB-M1C93-B
Lock cylinders — Motorcraft Penetrating
and Lock Lubricant
Motorcraft XL-5 (aerosol)
and/or CRCSL3151ESB /
ESB-M1C93-B
Engine coolant
(4.6L engine)
1
23.8 quarts
(22.6L)
Motorcraft Premium
Gold Engine Coolant
(yellow-colored)
VC-7-B (US)
CVC-7-B (Canada) /
WSS-M97B51-A1
Engine coolant
(4.6L engine with aux rear heat)
1
26.0 quarts
(24.6L)
Engine coolant
(5.4L engine)
1
28.8 quarts
(27.2L)
Engine coolant
(5.4L engine with aux rear heat)
1
30.8 quarts
(29.1L)
Engine coolant
(6.8L engine)
1
30.4 quarts
(28.8L)
Engine coolant
(6.8L engine with aux rear heat)
1
32.6 quarts
(30.8L)
280 Capacities and Specifications
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Item Capacity Ford part name or
equivalent
Ford part number / Ford
specification
Engine oil
2
6.0 quarts (5.7L) Motorcraft SAE 5W-20
Motor Oil
XO-5W20-QSP or
XO-5W20-QFS (U.S.);
CXO-5W20-LSP12 or
CXO-5W20-LFS12 (Canada)
/
WSS-M2C945-A with API
Certification Mark
Power steering fluid
Between
MIN/MAX on
reservoir
Motorcraft
MERCON™ V ATF
XT-10-QLV (US);
CXT-10-LV12 (Canada)
Automatic transmission fluid
(4R75E)
3,4
13.9 quarts
(13.1L)
Motorcraft
MERCON LV ATF
XT-10-QLV (US);
CXT-10-LV12 (Canada)
Automatic transmission fluid
TorqShift (5–speed)
3,4
18.8 quarts
(17.7L)
Motorcraft
MERCON LV ATF
XT-10-QLV /
MERCON® LV
Limited Slip axle fluid
M60 (M248)
E-350 with 4.10 axle ratio
5,6,7
5.9 pints (2.8L)
Motorcraft® SAE
Synthetic Rear Axle
Lubricant
XY-75W140-QL /
WSL-M2C192-A
Dana Limited Slip Axle fluid
M60 (M248)
E–250/E–350
5,7
5.9 pints (2.8L)
Motorcraft® SAE
75W-90 Synthetic Rear
Axle Lubricant
XY-75W90-QLS (US);
CXY-75W90-LS12 (Canada)
/
GL-5
Dana Limited Slip Axle fluid
M70FF (M267FF)
E-350
7
6.6 pints (3.1L)
Dana Limited Slip Axle fluid
M70HD (M273HD)
E-450
7
9.0 pints (4.3L)
Dana conventional axle fluid
M60 (M248) E-350 with 4.10 axle
ratio
5,6,7
6.2 pints (2.9L) SAE 75W-140 Synthetic
Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-75W140-QL /
WSL-M2C192-A
Capacities and Specifications 281
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Item Capacity Ford part name or
equivalent
Ford part number / Ford
specification
Dana conventional axle fluid
M60 (M248)
E-150/E-350
7
6.2 pints (2.9 L)
SAE 80W-90 Premium
Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL /
WSP-M2C197-A
Dana conventional axle fluid
M70FF (M267FF)
E-350
7
6.6 pints (3.1L)
Dana conventional axle fluid
M70HD (M273HD)
E-450
7
9.0 pints (4.3 L)
Windshield washer fluid Fill as required
Motorcraft Premium
Windshield Washer
Concentrates (US)
Premium Quality
Windshield Washer
Fluid (Canada)
ZC-32-B1 (US);
CXC-37-(A, B, D, and F)
(Canada) /
WSB-M8B16-A2/- -
Fuel tank–all regular and
extended length vans and wagons
33.0 gallons
(124.9 L)
Not Applicable Not Applicable
Fuel tank–138 inch wheelbase
(except E-Super Duty)
40.0 gallons
(151.0L)
Fuel tank–158 inch wheelbase
(except E-Super Duty)
8
40.0 gallons
(151.0L)
Fuel tank–176 inch wheelbase
(except E-Super Duty)
8
40.0 gallons
(151.0L)
Fuel tank–158 inch and 176 inch
wheelbase (E-Super Duty)
55.0 gallons
(208.0L)
282 Capacities and Specifications
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Item Capacity Ford part name or
equivalent
Ford part number / Ford
specification
A/C Refrigerant
9
Without auxiliary
A/C: 1.87 pounds
(0.517kg). With
auxiliary A/C:
3.37 pounds
(1.53kg)
Motorcraft R–134a
Refrigerant
YN-19 (US),
CYN-16–R (Canada)
WSH-M17B19–A
A/C Refrigerant Compressor Oil
9
Without auxiliary
A/C: 8 ounces
(236.6ml), With
auxiliary A/C:
10 ounces
(295.7ml)
Motorcraft PAG
Refrigerant Compressor
Oil
YN-12–D
WSH-M1C231–B
1
Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle.
2
Your engine has been designed to use Motorcraft engine oils or equivalent oils that meet Ford
specifications. It is also acceptable to use an engine oil of recommended viscosity grade that meets
API SN requirements and displays the API Certification Mark for gasoline engines.
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives in your engine. They are unnecessary and could lead
to engine damage that is not covered by your Ford warranty.
3
Indicates only approximate dry-fill capacity. Some applications may vary based on cooler size, if
equipped with an in-tank cooler, if equipped with an oil to air cooler and if equipped with a remote
filter assembly. The amount of transmission fluid and fluid level should be set by the indication on
the dipstick’s normal operating range.
4
Automatic transmissions that require MERCON LV should only use MERCON LV fluid. Refer to
scheduled maintenance information to determine the correct service interval. Use of any fluid
other than the recommended fluid may cause transmission damage.
5
Dana limited-slip axle (M60) requires 6 fl oz. (177 ml) of Additive Friction Modifier XL-3 or
equivalent meeting Ford specification EST-M2C118-A.
Capacities and Specifications 283
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
6
If your vehicle’s rear axle is filled with a synthetic rear axle lubricant it is considered lubricated
for life. These lubricants do not need to be checked or changed unless a leak is suspected, service
is required or the axle assembly has been submerged in water. The axle lubricant should be
changed any time the rear axle has been submerged in water.
7
Fill Dana rear axles to 1/4 inch to 9/16 inch (6 mm to 14 mm) below bottom of fill hole.
8
Optional fuel tank 55.0 gallons (208.0L).
9
Warning: The A/C refrigerant system contains refrigerant R–134a under high pressure. Opening
the A/C refrigerant system can cause personal injury. A/C refrigerant system is to be serviced only
by qualified personnel.
284 Capacities and Specifications
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
MOTORCRAFT® PART NUMBERS
Component 4.6L V8 engine 5.4L V8 engine 6.8L V10
engine
Air filter element FA-1632 FA-1632 FA-1632
Battery-
standard /
(auxiliary)
BXT-65-650 /
(BXT-65-750)
BXT-65-650 /
(BXT-65-750)
BXT-65-650 /
(BXT-65-750)
Oil filter FL-820-S FL-820-S FL-820-S
Spark plugs
1
Torqshift
automatic
transmission
internal
bottom–pan filter
— FT-180 FT-180
1
For spark plug replacement, see your authorized dealer. Refer to
scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for
changing the spark plugs.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The vehicle identification number is
located on the driver’s side
instrument panel.
Please note that in the graphic,
XXXX is representative of your
vehicle identification number.
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Capacities and Specifications 285
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) contains the following
information:
A. World manufacturer identifier
B. Brake system / Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) / Restraint
Devices and their location
C. Make, vehicle line, series, body
type
D. Engine type
E. Check digit
F. Model year
G. Assembly plant
H. Production sequence number.
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require
that a Safety Compliance
Certification Label be affixed to a
vehicle and prescribe where the
Safety Compliance Certification Label
may be located. The Safety
Compliance Certification Label shall
be affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, the door latch post, or the
edge of the door near the door latch,
next to the driver’s seating position.
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL
On completed derivations of incomplete vehicles, the certification label is
affixed at a location determined by a subsequent stage manufacturer of
the completed vehicle. In these cases the completed vehicle is
manufactured in two or more stages by two or more separate
manufacturers.
286 Capacities and Specifications
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
TRANSMISSION CODE DESIGNATION
You can find a transmission code on
the Safety Compliance Certification
Label. The following table tells you
which transmission each code
represents.
Description Code
Five-speed automatic (5R110W) T
Four-speed automatic (4R75E) Q
Capacities and Specifications 287
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
ACCESSORIES
For a complete listing of the accessories that are available for your
vehicle, please contact your authorized dealer or visit our online store at:
Accessories.Ford.com (U.S. only).
Ford Custom Accessories are available for your vehicle through your
authorized Ford or Ford of Canada dealer. Ford Motor Company will
repair or replace any properly authorized dealer-installed Ford Custom
Accessories found to be defective in factory-supplied materials or
workmanship during the warranty period, as well as any component
damaged by the defective accessories. The accessories will be warranted
for whichever provides you the greatest benefit:
•12 months or 12000 miles (20000 kilometers) (whichever occurs first),
or
•the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty.
Contact your authorized dealer for details and a copy of the warranty.
Exterior style
•Hood deflectors •Running boards
•Side-window deflectors •Splash guards
Interior style
•Carpeted floor mats •All-weather floor mats
•Floor mats •Cargo organization
•Interior mirrors with
electrochromic compass and
temperature
•Seat covers
Lifestyle
•Trailer hitches and towing
accessories
288 Accessories
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Peace of mind
•Keyless entry keypad •Back up alarm*
•Remote start •Hitch mounted parking sensor*
•Vehicle security systems
•Bumper mounted parking sensors*
*Ford Licensed Accessories (FLA) are warranted by the accessory
manufacturer’s warranty. Ford Licensed Accessories are fully designed
and developed by the accessory manufacturer and have not been
designed or tested to Ford Motor Company engineering requirements.
Contact your authorized Ford dealer for details regarding the
manufacturer’s limited warranty and/or a copy of the Ford Licensed
Accessories product limited warranty offered by the accessory
manufacturer.
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in
mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle:
•When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of
the front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety
Compliance Certification label). Consult your authorized dealer for
specific weight information.
•The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile
communications systems — such as two-way radios, telephones and
theft alarms — that are equipped with radio transmitters. Any such
equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulations and should be
installed only by a qualified service technician.
•Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your
vehicle, particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive
use.
•To avoid interference with other vehicle functions, such as anti-lock
braking systems, amateur radio users who install radios and antennas
onto their vehicle should not locate the amateur radio antennas in the
area of the driver’s side hood.
•Any non-Ford custom electrical or electronic accessories or
components that are added to the vehicle by the authorized dealer or
the owner may adversely affect battery performance and durability,
and may also adversely affect the performance of other electrical
systems in the vehicle.
Accessories 289
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
AUXILIARY SWITCHES (IF EQUIPPED)
The upfitter option package
provides four switches, mounted in
the center of the instrument panel.
These switches will only operate
while the ignition is in the on
position, whether the engine is
running or not. However, it is
recommended that the engine
remain running to maintain battery
charge when using the upfitter
switches for extended duration or
higher current draws.
When switched on, they provide 10 amps, 15 amps or 30 amps of
electrical battery power for a variety of personal or commercial uses.
A fuse and relay kit will also be included with this option. This kit
contains the required fuses and relays that need to be installed into the
power distribution box located under the hood. Refer to the instruction
sketch included in the kit. See your authorized dealer for service.
There will also be one power lead for each switch found as a blunt-cut
and sealed wire located in the underhood cowl shield above the engine
block powertrain control module.
They are coded as follows:
Switch Circuit
Number Wire Color Fuse Amp
Rating
AUX 1 CAC05 Yellow 30A
AUX 2 CAC06 Green with
Brown Trace
30A
AUX 3 CAC07 Violet with
Green Trace
10A
AUX 4 CAC08 Brown 15A
More detailed information about upfitter switches can be found at
https://www.fleet.ford.com/truckbbas/.
AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4
290 Accessories
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
FORD ESP EXTENDED SERVICE PLANS
PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISING COST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS
WITH A FORD EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN.
SERVICE PLANS (U.S. only)
More than 32 Million Ford and Lincoln owners have discovered the
powerful protection Ford ESP. It is the only extended service plan
backed by Ford Motor Company, and provides peace of mind protection
beyond the expiration of the New Vehicle Warranty coverage.
Ford ESP can quickly pay for itself
One service bill – the cost of parts and labor – can easily exceed the
price of your Ford Extended Service Plan. With Ford ESP, you minimize
your risk for unexpected repair bills and rising repair costs.
Coverage for up to 500+ covered components
There are four, Extended Service Plans with different levels of coverage.
Ask your dealer for details.
1. PremiumCARE – Our most comprehensive coverage. With over 500
covered components, this plan is so complete that we generally only
discuss what’s not covered.
2. ExtraCARE – Covers 113 components, and includes many high tech
items
3. BaseCARE – Covers 84 components
4. PowertrainCARE – Covers 29 critical components
Ford ESP is honored by all Ford and Lincoln Dealers in the United
States and Canada. It is the only Extended Service Plan authorized and
backed by Ford Motor Company. That means you get:
•Reliable, quality service anywhere you go
•Repairs performed by factory trained technicians, using Genuine Ford
and Lincoln parts
Rental Car Reimbursement
1st day Rental Benefit – You take advantage of replacement
transportation if your vehicle is at the dealership for same day covered
repairs.
Extended Rental Benefits – If your vehicle is kept overnight for
covered repairs, you are eligible for rental car coverage, including
Bumper to Bumper warranty repairs, or Field Service Actions.
Ford Extended Service Plan 291
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Roadside Assistance
Exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance, including:
•Towing, flat-tire change and battery jump starts
•Out of fuel and lock-out assistance
•Travel Expense reimbursement for lodging, meals and rental car
•Destination assistance for taxi, shuttle, rental car coverage and
emergency transportation
Transferable Coverage
If you sell your vehicle before your Ford Extended Service Plan coverage
expires, you can transfer any remaining coverage to the new owner.
Whenever you sell your vehicle, prospective buyers may have a higher
degree of confidence that vehicle was properly maintained with Ford
ESP, thereby improving resale value!
Avoid the Rising cost of vehicle maintenance
Ford ESP also offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that covers all
scheduled maintenance, and select items that routinely wear out.
The coverage is prepaid, so you never have to worry about affording
vehicle maintenance. It covers regular checkups, routine inspections,
preventative care and replacement items that require periodic attention
for normal wear:
•Windshield Wiper Blades
•Spark Plugs (except in California)
•The clutch Disc
•Brake pads and linings
•Shock Absorbers
•Belts and Hoses
•Diesel Exhaust Fluid Replenishment
Contact your selling dealership today so they can customize a Genuine
Ford Extended Service Plan that fits your driving lifestyle and budget.
292 Ford Extended Service Plan
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Interest Free Financing Options Available
Take advantage of our interest free installment payment plan. Just a 10%
down payment will provide you with an affordable, no interest, no fee
payment program.
Complete the information below and mail to:
Ford ESP
PO Box 8072
Royal Oak Michigan 48068-0039
To learn more, call our Ford ESP specialists at 800-367-3377. Don’t
forget to ask about our interest free payment program, allowing you all
the security and benefits Ford ESP has to offer while paying over time.
You are pre-approved with no credit checks, no hassles!
SERVICE PLANS (CANADA ONLY)
You can get more protection for your vehicle by purchasing a Ford
Extended Service Plan. Ford Extended Service Plan is the only service
contract backed by Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited. Depending
on the plan you purchase, Ford Extended Service Plan provides benefits
such as:
•Rental reimbursement
•Coverage for certain maintenance and wear items
•Protection against repair costs after your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty Coverage expires
•Roadside Assistance benefits
There are several Ford Extended Service Plans available in various time,
distance and deductible combinations. Each plan is tailored to fit your
own driving needs, including reimbursement for towing and rental.
When you purchase Ford Extended Service Plan, you receive added
peace-of-mind protection throughout Canada and the United States,
provided by a network of participating Ford Motor Company dealers. The
Lincoln Maintenance Protection Plan is honored at authorized Lincoln
dealers.
Note: Repairs performed outside of Canada and the United States are
not eligible for Ford Extended Service Plan coverage.
This information is subject to change.
For more information, visit your local Ford of Canada dealer or
www.ford.ca to find the Ford Extended Service Plan that is right for you.
Ford Extended Service Plan 293
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Radio Frequencies and Reception Factors
AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC). Those frequencies are:
AM: 530, 540–1700, 1710 kHz
FM: 87.9–107.7, 107.9 MHz
Radio reception factors
Distance and
strength
The further you travel from an FM station,
the weaker the signal and the weaker the
reception.
Terrain Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges,
tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages,
dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can
interfere with the reception.
Station overload When you pass a ground-based broadcast
repeating tower, a stronger signal may
overtake a weaker one and result in the audio
system muting.
CD and CD Player Information
Note: CD units play commercially pressed 4.75-inch (12 centimeter)
audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility, certain
recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not function correctly
when used in Ford CD players.
Note: Do not insert CDs with homemade paper (adhesive) labels into
the CD player as the label may peel and cause the CD to become
jammed. You should use a permanent felt tip marker rather than
adhesive labels on your homemade CDs. Ballpoint pens may damage
CDs. Please contact your authorized dealer for further information.
Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped discs or discs with a scratch
protection film attached.
Always handle discs by their edges only. Clean the disc with an approved
CD cleaner only. Wipe it from the center of the disc toward the edge. Do
not clean in a circular motion.
Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended
periods.
294 Audio System
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
MP3 Track and Folder Structure
Audio systems capable of recognizing and playing MP3 individual tracks
and folder structures work as follows:
•There are two different modes for MP3 disc playback: MP3 track
mode (system default) and MP3 folder mode.
•MP3 track mode ignores any folder structure on the MP3 disc. The
player numbers each MP3 track on the disc (noted by the .mp3 file
extension) from T001 to a maximum of T255. Note: The maximum
number of playable MP3 files may be less depending on the structure
of the CD and exact model of radio present.
•MP3 folder mode represents a folder structure consisting of one level
of folders. The CD player numbers all MP3 tracks on the disc (noted
by the .mp3 file extension) and all folders containing MP3 files, from
F001 (folder) T001 (track) to F253 T255.
•Creating discs with only one level of folders helps with navigation
through the disc files.
If you are burning your own MP3 discs, it is important to understand
how the system reads the structures you create. While various files may
be present, (files with extensions other than mp3), only files with the
.mp3 extension are played; other files are ignored by the system. This
enables you to use the same MP3 disc for a variety of tasks on your work
computer, home computer and your in-vehicle system.
In track mode, the system displays and plays the structure as if it were
only one level deep (all .mp3 files play, regardless of being in a specific
folder). In folder mode, the system only plays the .mp3 files in the
current folder.
Audio System 295
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
AM/FM
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off
the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your
vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while
driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the
use of electronic devices while driving.
A. CLK: Press this button to switch the display between the clock and
radio frequency. To set the time:
1. Press and hold CLK until the hours start to flash.
2. Press the arrow buttons to adjust the hours. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to
set the minutes.
3. Press CLK again to exit clock mode.
B. Tune: Press these arrow buttons to manually search through the radio
frequency band. Press and hold for a fast search. In AUDIO mode, press
the buttons to adjust different sound settings.
C. AUDIO: Press this button to access settings for Treble, Middle, Bass,
Fade and Balance.
D. SEEK: Press this button to go to the previous or next strong station
on the frequency band.
CLK
AUDIO C
E
G
F
B
A
D
296 Audio System
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
E. Memory presets: Store your favorite radio stations. To store a radio
station, tune to the station, then press and hold a preset button until
sound returns.
F. AM/FM: Press this button to select a frequency band and access
media through the auxiliary input jack.
G. VOL-PUSH:
•Press this button to switch the system off and on.
•Turn the control to adjust the volume.
AM/FM/CD WITH SYNC®
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off
the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your
vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while
driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the
use of electronic devices while driving.
A. Eject: Press this button to eject a CD.
B. CD slot: Insert a CD.
C. Tune: Press this button to manually search through the radio
frequency band. Press and hold for a fast search.
Audio System 297
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
D. Phone: Press this button to access the phone features of the SYNC®
system. See the SYNC® chapter for more information.
E. MENU: Press this button to access different audio system features.
•If your vehicle is equipped with satellite radio, you can access
different menus by pressing OK.
•Set the time by pressing MENU until SET HOURS or SET
MINUTES appears and using the arrow buttons to adjust the time.
•Set the strongest stations on the radio frequency by pressing MENU
until AUTOSET appears. AUTOSET does not override your original
presets.
•SPEEDVOL (speed compensated volume) allows you to adjust radio
volume to compensate for noise levels when vehicle speed increases.
•Track/Folder is only available on MP3 files when in CD mode. In
track mode, pressing the SEEK arrows allows you to scroll through
all the tracks on the disc. In folder mode, pressing the SEEK arrows
allows you to scroll through all the tracks within the selected folder.
Press the FOLDER buttons to access other folders.
•COMPRESS (Compression) is only available in CD and MP3 modes.
Switching compression on brings the soft and loud passages together
for a more consistent listening level. Use the SEEK buttons and up
and down arrow buttons to switch it on and off.
F. AUX: Press this button to access the media features of the SYNC®
system. See the SYNC® chapter for more information.
G. SEEK:
•In radio mode, press and release these buttons to go to the next (or
previous) preset radio station or disc track.
•In CD and MP3 modes, press these buttons to select the next (or
previous) track, or press and hold to advance (or reverse) within the
same track.
H. Play, Pause and OK:
•Play and Pause allow you to play or pause a track when listening to a
CD.
•OK allows you to confirm commands with phone and media features
of the SYNC system. See the SYNC® chapter for more information.
I. SHUFFLE: Play music on the selected CD or MP3 folder in random
order.
J. Folder: Press this button to access the next folder on an MP3 disc.
K. Folder: Press this button to access the previous folder on an MP3
disc.
L. FF: Press this button to manually fast forward in a CD track or MP3
file.
298 Audio System
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
M. REW: Press this button to manually rewind in a CD track or MP3 file.
N. Memory presets: Store your favorite radio stations. To store a radio
station, tune to the station, then press and hold a preset button until
sound returns.
O. TEXT/SCAN:
•In radio, CD and MP3 modes, press and hold to hear a brief sampling
of radio stations, CD tracks or MP3 files.
•In CD and MP3 modes, press and release to display track title, artist
name and disc title.
Note: In text mode, sometimes the display requires additional text to
show. When the</>indicatorison,pressTEXT and then use the
SEEK buttons to view the additional display text.
P. AM/FM: Press this button to select a frequency band.
Q. VOL-PUSH:
•Press this button to switch the system off and on.
•Turn it to adjust the volume.
R. CD: Press this button to enter CD or MP3 mode.
SATELLITE RADIO INFORMATION (IF EQUIPPED)
Satellite Radio Channels
Sirius broadcasts a variety of music, news, sports, weather, traffic and
entertainment satellite radio channels. For more information and a
complete list of Sirius satellite radio channels, visit www.siriusxm.com in
the United States, www.sirius.ca in Canada, or call Sirius at
1–888–539–7474.
Note: This receiver includes the eCos real-time operating system. eCos
is published under the eCos License.
Audio System 299
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Satellite Radio Reception Factors
Potential satellite radio reception issues
Antenna
obstructions
For optimal reception performance, keep the
antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and
keep luggage and other material as far away
from the antenna as possible.
Terrain Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges,
tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages,
dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can
interfere with your reception.
Station overload When you pass a ground-based
broadcast-repeating tower, a stronger signal
may overtake a weaker one and the audio
system may mute.
Satellite radio signal
interference
Your display may show ACQUIRING...to
indicate the interference and the audio
system may mute.
Sirius Satellite Radio Service
Note: Sirius reserves the unrestricted right to change, rearrange, add or
delete programming including canceling, moving or adding particular
channels, and its prices, at any time, with or without notice to you. Ford
Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming
changes.
Sirius satellite radio is a
subscription-based satellite radio
service that broadcasts a variety of
music, sports, news, weather, traffic
and entertainment programming.
Your factory-installed Sirius satellite
radio system includes hardware and
a limited subscription term which begins on the date of sale or lease of
your vehicle. See an authorized dealer for availability.
For more information on extended subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a complete list of Sirius satellite
radio channels, and other features, please visit www.siriusxm.com in the
United States, www.sirius.ca in Canada, or call Sirius at 1–888–539–7474.
300 Audio System
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number (ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or track your satellite radio
account. When in satellite radio mode, you can view this number by
pressing SIRIUS and memory preset 1 at the same time. To access your
ESN, press the bottom left corner of the touchscreen, then SIRIUS >
Options.
Troubleshooting
Radio display Condition Possible action
Acquiring Radio requires more
than two seconds to
produce audio for the
selected channel.
No action required.
This message should
disappear shortly.
Sat Fault/SIRIUS
system failure
There is an internal
module or system
failure present.
If this message does
not clear shortly, or
with an ignition key
cycle, your receiver
may have a fault. See
an authorized dealer
for service.
Invalid Channel The channel is no
longer available.
Tune to another
channel or choose
another preset.
Unsubscribed Channel Your subscription does
not include this
channel.
Contact Sirius at
1–888–539–7474 to
subscribe to the
channel, or tune to
another channel.
No Signal The signal is lost from
the Sirius satellite or
Sirius tower to your
vehicle antenna.
The signal is blocked.
When you move into
an open area, the
signal should return.
Updating Update of channel
programming in
progress.
No action required.
The process may take
up to three minutes.
Audio System 301
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Radio display Condition Possible action
Call SIRIUS
1–888–539–7474
Your satellite service is
no longer available.
Call Sirius at
1–888–539–7474 to
resolve subscription
issues.
None Found. Check
Channel Guide.
All the channels in the
selected category are
either skipped or
locked.
Use the channel guide
to turn off the Lock or
Skip function on that
station.
Subscription Updated Sirius has updated the
channels available for
your vehicle.
No action required.
AUXILIARY INPUT JACK
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off
the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your
vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while
driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the
use of electronic devices while driving.
WARNING: For safety reasons, do not connect or adjust the
settings on your portable music player while your vehicle is
moving.
WARNING: Store the portable music player in a secure location,
such as the center console or the glove box, when your vehicle is
moving. Hard objects may become projectiles in a crash or sudden stop,
which may increase the risk of serious injury. The audio extension cable
must be long enough to allow the portable music player to be safely
stored while your vehicle is moving.
302 Audio System
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
The auxiliary input jack allows you
to connect and play music from
your portable music player through
your vehicle speakers. You can use
any portable music player designed
for use with headphones. Your audio
extension cable must have male
1
⁄
8
-inch (3.5 millimeter) connectors
at each end.
1. Switch off the engine, radio and portable music player. Set the
parking brake and put the transmission in position P.
2. Plug the extension cable from the portable music player into the
auxiliary input jack.
3. Switch the radio on. Select either a tuned FM station or a CD.
4. Adjust the volume as desired.
5. Switch your portable music player on and adjust its volume to half its
maximum level.
6. Press AUX until LINE or LINE IN appears in the display. You
should hear music from your device even if it is low.
7. Adjust the volume on your portable music player until it reaches the
volume level of the FM station or CD. Do this by switching back and
forth between the AUX and FM or CD controls.
Audio System 303
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
USB PORT (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off
the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your
vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while
driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the
use of electronic devices while driving.
The USB port allows you to plug in
media playing devices, memory
sticks and charge devices (if
supported). See the SYNC chapter
for more information.
304 Audio System
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
SYNC is an in-vehicle communications system that works with your
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone and portable media player. This allows
you to:
•Make and receive calls.
•Access and play music from your portable music player.
•Use 911 Assist, Vehicle Health Report and SYNC Services (Traffic,
Directions & Information) (if equipped).
•Use applications, such as Pandora and Stitcher, via SYNC AppLink™
(if applicable).
•Access phonebook contacts and music via voice commands.
•Stream music from your connected phone.
•Text message.
•Use the advanced voice recognition system.
•USB device charging (if your device supports this).
SYNC® 305
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Make sure you review your device’s manual before using it with SYNC.
Support
The SYNC support team is available to help you with any questions you
cannot answer on your own.
Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-9:00pm EST.
Sunday, 10:30am-7:30pm EST.
In the United States, call: 1–800–392–3673.
In Canada, call: 1–800–565–3673.
Times are subject to change due to holidays.
SYNC Owner Account
Why do I need a SYNC owner account?
•Required to activate Vehicle Health Report and to view the reports
online.
•Required to activate the subscription-based SYNC Services and to
personalize your Saved Points and Favorites.
•Essential for keeping up with the latest software downloads available
for SYNC.
•Access to customer support for any questions you may have.
Driving Restrictions
For your safety, certain features are speed-dependent and restricted
when your vehicle is traveling over 3 mph (5 km/h).
Safety Information
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off
the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your
vehicle. We recommend against the use of any handheld device while
driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the
use of electronic devices while driving.
306 SYNC®
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
When using SYNC:
•Do not operate playing devices if the power cords or cables are
broken, split or damaged. Place cords and cables out of the way, so
they do not interfere with the operation of pedals, seats,
compartments or safe driving abilities.
•Do not leave playing devices in your vehicle during extreme conditions
as it could cause them damage. See your device’s manual for further
information.
•Do not attempt to service or repair the system. See your authorized
dealer.
For your safety, some SYNC functions are speed-dependent. Their use is
limited to when your vehicle is traveling at speeds under 3 mph (5 km/h).
Make sure that you review your device’s manual before using it with SYNC.
Privacy Information
When a cellular phone is connected to SYNC, the system creates a
profile within your vehicle that is linked to that cellular phone. This
profile is created in order to offer you more cellular features and to
operate more efficiently. Among other things, this profile may contain
data about your cellular phone book, text messages (read and unread),
and call history, including history of calls when your cell phone was not
connected to the system. In addition, if you connect a media device, the
system creates and retains an index of supported media content. The
system also records a short development log of approximately
10 minutes of all recent system activity. The log profile and other system
data may be used to improve the system and help diagnose any problems
that may occur.
The cellular profile, media device index, and development log remain in
the vehicle unless you delete them and are generally accessible only in
the vehicle when the cellular phone or media player is connected. If you
no longer plan to use the system or the vehicle, we recommend you
perform a Master Reset to erase all stored information.
System data cannot be accessed without special equipment and access to
the vehicle’s SYNC module. Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do
not access the system data for any purpose other than as described
absent consent, a court order, or where required by law enforcement,
other government authorities, or other third parties acting with lawful
authority. Other parties may seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada. For further
privacy information, see the sections on 911 Assist, Vehicle Health
Report, and Traffic, Directions and Information.
SYNC® 307
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
USING VOICE RECOGNITION
This system helps you control many features using voice commands. This
allows you to keep your hands on the wheel and focus on what is in
front of you.
Initiating a Voice Session
Push the voice icon; a tone sounds and Listening appears in the
display. Say any of the following:
Say: If you want to:
“Phone” Make calls.
“USB” Access the device connected to your USB
port.
“Bluetooth Audio” Stream audio from your phone.
“Line in” Access the device connected to the auxiliary
input jack.
“Cancel” Cancel the requested action.
“SYNC” Return to the main menu.
“Voice settings” Adjust the level of voice interaction and
feedback.
“Vehicle Health Report” Run a vehicle health report.
*
“Services” Access the SYNC Services portal.
*
“Mobile apps” Access mobile applications.
*
“Help” Hear a list of voice commands available in the
current mode.
*
If equipped, U.S. only.
System Interaction and Feedback
The system provides feedback through audible tones, prompts, questions
and spoken confirmations depending on the situation and the chosen
level of interaction (voice settings). You can customize the voice
recognition system to provide more or less instruction and feedback.
The default setting is to a higher level of interaction in order to help you
learn to use the system. You can change these settings at any time.
308 SYNC®
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Adjusting the Interaction Level
Push the voice icon; when prompted, say “Voice settings”, then
any of the following:
When you say: The system:
“Interaction mode standard” Provides more detailed interaction and
guidance.
“Interaction mode advanced” Provides less audible interaction and
more tone prompts.
The system defaults to the standard interaction mode.
Confirmation prompts are short questions the system asks when it is not
sure of your request or when there are multiple possible responses to
your request. (For example, the system may ask “Phone, is that
correct?”) If turned off, the system simply makes a best guess as to what
you requested and you may still occasionally be asked to confirm
settings.
“Confirmation prompts on”
“Confirmation prompts off”
The system creates candidate lists when it has the same confidence level
of several options based on your voice command. When turned on, you
may be prompted with as many as four possibilities for clarification.
For example, “Say 1 after the tone to call John Doe at home. Say 2 after
the tone to call Johnny Doe on mobile. Say 3 after the tone to call Jane
Doe at home.” Or, “Say 1 after the tone to play John Doe, Say 2 after the
tone to play Johnny Doe.”
“Phone candidate lists on”
“Phone candidate lists off”
“Media candidate lists on”
“Media candidate lists off”
Helpful Hints
•Make sure the interior of the vehicle is as quiet as possible. Wind
noise from open windows and road vibrations may prevent the system
from correctly recognizing spoken commands.
•After pressing the voice icon, wait until after the tone sounds and
Listening appears before saying a command. Any command spoken
prior to this does not register with the system.
SYNC® 309
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
•Speak naturally, without long pauses between words.
•At any time you can interrupt the system while it is speaking by
pressing the voice icon.
USING SYNC WITH YOUR PHONE
Hands-free calling is one of the main features of SYNC. While the system
supports a variety of features, many are dependent on your cellular
phone’s functionality. At a minimum, most cellular phones with Bluetooth
wireless technology support the following functions:
•Answering an incoming call
•Ending a call
•Using privacy mode
•Dialing a number
•Redialing
•Call waiting notification
•Caller ID.
Other features, such as text messaging using Bluetooth and automatic
phonebook download, are phone-dependent features. To check your
phone’s compatibility, see your phone’s user manual and visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca.
Pairing a Phone for the First Time
Note: SYNC can support downloading up to approximately 1000 entries
per Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone.
Note: Make sure the vehicle ignition and radio are turned on and the
transmission is in position P.
Note: To scroll through the menus, press the up and down arrows on
your audio system.
Wirelessly pairing your phone with SYNC allows you to make and receive
hands-free calls.
1. Press the phone button; when the display indicates no phone is
paired, press OK.
2. When Find SYNC appears in the display, press OK.
3. Put your phone into Bluetooth discovery mode. See your phone’s
user guide if necessary.
4. When prompted on your phone’s display, enter the six-digit PIN
provided by SYNC in the radio display.
5. The display indicates when the pairing is successful.
310 SYNC®
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Depending on your phone’s capability and your market, the system may
prompt you with questions such as setting the current phone as the
primary phone (the phone SYNC automatically tries to connect with first
upon vehicle start-up), downloading your phone book, etc.
Pairing Subsequent Phones
Note: To scroll through the menus, press the up and down arrows on
your audio system.
Note: Make sure the vehicle ignition and radio are turned on and that
the transmission is in position P.
1. Press the phone button and scroll until System Settings is selected.
2. Press OK and scroll until Bluetooth Devices is selected and press OK.
3. Scroll until Add Bluetooth Device is selected and press OK.
4. When Find SYNC appears in the display, press OK.
5. Put your phone into Bluetooth discovery mode. See your phone’s
user guide if necessary.
6. When prompted on your phone’s display, enter the six-digit PIN
provided by SYNC in the radio display. The display indicates when
the pairing is successful.
7. The system then prompts with questions such as if you would like to
set the current phone as the primary phone (the phone SYNC
automatically tries to connect with first upon vehicle start-up),
download your phone book, etc.
Phone Voice Commands
Press the voice icon and say “Phone”. Say any of the following:
“PHONE”
“Call <name>”
1,2
“Call <name> on mobile OR cell”
1,2
“Call <name> on other”
1,2
“Phone book <name> at home”
2
“Phone book <name> on mobile OR cell”
2
“Call history outgoing”
2
“Phone book <name> on Other”
2
“Call history missed”
2
“Menu”
2,3
“Join”
SYNC® 311
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
“PHONE”
“Call <name> at home”
1,2
“Call <name> at work” OR “Call <name> in office”
1,2
“Dial”
1,4
“Phone book <name>”
2
“Phone book <name> at work” OR “Phone book <name> at office”
2
“Call history incoming”
2
“Connections”
2
“Go to privacy”
“Hold”
1
These commands do not require you to say “Phone” first.
2
These commands are not available until phone information is completely
downloaded using Bluetooth.
3
See “MENU” table below.
4
See “DIAL” table below.
“MENU”
“(Phone) connections”
*
“(Phone) settings (message) notification off”
*
“(Phone) settings (message) notification on”
*
“(Phone) settings (set) phone ringer”
*
“(Phone) settings (set) ringer 1”
*
“(Phone) settings (set) ringer 2”
*
“(Phone) settings (set) ringer 3”
*
“(Phone) settings (set) ringer off”
*
“Battery”
“Phone name”
“Signal”
“Text message inbox”
*
Words in ( ) are optional and do not have to be spoken for the system
to understand the command.
312 SYNC®
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Phone book commands: When you ask SYNC® to access a phone book
name, number, etc., the requested information appears in the display to
view. Press the phone button and say “Call” to call the contact.
“DIAL”
“411” (four-one-one), “911” (nine-one-one)
“700 (seven hundred)” (seven hundred)
“800 (eight hundred)” (eight hundred)
“900 (nine hundred)” (nine hundred)
“#” (pound)
“<number> 0–9”
“Asterisk” (*)
“Clear” (deletes all entered digits)
“Delete” (deletes one digit)
“Plus”
“Star”
Note: To exit dial mode, press and hold the phone button or press
MENU to go to the PHONE menu.
Making Calls
Press the voice icon and when prompted say:
1. Say “Call <name>” or “Dial”, then the desired number.
2. When the system confirms the number, say “Dial” again to initiate the
call.
To erase the last spoken digit, say “Delete” or press the left arrow
button. To erase all spoken digits, say “Clear” or press and hold the left
arrow button.
To end the call, press and hold the phone button.
Receiving Calls
When receiving a call, you can:
•Answer the call by pressing the phone button.
•Reject the call by pressing and holding the phone button.
•Ignore the call by doing nothing.
SYNC® 313
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Phone Options during an Active Call
During an active call, you have additional menu features which become
available such as putting a call on hold, joining calls, etc. Use the arrow
buttons to scroll through the menu options.
To access:
1. Press MENU during an active call.
2. When Active Call Menu is selected, press OK.
3. Scroll to cycle through the following options:
When you select: You can:
Mute Call? Mute the call.
Privacy Switch a call from an active hands-free
environment to your cellular phone for a more
private conversation.
Press OK when Privacy on/off appears. (The
display indicates In Privacy and the system
transfers your call.)
Call Hold Put an active call on hold.
Press OK when Place Call on Hold? appears.
To answer another call at this time, press the
phone button.
Join Calls Join two separate calls.
1. Press the phone button.
2. Access the desired contact through SYNC
or use voice commands to place the second
call. Once actively in the second call, press
MENU.
3. Scroll until Join Calls appears and press
OK. Press OK again when Join Calls?appears.
Note: SYNC supports a maximum of three
callers on a multiparty/conference call.
314 SYNC®
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Enter Tones Enter “tones” such as numbers for passwords.
Scroll until the desired number appears in the
display, then press OK; a tone sounds as
confirmation. Repeat as necessary.
Phonebook Access your phonebook contacts.
1. Press OK to select, then scroll through
your phonebook contacts.
2. Press OK again when the desired selection
appears in the display.
3. Press the phone button.
Call History Access your call history log.
1. Press OK to select, then scroll through
your call history options (incoming, outgoing
or missed).
2. Press OK when the desired selection
appears in the display.
3. Press the phone button to call the
selection.
Return Exit the current menu.
SYNC® 315
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Accessing Features through the Phone Menu
SYNC’s phone menu allows you to redial a number, access your call
history and phone book and send text messages as well as access phone
and system settings. You can also access advanced features, such as 911
Assist, Vehicle Health Report and SYNC Services.
1. Press the phone button to enter the Phone Menu.
2. Scroll to cycle through:
When you select: You can:
Phone Redial Redial the last number called (if available).
Press OK to select, then press OK again to
confirm.
Call History
1
Allows you to access any previously dialed,
received or missed calls while your phone has
been connected to the system.
1. Press OK to select.
2. Scroll to select from Call History Incoming,
Call History Outgoing or Call History Missed.
Press OK make your selection.
3. Press OK or the phone button to call the
desired selection.
Note: The system attempts to automatically
re-download your phone book and call history
each time your phone connects to SYNC (if
the auto download feature is on and your
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone supports
this feature).
Phonebook
1,2
Allows you to access your downloaded
phonebook.
1. Press OK to confirm and enter. If your
phonebook has fewer than 255 listings, they
appear alphabetically in flat file mode. If there
are more, they are organized into alphabetical
categories.
2. Scroll until the desired contact appears,
then press OK.
3. Press OK or the phone button.
316 SYNC®
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Text Message
1
Enables you to send, download and delete
text messages.
Phone Settings
1
Allows you to view your phone’s status, set
ring tones, select your message notification,
change phone book entries and automatically
download your cellular phone among other
features.
SYNC Services
3
Access the SYNC services portal where you
can request various types of information,
traffic reports and directions.
911 Assist
4
Place an emergency call to a 911 operator for
you after an accident (if the feature is used
properly).
Vehicle Health
Report
3
Create and receive a diagnostic report card on
your vehicle.
Mobile Apps
3
Interact with SYNC-capable mobile
applications on your smartphone.
System Settings Access Bluetooth Devices menu listings (add,
connect, set as primary, on/off, delete) as well
as Advanced menu listings (prompts,
languages, defaults, master reset, install
application and system information).
Exit Phone Menu Exit the phone menu by pressing OK.
1
This is a phone-dependent feature.
2
This is a phone-dependent and speed-dependent feature.
3
If equipped, United States only.
4
If equipped, United States and Canada only.
Text Messaging
Note: This is a phone-dependent feature.
SYNC allows you to receive, send, download and delete text messages.
The system can also read incoming text messages to you so that you do
not have to take your eyes off the road.
SYNC® 317
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Receiving a Text Message
Note: This is a phone-dependent feature. Your phone must support
downloading text messages using Bluetooth to receive incoming text
messages.
Note: Forwarding a text message is a speed-dependent feature and can
only be done when the vehicle is traveling at 3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
Note: Only one recipient is allowed per text message.
When a new message arrives, an audible tone sounds and the display
indicates you have a new message. You have these options:
1. Press the voice button, wait for the prompt and say “Read Message”
to have SYNC read the message to you.
2. Press OK to receive and open the text message or do nothing and
the message goes into your text message inbox. Press OK again and
SYNC reads your message aloud as you are not able to view the
message. You can then also choose whether you’d like to reply or
forward the message.
3. Press OK and scroll to choose between:
•Reply to Text Message: Press OK to access and then scroll
through the list of pre-defined messages to send.
•Forward Text Message: Press OK to forward the message to
anyone in your Phonebook or Call History. You can also choose
Enter Number.
Sending, Downloading and Deleting Your Text Messages
Text messaging is a phone-dependent feature. If your phone is
compatible, SYNC allows you to receive, send, download and delete text
messages.
1. Press the phone button.
2. Scroll until Text Message appears and press OK.
3. Scroll to select from the following options:
Send Text Message? enables you to send a new text message based on
a pre-defined set of 15 messages.
Download Unread Msgs allows you to download your unread messages
(only) to SYNC. To download the messages, press OK to select. The
display indicates your messages are being downloaded. When complete,
SYNC takes you to your inbox.
Delete All Messages? allows you to delete current text messages from
SYNC (not your phone). To delete the messages, press OK to select. The
display indicates when all your text messages have been deleted and
SYNC returns you to the text message menu.
318 SYNC®
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Note: SYNC does not automatically download all of your unread text
messages at every ignition cycle (as it does with call history and
phonebook if automatic download is set to on).
Return exits the current menu when you press OK.
If you select Send Text Message?:
1. Press OK to select. If the system detects your phone does not
support this feature, Unsupported appears in the display and SYNC
returns to the main menu.
2. Scroll to cycle through the message options in the following chart.
3. Press OK when the desired selection is in the display. The system
now needs to know who to send the message to.
4. Scroll to cycle through Phonebook or Call History entries. You can
also select Enter Number to audibly enter a desired number.
5. Press OK to enter the desired menu and scroll to select the specific
contact.
6. Press OK when the contact appears and press OK again to confirm
when the system asks if you would like to send the message. Each
text message is sent with the following signature: “This message was
sent from my <Ford or Lincoln>”.
Pre-defined text message options
Can’t talk right now
Call me
Call you later
Be there in 10 minutes
Be there in 20 minutes
Yes
No
Why?
Thanks
Where R you?
I need more directions
I love you
Too funny
Can’t wait to see you
I’m stuck in traffic
SYNC® 319
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Accessing Your Phone Settings
These are phone-dependent features. Your phone settings allow you to
access and adjust features such as your ring tone, text message
notification, modify your phone book and also set up automatic
download.
1. Press the phone button.
2. Scroll until Phone Settings appears, then press OK.
3. Scroll to select from the following options:
When you select: You can:
Phone Status See the provider, name, signal power, battery
power and roaming status of your connected
phone.
Press OK to select and scroll to view the
information. When done, press OK again to
return to the phone status menu.
Set Ringer Select which ring tone sounds during an
incoming call (one of the system’s or your
phone’s).
1. Press OK to select and scroll to hear
Ringer 1, Ringer 2, Ringer 3 and Phone
Ringer.
2. Press OK to select.
Note: If your phone supports in-band ringing,
your phone’s ringer sounds when Phone
Ringer is chosen.
Message Notification Have the option of hearing an audible tone to
notify you when a text message arrives.
1. Press OK to select and scroll between
Message Notification On or Message
Notification Off.
2. Press OK to select.
320 SYNC®
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Modify Phonebook Modify the contents of your phone book (i.e.,
add, delete, download). Press OK to select
and scroll between:
Add Contacts: Press OK to add more contacts
from your phone book. Push the desired
contact(s) on your phone. See your phone’s
user guide on how to push contacts.
Delete Phonebook: Press OK to delete the
current phone book and call history. When
Delete Phonebook appears, press OK to
confirm. SYNC takes you back to the Phone
Settings menu.
Download Phonebook: Press OK to select and
press OK again when Confirm
Download? appears.
Auto Download Automatically download your phone book
each time your phone connects to SYNC.
Press OK to select. When Auto Download
On? appears, press OK to have your
phonebook automatically downloaded each
time.
Select Off to NOT download your phonebook
every time your phone connects to SYNC.
Your phonebook, call history and text
messages can only be accessed when your
specific phone is connected to SYNC.
Note: Downloading times are phone- and
quantity-dependent.
Note: When auto download is on, any
changes, additions or deletions saved since
your last download are deleted.
Return Exit the current menu.
SYNC® 321
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
System Settings
System Settings provide access to your Bluetooth Devices and
Advanced menu features. Use the arrow buttons to scroll through the
menu options.
The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you to add, connect, delete and set a
phone as primary as well as turn your Bluetooth feature on and off.
The Advanced menu allows you to access and set prompts, languages,
defaults, perform a master reset, install an application and view system
information.
Bluetooth Devices Menu Options
This menu allows you to add, connect, delete, set a phone as primary,
and turn Bluetooth on or off.
1. Press the phone button to enter the Phone Menu.
2. Scroll until System Settings appears and press OK.
3. Scroll until Bluetooth Devices appears and select OK.
4. Scroll to select from the following options:
If you select: You can:
Add Bluetooth
Device
*
See Using SYNC with your phone earlier in
this chapter for pairing instructions.
Connect Bluetooth
Device
Connect a previously paired
Bluetooth-enabled phone.
1. Press OK to select and view a list of
previously paired phones.
2. Scroll until the desired device is chosen,
then press OK to connect the phone.
Note: Only one device can be connected at a
time. When another phone is connected, the
previous one is disconnected.
Set Primary Phone Set a previously paired phone as your primary
phone.
Press OK to select and scroll to select the
desired phone. Press OK to confirm.
Note: SYNC attempts to connect with the
primary phone at every ignition cycle. When a
phone is selected as primary, it appears first
in the list and is marked with an asterisk (*).
322 SYNC®
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
If you select: You can:
Set Bluetooth On/Off Turn the Bluetooth feature on and off.
Press OK and scroll to toggle between On and
Off. When the desired selection is chosen,
press OK.
Note: Turning Bluetooth off disconnects all
Bluetooth devices and deactivates all
Bluetooth features.
Delete Device Delete a paired phone.
Press OK and scroll to select the device.
Press OK to confirm.
Delete All Devices Delete all previously paired phones (and all
information originally saved with those
phones).
Press OK to select.
Return Exit the current menu.
*
This is a speed-dependent feature.
Advanced Menu Options
This menu allows you to access settings such as prompts, languages,
defaults, perform a master reset, install an application and view system
information.
1. Press the phone button to enter the Phone Menu.
2. Scroll until System Settings appears and press OK.
3. Scroll until Advanced appears and select OK.
4. Scroll to select from the following options:
If you select: You can:
Prompts Get help from SYNC by using questions,
helpful hints or asking you for a specific
action. To turn these prompts on or off:
1. Press OK to select and scroll to select
between on or off.
2. Press OK when the desired selection
appears in the display. SYNC takes you back
to the Advanced menu.
SYNC® 323
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
If you select: You can:
Languages Choose between English, Espanol and
Francais. Once selected, all of SYNC’s radio
displays and prompts are in the selected
language.
1. Press OK to select and then scroll through
the languages.
2. Press OK when the desired selection
appears in the display. If you change the
language setting, the display indicates that
the system is updating. When complete, SYNC
takes you back to the Advanced menu.
Factory Defaults Return to the factory default settings. This
selection does not erase your indexed
information (phonebook, call history, text
messages and paired devices).
1. Press OK to select and then press OK again
when Restore Defaults? appears in the display.
2. Press OK to confirm.
Master Reset Completely erase all information stored on
SYNC (phonebook, call history, text messages
and paired devices) and return to the factory
default settings.
Press OK to select. The display indicates
when complete and SYNC takes you back to
the Advanced menu.
Install Application Install applications you have downloaded.
Press OK and scroll to select. Press OK to
confirm.
System Info Access the Auto Version number as well as
the FPN number.
Press OK to select.
MAP Profile This is a Bluetooth component which can
further help your phone with the exchange of
text messages.
Return Exit the current menu.
324 SYNC®
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
SYNC APPLICATIONS AND SERVICES (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: In order for the following features to work, your cellular phone
must be compatible with SYNC. To check your phone’s compatibility, visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca.
•SYNC Services (if equipped, United States only): Provides access to
traffic, directions and information such as travel, horoscopes, stock
prices and more.
•911 Assist: Can alert 911 in the event of an emergency.
•Vehicle Health Report (if equipped, United States only): Provides a
diagnostic and maintenance report card of your vehicle.
•SYNC AppLink: Allows you to connect to and use certain applications
such as Pandora and Stitcher (if your phone is compatible).
911 Assist®
WARNING: Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on prior to a
crash, the system will not dial for help which could delay
response time, potentially increasing the risk of serious injury or death
after a crash.
WARNING: Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an emergency
call if you can do it yourself. Dial emergency services
immediately to avoid delayed response time which could increase the
risk of serious injury or death after a crash. If you do not hear 911
Assist within five seconds of the crash, the system or phone may be
damaged or non-functional.
WARNING: Always place your phone in a secure location in the
vehicle so it does not become a projectile or get damaged in a
crash. Failure to do so may cause serious injury to someone or damage
the phone which could prevent 911 Assist from working properly.
Note: SYNC 911 Assist feature must be set on prior to the incident.
Note: Before setting this feature on, ensure that you read the 911 Assist
privacy notice later in this section for important information.
Note: If 911 Assist is turned on or off by any user, that setting applies
for all paired phones. If 911 Assist is turned off, a voice message plays
and/or a display message/icon comes on when the vehicle is started after
a previously paired phone connects.
SYNC® 325
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Note: Every phone operates differently. While SYNC 911 Assist works
with most cellular phones, some may have trouble using this feature.
If a crash deploys an airbag (excludes knee airbags and rear inflatable
safety belts [if equipped]) or activates the fuel pump shut-off, your SYNC
equipped vehicle may be able to contact emergency services by dialing
911 through a paired and connected Bluetooth-enabled phone. For more
information about 911 Assist, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca.
•For information on airbag deployment, see the Supplementary
Restraints System chapter.
•For information on the fuel pump shut-off, see the Roadside
Emergencies chapter.
Setting 911 Assist On
Perform the following:
1. Press the phone button to enter the Phone Menu.
2. Scroll until 911 Assist is selected.
3. Press OK to confirm and enter the 911 Assist menu.
4. Scroll to select between On and Off selections.
5. Press OK when the desired option appears in the radio display. Set
On or Set Off appears in the display as confirmation.
Off selections include: Off with reminder and Off without reminder. Off
with reminder provides a display and voice reminder at phone
connection at vehicle start. Off without reminder provides a display
reminder only without a voice reminder at phone connection.
To make sure that 911 Assist works properly:
•SYNC must be powered and working properly at the time of the
incident and throughout feature activation and use.
•SYNC 911 Assist feature must be set on prior to the incident.
•A Bluetooth-enabled and compatible phone has to be paired and
connected to SYNC.
•A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone must have the ability to make
and maintain an outgoing call at the time of the incident.
•A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone must have adequate network
coverage, battery power and signal strength.
•The vehicle must have battery power and be located in the United
States, Canada or in a territory in which 911 is the emergency
number.
326 SYNC®
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
In the Event of a Crash
Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate the fuel pump shut-off
(which would activate 911 Assist); however, if 911 Assist is triggered,
SYNC tries to contact emergency services. If a connected phone is
damaged or loses connection to SYNC, SYNC searches for, and tries to
connect to, any available previously paired phone and tries to make the
call to 911.
Before making the call:
•SYNC provides a short window of time (about 10 seconds) to cancel
the call. Failure to cancel the call results in SYNC attempting to dial
911.
•SYNC says the following, or a similar message: “SYNC will attempt to
call 911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on your screen or press and
hold the phone button on your steering wheel.”
If the call is not cancelled and a successful call is made, a pre-recorded
message is played for the 911 operator, then the occupant(s) in the
vehicle is able to talk with the operator. Be prepared to provide your
name, phone number and location immediately, because not all 911
systems are capable of receiving this information electronically.
911 Assist May Not Work If
•Your cellular phone or 911 Assist hardware was damaged in a crash.
•The vehicle’s battery or SYNC system has no power.
•The phone(s) paired and connected to the system was thrown from
the vehicle.
911 Assist Privacy Notice
Once 911 Assist is set on, it may disclose to emergency services that the
vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag or
activation of the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or updates to 911
Assist may also be capable of electronically or verbally disclosing to 911
operators the vehicle location, and/or other details about the vehicle or
crash to assist 911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency
services. If you do not want to disclose this information, do not turn the
feature on.
SYNC® 327
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Vehicle Health Report
WARNING: Always follow scheduled maintenance instructions,
regularly inspect your vehicle, and seek repair for any damage or
problem you suspect. Vehicle Health Report supplements, but cannot
replace normal maintenance and vehicle inspection. Vehicle Health
Report only monitors certain systems that are electronically monitored
by the vehicle and will not monitor or report the status of any other
system, (i.e., brake lining wear). Failure to perform scheduled
maintenance and regularly inspect your vehicle may result in vehicle
damage and serious injury.
Note: Your Vehicle Health Report feature requires activation prior to
use. Visit www.SYNCMyRide.com to register. There is no fee or
subscription associated with Vehicle Health Report, but you must register
to use this feature.
Note: This feature may not function properly if you have enabled caller
ID blocking on your mobile phone. Before running a report, review the
Vehicle Health Report privacy notice.
Note: In order to allow a break-in period for your vehicle, you may not
be able to create a Vehicle Health Report until your vehicle odometer has
reached 200 miles.
Register for Vehicle Health Report and set your report preferences at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. After registering, you can request a Vehicle
Health Report (inside your vehicle). Return to your account at
www.SYNCMyRide.com to view your report. You can also choose for
SYNC to automatically remind you to run reports at specific mileage
intervals. Cellular phone airtime usage may apply when reporting.
The system allows you to check your vehicle’s overall health in the form
of a diagnostic report card. The vehicle health report contains valuable
information such as:
•Vehicle Diagnostic Information
•Scheduled maintenance
•Open Recalls and Field Service Actions
•Unserviced items from vehicle inspections by your authorized dealer.
You can run a report (after the vehicle has been running a minimum of
60 seconds) by pressing the voice button and saying “Vehicle health
report”, or pressing the phone button.
328 SYNC®
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
To run a report using the phone button:
1. Press the phone button to enter Phone Menu.
2. Scroll until Vehicle Health is selected and press OK.
3. Scroll to select from the following options:
Vehicle Health Report options
User Preferences:
Press OK to select
and enter the menu.
Scroll to select from:
Automatic Reports: Press OK and select on
or off. Select On to have SYNC automatically
prompt you to run a health report at certain
mileage intervals. Note: You must first turn
this feature on before you can select the
mileage intervals at which you would like to
be prompted.
Mileage Intervals: Press OK. Scroll to select
between 5000, 7500 or 10000 mile intervals
and press OK to make your selection.
Return: Press OK to exit the menu.
Run Report? Press OK for SYNC to run a health report of
your vehicle’s diagnostic systems and send the
results to Ford where it is combined with
scheduled maintenance information, open
recalls and other field service actions and
unserviced vehicle inspection items from your
authorized dealer.
Vehicle Health Report Privacy Notice
When you run a Vehicle Health Report, Ford Motor Company may collect
your cellular phone number (to process your report request) and
diagnostic information about your vehicle. Certain versions or updates to
Vehicle Health Report may also collect additional vehicle information.
Ford may use the vehicle information it collects for any purpose. If you
do not want to disclose your cellular phone number or vehicle
information, do not run the feature or set up your Vehicle Health Report
profile at www.SYNCMyRide.com. See www.SYNCMyRide.com - Vehicle
Health Report Terms and Conditions, and Privacy Statement - for more
information.
SYNC® 329
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
SYNC Services: Traffic, Directions & Information (TDI)
Note: SYNC Services requires activation prior to use. Visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com to register and check your eligibility for
complimentary services. Standard phone and message rates may apply.
Subscription may be required. You must also have the active SYNC
Services Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone paired and connected to the
system in order to connect to, and use, SYNC Services. See the Using
SYNC with your phone for pairing instructions.
Note: This feature does not function properly if you have enabled caller
ID blocking on your mobile phone. Make sure your mobile phone is not
blocking caller ID before using SYNC Services.
Note: The driver is ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the
vehicle, and therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the
suggested directions. Any navigation features are provided only as an aid.
Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local
conditions and existing traffic regulations. Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if
you would be placed in an unsafe situation, or if you would be directed
into an area that you consider unsafe. Maps used by this system may be
inaccurate because of errors, changes in roads, traffic conditions or
driving conditions.
Note: When you connect, the service uses GPS technology and advanced
vehicle sensors to collect the vehicle’s current location, travel direction
and speed to help provide you with the directions, traffic reports, or
business searches you request. Further, to provide the services you
request and for continuous improvement, the service may collect and
record call details and voice communications. For more information, see
SYNC Services Terms and Conditions at www.SYNCMyRide.com. If you
do not want Ford or its service providers to collect the vehicle travel
information or other information identified in the Terms and Conditions,
do not activate or use the service.
SYNC Services uses advanced vehicle sensors, integrated GPS technology
and comprehensive map and traffic data, to give you personalized traffic
reports, precise turn-by-turn directions, business search, news, sports,
weather and more. For a complete list of services, or to learn more,
please visit www.SYNCMyRide.com.
330 SYNC®
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Connecting to SYNC Services Using Voice Commands
1. Press the voice button.
2. When prompted, say “Services”. This initiates an outgoing call to
SYNC Services using your paired and connected Bluetooth-enabled
cellular phone.
3. Once you are connected to the service, follow the voice prompts to
request the desired service, such as “Traffic” or “Directions”. You can
also say “What are my choices?” to receive a complete list of available
services from which to choose.
4. Say “Services” to return to the services main menu or for help, say
“Help”.
Connecting to SYNC Services Using the Navigation Screen
1. Select the Phone hard button.
2. Select the SYNC Apps soft button tab.
3. Select the SYNC Services soft button to connect to SYNC Services.
Receiving Turn-by-Turn Directions
1. When connected to SYNC Services, say “Directions” or “Business
search”. To find the closest business or type of business to your
current location, just say “Business search” and then “Search near
me”. If you need further assistance in finding a location you can say
“Operator” at any time within a Directions or Business search to
speak with a live operator. You may also be prompted to speak with
an operator when the automatic system has difficulty matching your
voice request. The live operator can assist you by searching for
businesses by name or by category, residential addresses by street
address or by name or specific street intersections. Operator Assist is
a feature of your SYNC Services subscription. For more information
on Operator Assist visit www.SYNCMyRide.com/support.
2. Follow the voice prompts to select your destination. Once your
destination is selected, your current vehicle location is uploaded and
a route based on current traffic conditions is calculated and sent
back to your vehicle. After the route download is complete, the
phone call is automatically ended. You then receive audible and visual
driving instructions as you travel toward your destination.
3. While on an active route, you can select or say “Route summary” or
“Route status” to view the Route Summary turn list or the Route
Status ETA. You can also turn voice guidance on or off, cancel the
route or update the route.
If you miss a turn, SYNC automatically asks if you want the route
updated. Just say, “Yes” when prompted and a new route will be
delivered to your vehicle.
SYNC® 331
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Disconnecting from SYNC Services
1. Press and hold the phone button on the steering wheel.
2. Say “Good-bye” from the SYNC Services main menu.
SYNC Services quick tips
Personalizing You can personalize your Services feature to
provide quicker access to your most used or
favorite information. You can save address
points such as work or home. You can also
save favorite information like sports teams or
a news category. To learn more, log onto
www.SYNCMyRide.com.
Push to interrupt Press the voice button at any time (while you
are connected to SYNC Services) to interrupt
a voice prompt or an audio clip (such as a
sports report), wait for the listening tone, and
say your voice command.
Portable Your subscription is associated with your
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone number, not
your VIN (Vehicle Identification Number). You
can pair and connect your phone to any
vehicle equipped with SYNC Services and
continue enjoying your personalized services.
You can even access your account outside the
vehicle. Just use the number on your phone’s
call history. Traffic and Directions features do
not function properly but information services
and the 411 connect and text message
features are available.
SYNC AppLink™
Note: This feature is only available in the United States.
Note: Your smartphone must be paired and connected to SYNC to access
AppLink.
Note: iPhone users need to connect the phone to the USB port in order
to start the application. It is recommended to lock your iPhone after
starting an application.
332 SYNC®
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Note: The AppLink feature is not available if your vehicle is equipped
with the MyFord Touch or MyLincoln Touch system.
Depending on your display type, you can access AppLink from the media
menu, the phone menu, or by using voice commands. Once an app is
running through AppLink, you can control main features of the app
through voice commands and steering wheel controls.
To Access Using the Phone Menu
1. Press the Phone button.
2. Browse to Mobile Applications and press OK.
3. Browse to your desired app and press OK.
4. Once an app is running through SYNC, you can access an app’s menu
by pressing the MENU button to first access the SYNC menu.
5. Scroll until “<App name> Menu” is displayed (such as Pandora
Menu), then press OK. From here, you can access an application’s
features, such as Thumbs up, Thumbs down, etc. For more
information, please visit www.SYNCMyRide.com.
To Access Using the Media Menu
1. Press the AUX button to access the SYNC menu.
2. Press the Menu button to access the SYNC Media menu.
3. Browse to Mobile Applications and press OK.
4. Browse to your desired app and press OK.
5. Once an app is running through SYNC, you can access an app’s menu
by pressing the MENU button to first access the SYNC menu.
6. Scroll until “<App name> Menu” is displayed (such as Pandora
Menu), then press OK. From here, you can access an application’s
features, such as Thumbs up, Thumbs down, etc. For more
information, please visit www.SYNCMyRide.com.
To Access Using the Navigation Screen (If Equipped)
1. Press the Phone button.
2. Press the SYNC Apps tab.
3. Press Mobile Apps.
4. Select the app to start it.
To Access Using Voice Commands
1. Press the voice icon.
2. When prompted, say “Mobile Apps”.
3. Say the name of the application after the tone.
4. The app should start. While an app is running through SYNC, you can
press the voice button and speak commands specific to the app, such
as “Play Station Quickmix”. Say “Help” to discover available voice
commands.
SYNC® 333
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
USING SYNC WITH YOUR MEDIA PLAYER
You can access and play music from your digital music player over the
vehicle’s speaker system using the system’s media menu or voice
commands. You can also sort and play your music by specific categories,
such as artists, albums, etc.
SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any digital media player including:
iPod, Zune™, Plays from device players, and most USB drives. SYNC also
supports audio formats such as MP3, WMA, WAV and ACC.
Connecting Your Digital Media Player via the USB Port
Note: If your digital media player has a power switch, ensure that the
device is turned on.
To connect using voice commands:
1. Plug the device into the vehicle’s USB port.
2. Press the voice icon and when prompted, say “USB”.
3. You can now play music by saying any of the appropriate voice
commands. See the media voice commands.
To connect using the system menu:
1. Plug the device into the vehicle’s USB port.
2. Press AUX and then MENU to enter the Media Menu.
3. Scroll until Select Source appears and press OK.
4. Scroll to select USB and press OK.
5. Depending on how many digital media files are on your connected
device, Indexing may appear in the radio display. When indexing is
complete, the screen returns to the Play Menu.
6. Press OK and scroll through selections of:
•Play All
•Artists
•Albums
•Genres
•Playlists
•Tracks
•Explore USB
•Similar Music
•Return
When the desired selection appears in the display, press OK to build
your desired music selection.
334 SYNC®
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
What’s Playing?
At any time when a track is playing, you can press the voice
icon and ask the system, “What’s playing?”. The system reads
the metadata tags (if populated) of the playing track to you.
Media Voice Commands
Press the voice icon and, when prompted, say “USB” then any
of the following:
“USB”
“Autoplay off”
“Autoplay on”
“(Phone) (Media) (Bluetooth) Connections”
“Pause”
“Play”
“Play album <name>”
1,3
“Play all”
“Play artist <name>”
1,3
“Play genre <name>”
1,3
“Play next folder”
2
“Play next track”
“Play playlist <name>”
1,3
“Play previous folder”
2
“Play previous track”
“Play song <name>”
1,3
“Play track <name>”
1,3
“Refine album <name>”
1,3
“Refine artist <name>”
1,3
“Refine song <name>”
1,3
“Refine track <name>”
1,3
“Repeat off”
“Repeat on”
“Search album <name>”
1,3
“Search artist <name>”
1,3
“Search genre <name>”
1,3
SYNC® 335
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
“USB”
“Search song <name>”
1,3
“Search track <name>”
1,3
“Shuffle off”
“Shuffle on”
“Similar music”
“What’s playing?”
1
“<name>” is a dynamic listing, meaning that it could be the name of any
desired group, artist, etc.
2
Voice commands which are only available in folder mode.
3
Voice commands which are not available until indexing is complete.
Voice command guide
“Autoplay” Turn on to listen to music which has already
been randomly indexed during the indexing
process.
Turn off and the system does not begin to
play any of your music until all media has all
been indexed. Indexing times can vary from
device to device and also with regard to the
number of songs being indexed.
“Search/Play Genre” The system searches all the data from your
indexed music and, if available, begins to play
the chosen type of music. You can only play
genres of music which are present in the
GENRE metadata tags that you have on your
digital media player.
“Similar Music” The system compiles a playlist and then plays
similar music to what is currently playing
from the USB port using indexed metadata
information.
“Search/Play
Artist/Track/Album”
The system searches for a specific
artist/track/album from the music indexed
through the USB port.
336 SYNC®
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Voice command guide
“Refine” This allows you to make your previous
command more specific. For example, if you
asked to search and play all music by a
certain artist, you could then say “refine
album” and choose a specific album from the
list to view. If you then select Play, the system
only plays music from that specific album.
Press the voice icon and when prompted say “Bluetooth Audio” and then
any of the following:
“BLUETOOTH AUDIO”
“(Phone) (Media) (Bluetooth) Connections”
“Pause”
“Play”
“Play next track ”
“Play previous track ”
Media Menu Features
The media menu allows you to select your media source, how to play
your music (by artist, genre, shuffle, repeat, etc.), and also to add,
connect or delete devices.
1. Press AUX and then MENU to enter the Media Menu.
2. Scroll to cycle through:
When you select: You can:
Play Menu Play your music by artist, album, genre,
playlists, tracks, similar music or to simply,
play all. You can also choose to Explore USB
to view the supported digital music files on
your playing device.
See Play Menu later in this section for more
information.
SYNC® 337
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Select Source SYNC USB: Press OK to access music
plugged into your USB port. You can also plug
in devices to charge them (if supported by
your device). Once connected, the system
indexes any readable media files. (The time
required to complete this depends on the size
of the media content being indexed.) If
Autoplay is on, you can access media files
randomly as they are indexed. If turned off,
indexed media is not available until the
indexing process is complete. SYNC is capable
of indexing thousands of average size media
and notifies you if the maximum indexing file
size is reached.
Bluetooth Audio: This is a phone-dependent
feature which allows you to stream music
playing on your Bluetooth-enabled phone. If
supported by your device, you can press
SEEK to play the previous or next track.
SYNC Line In: Press OK to select and play
music from your portable music player over
the vehicle’s speakers.
Note: If you have already connected a device
to the USB port, you cannot access the line in
feature. Some digital media players require
both USB and line in ports to stream data and
music separately.
338 SYNC®
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Media Settings Choose to shuffle or repeat your music and
select your Autoplay settings. Once these
selections are turned on, they remain on until
turned off. Press SEEK to play the previous
or next track.
Note: Some digital media players require
both USB and line in ports to stream data and
music separately. Press OK to select and then
scroll to choose from:
Shuffle: Press OK to shuffle available media
files in the current playlist. Note: To shuffle
all media tracks, you must select Play All in
the Play Menu and then select Shuffle.
Repeat: Press OK to repeat any song.
Autoplay: Press OK to listen to music which
has already been randomly indexed during
the indexing process.
Mobile Apps Interact with SYNC-capable mobile
applications on your smart phone. See SYNC
AppLink earlier in this chapter for more
information.
System Settings Access Bluetooth Device menu listings (add,
connect, set as primary, on/off, delete) as well
as Advanced menu listings (prompts,
languages, defaults, master reset, install
application and system information).
Note: See System Settings for more
information.
Exit Media Menu Press OK to exit the media menu.
SYNC® 339
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Accessing Your Play Menu
This menu allows you to select and play your media by artist, album,
genre, playlist, track, similar music or even to explore what is on your
USB device.
1. Make sure that your device is plugged into the USB port and is
turned on.
2. Press AUX and then MENU to enter the Media Menu.
3. Scroll to select the Play Menu and press OK.
If there are no media files to access, the display indicates there is no
media. If there are media files, you have the following options to scroll
through and select from:
When you select: You can:
Play All Play all indexed media (tracks) from your
playing device in flat file mode, one at a time
in numerical order.
Press OK to select. The first track title
appears in the display.
Artists Sort all indexed media by artist. Once
selected, the system lists and then play all
artists and tracks alphabetically. If there are
less than 255 indexed artist, they are listed
alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are
more, they are categorized in alphabetical
categories.
1. Press OK to select. You can select to play
All Artists or any indexed artist.
2. Scroll until the desired artist is chosen and
press OK.
340 SYNC®
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Albums Sort all indexed media by albums. If there are
less than 255 indexed albums, they are listed
alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are
more, they are organized into alphabetical
categories.
1. Press OK to enter the album menu and
select from playing all albums or from any
individual indexed album.
2. Scroll until the desired album is chosen and
press OK.
Genres Sort indexed music by genre (category) type.
SYNC lists the genres alphabetically in flat file
mode. If there are more than 255, SYNC
automatically organizes them into alphabetical
categories.
Press OK to select and then scroll to select
the desired genre and press OK.
Playlists Access your playlists (from formats such as
ASX, .M3U, .WPL, .MTP.). The system lists
your playlists alphabetically in flat file mode.
If there are more than 255, they are organized
into alphabetical categories.
Press OK to select. Then scroll to select the
desired playlist and press OK.
Tracks Search for and play a specific track which has
been indexed. SYNC lists your tracks
alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are
more than 255, SYNC automatically organizes
them into alphabetical categories.
Press OK to select. Then scroll to select the
desired track and press OK.
SYNC® 341
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Explore USB Explore all supported digital media on your
media device connected to the USB port. You
can only view media content which is
compatible with SYNC; other files saved are
not visible.
Press OK to select. Then scroll to explore
indexed media on your flash drive.
Similar Music Play music similar to what is currently playing
from the USB port. The system uses the
metadata information of each song to compile
a playlist for you.
Press OK to select. The system creates a new
list of similar songs and begins playing. The
metadata tags must be populated for this
feature to include each track.
Note: With certain playing devices, if your
metadata tags are not populated, the tracks
won’t be available in voice recognition, play
menu or similar music. However, if you place
these tracks onto your playing device in “Mass
Storage Device Mode”, they are available in
voice recognition, play menu browsing and
similar music. Unknowns are placed into any
unpopulated metadata tag.
Return Exit the current menu.
System Settings
System settings provide access to your Bluetooth Devices and
Advanced menu features.
The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you to add, connect and delete a
device as turn the Bluetooth feature on and off.
Your Advanced menu allows you to access and set prompts, languages,
defaults and perform a master reset.
342 SYNC®
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Bluetooth Devices Menu Options
This menu allows you to add, connect and delete devices as well as turn
Bluetooth on and off.
1. Press AUX and then MENU to enter the Media Menu.
2. Scroll until System Settings appears and select OK.
3. Scroll until Bluetooth Devices appears.
4. Press OK and then scroll to select from:
When you select: You can:
Add Bluetooth
Device
*
Allows you to pair additional devices to the
system.
1. Press OK to select and press OK again
when Find SYNC appears in the display.
2. Follow the directions in your phone’s user
guide to put your phone into discovery mode.
A six-digit PIN appears in the display.
3. When prompted on your phone’s six-digit
display, enter the PIN.
Connect Bluetooth
Device
Connect a previously paired
Bluetooth-enabled phone.
1. Press OK to select and view a list of
devices.
2. Scroll until the desired device is chosen
and press OK to connect the device.
Set Bluetooth On/Off Turn the Bluetooth feature on and off.
Press OK and scroll to toggle between On and
Off. When the desired selection is chosen,
press OK. Turning Bluetooth off disconnects
all Bluetooth devices and deactivates
Bluetooth features.
Delete Device Delete a paired media device.
Press OK and scroll to select the device.
Press OK to confirm.
Delete All Devices Delete all previously paired devices.
Press OK to select.
Return Exit the current menu.
*
This is a speed-dependent feature
SYNC® 343
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Advanced Menu Options
This menu allows you to access settings such as prompts, language,
performing a master reset as well as returning to factory defaults.
1. Press AUX and then MENU to access the Media Menu.
2. Scroll until System Settings appears and select OK.
3. Scroll until Advanced appears.
4. Press OK and then scroll to select from the following:
When you select: You can:
Prompts Have SYNC guide you via questions, helpful
hints or ask you for a specific action.
1. Press OK to select and scroll to select
between on or off.
2. Press OK when the desired selection
appears in the display. SYNC takes you back
to the Advanced menu.
Languages Choose from English, Francais and Espanol.
The displays and prompts are in the selected
language.
1. Press OK to select and then scroll through
the languages.
2. Press OK when the desired selection
appears in the display.
3. If you change the language setting, the
display indicates that the system is updating.
When complete, SYNC takes you back to the
Advanced menu.
Factory Defaults Return to the factory default settings. This
selection does not erase your indexed
information (phonebook, call history, text
messages and paired devices).
1. Press OK to select and then press OK again
when Restore Defaults? appears in the display.
2. Press OK to confirm.
344 SYNC®
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Master Reset Completely erase all information stored on
SYNC (all phonebook, call history, text
messages and all paired devices) and return
to the factory default settings.
Application Download new software applications (if
available) and then load the desired
applications through your USB port. See the
web site for more information.
Return Exit the current menu.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Your SYNC system is easy to use. However, should questions arise, see
the tables below.
Use the website at any time to check your phone’s compatibility, register
your account and set preferences as well as access a customer
representative via an online chat (during certain hours). Visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca for
more information.
Phone issues
Issue Possible
cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
Excessive
background noise
during a phone
call.
The audio control
settings on your
phone may be
affecting SYNC
performance.
Review your phone’s user guide
regarding audio adjustments.
During a call, I
can hear the
other person but
they cannot hear
me.
Possible phone
malfunction.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device, removing
the device’s battery, then trying
again.
SYNC® 345
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Phone issues
Issue Possible
cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
SYNC is not able
to download my
phonebook.
•Thisisa
phone-dependent
feature, OR
•Possible phone
malfunction.
•Go to the website to review
your phone’s compatibility.
•Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or removing
the device’s battery, then trying
again.
•Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by using the
Add Contacts feature.
•Use the SYNCmyphone
feature available on the website.
The system says
Phonebook
Downloaded but
my phonebook in
SYNC is empty or
is missing
contacts.
Limitations on
your phone’s
capability.
•Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by using the
Add Contacts feature.
•If the missing contacts are
stored on your SIM card, try
moving them to the device
memory.
•Remove any pictures or
special ring tones associated
with the missing contact.
346 SYNC®
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Phone issues
Issue Possible
cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
I am having
trouble
connecting my
phone to SYNC.
•Thisisa
phone-dependent
feature, OR
•Possible phone
malfunction.
•Go to the website to review
your phone’s compatibility.
•Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or removing
the device’s battery, then trying
again.
•Try deleting your device from
SYNC, deleting SYNC from your
device and trying again.
•Check the security and auto
accept/prompt always settings
relative to the SYNC Bluetooth
connection on your phone.
•Update your device’s software
firmware.
•Turn off the Auto phonebook
download setting.
Text messaging is
not working on
SYNC.
•Thisisa
phone-dependent
feature, OR
•Possible phone
malfunction.
•Go to the website to review
your phone’s compatibility.
•Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or removing
the device’s battery, then trying
again.
SYNC® 347
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
USB and media issues
Issue Possible
cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
I am having
trouble
connecting my
device.
Possible device
malfunction.
•Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or removing
the device’s battery, then trying
again.
•Make sure you are using the
manufacturer’s cable.
•Make sure the USB cable is
properly inserted into the device
and the vehicle’s USB port.
•Make sure that the device
does not have an auto-install
program or active security
settings.
SYNC does not
recognize my
device when I
turn on the car.
This is a device
limitation.
Make sure you are not leaving
the device in your vehicle
during very hot or cold
temperatures.
Bluetooth audio
does not stream.
•Thisisa
phone-dependent
feature, OR
•The device is
not connected.
Make sure the device is
connected to SYNC and that you
have pressed play on your
device.
SYNC does not
recognize music
that is on my
device.
•Your music files
may not contain
the proper artist,
song title, album
or genre
information, OR
•The file may be
corrupted, OR
•The song may
have copyright
protection which
does not allow it
to play.
•Make sure that all song details
are populated.
•Some devices require you to
change the USB settings from
mass storage to MTP class.
348 SYNC®
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Vehicle Health Report and SYNC Services (Traffic, Directions
and Information) issues
Issue Possible
cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
I received a text
that the Vehicle
Health Report is
not activated.
•Your account
may not be
activated on the
website, OR
•You may have
the wrong VIN
(vehicle
identification
number) listed.
•This is a free feature, but you
must first register online to use
it.
•Make sure that your VIN is
correctly listed in your account.
I am unable to
retrieve the
report on the
website, or I
receive a system
error.
The preferred
dealer
information did
not load correctly.
When you register your account,
you must list a preferred dealer.
If one is already listed, try
selecting another dealer and
logging out. Log back in and
change it back to your preferred
dealer and retrieve the report.
I am unable to
submit a report.
•This could be
due to your
phone’s
compatibility, OR
•Bad signal
strength, OR
•Your phone
may not be
activated on the
website.
•Update your mobile number
in your account on the website.
•Make sure you have full signal
strength and that your
Bluetooth volume level has been
turned up.
•Try deleting your phone and
performing a clean pairing.
I heard a
commercial when
I tried to use
Traffic, Directions
and Information.
•The phone in
use is not
activated, OR
•Your phone has
ID blocker active.
•This is a free feature, but you
must first register online to use
it.
•Turn off ID blocker on your
phone as the system recognizes
you by your phone number.
•Make sure the currently
connected phone is the same
one that is registered on your
SyncMyRide account.
SYNC® 349
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Voice command issues
Issue Possible
cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
SYNC does not
understand what
I am saying.
•You may be
using the wrong
voice commands,
OR
•You may be
speaking too soon
or at the wrong
time.
•Review the Phone voice
commands and the Media voice
commands at the beginning of
their respective sections.
•Be aware that SYNC’s
microphone is either in your
rear view mirror or in the
headliner just above the
windshield.
SYNC does not
understand the
name of a song or
artist.
•You may be
using the wrong
voice commands,
OR
•You may not be
saying the name
exactly as it is
saved, OR
•The system
may not be
reading the name
the same way you
are saying it.
•Review the media voice
commands at the beginning of
the media section.
•Say the song or artist exactly
as listed. If you say, “Play Artist
Prince”, the system does not
play music by Prince and the
Revolution or Prince and the
New Power Generation.
•Make sure you are saying the
complete title, such as
“California remix featuring
Jennifer Nettles”.
•If the songs are saved in all
CAPS, you have to spell them.
LOLA requires you to say, “Play
L-O-L-A”.
•Do not use special characters
in the title as the system does
not recognize them.
350 SYNC®
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Voice command issues
Issue Possible
cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
SYNC does not
understand or is
calling the wrong
contact when I
want to make a
call.
•You may be
using the wrong
voice commands,
OR
•You may not be
saying the name
exactly as it is
saved, OR
•Contacts in
your phonebook
may be very short
and similar, or
they may contain
special
characters, OR
•Your
phonebook
contacts may be
saved in CAPS.
•Review the phone voice
commands at the beginning of
the phone section.
•Make sure you are saying the
contacts exactly as listed. For
example, if a contact is saved as
Joe Wilson, say “Call Joe
Wilson”.
•The system works better if
you list full names, such as “Joe
Wilson” rather than “Joe”.
•Do not use special characters
such as 123 or ICE, as the
system does not recognize them.
•If contacts are saved in CAPS,
you have to spell them. JAKE
requires you to say, “Call
J-A-K-E”.
SYNC® 351
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
AppLink issues
Issue Possible
cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
SYNC does not
find any mobile
apps that are on
my phone.
•Your device
may not support
the AppLink
feature, OR
•The application
does not support
AppLink., OR
•If you have an
iPhone, it may
not be plugged in,
OR
•Your phone
may not be
paired or
connected.
•Check the website for
compatible devices and
applications.
•Make sure your device is
paired and connected. If you
have an iPhone, make sure it is
plugged in using the USB and
that the application is running
in the foreground.
352 SYNC®
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
NAVIGATION CONTROLS
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off
the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your
vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while
driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the
use of electronic devices while driving.
The system divides the screen in two sections after it initializes:
•Status bars: This is the top and bottom portion of the screen. It
displays the clock or date and other useful information, depending on
which mode you are in.
•Display area: The touchscreen changes depending on current
system operation. Different buttons display in this area, depending on
which mode you are in.
Navigation System (If Equipped) 353
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Note: Some features, such as SIRIUS satellite radio, may not be available
in your location. Check with your authorized dealer.
A. Memory presets:
•Store your favorite radio stations. To store a radio station, tune to the
station, then press and hold a preset button until sound returns.
•In radio and satellite radio mode, press a button to access your saved
presets or channels.
B. CD and DVD slot: Insert a CD or DVD, label side up.
C. Eject: Press this button to eject a CD or DVD from the system.
D. TUNE RPT:
•In radio or satellite radio mode, turn the control to advance in
individual increments up or down the frequency band to the desired
station.
•In MP3 mode, turn the control to advance to the next or previous
folder.
•In navigation mode, press this button to hear the last spoken
navigation guidance prompt.
E. MAP:
•Press this button to access the navigation map.
•Press while the map display is active to center the map on the
current vehicle position. Press while the map display and route are
active to see the different map guidance views.
F. DEST:
•Press this button to access the destination entry menu.
•Press while the destination entry menu is active to show additional
destination entry techniques.
G. NAV:
•Press this button to access the navigation menu.
•Press while the navigation menu is active to access the navigation
menu tabs.
H. I (Information): Press this button to access features such as Where
am I?, SIRIUS® Travel Link™, Calendar, System Info and Help.
I. PHONE: Press this button to access the SYNC phone menu.
J. DISP: Press this button to select a display mode: On, Status Bar Only,
and Off.
354 Navigation System (If Equipped)
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
K. SEEK:
•In radio and satellite radio mode, press the arrow buttons to find
previous or next available stations or channels within the currently
selected Category or Genre.
•In CD and DVD modes, press the arrow buttons to select the previous
or next track or chapter.
L. MENU:
•Press this button to access the system menu.
•Press while the system menu is active to access the menu tabs of
Display, Clock, Feedback Settings, System Settings and Valet Mode.
M. SOUND:
•Press this button to access the sound menu.
•Press while the sound menu is active to access the menu tabs of
Bass/Treble, Balance/Fade, SCV (Speed Compensated Volume), DSP
(Digital Signal Processing) and Visualizer.
N. MEDIA:
•Press this button to access the media menu.
•Press while the media menu is active to access the available sources
of CD/DVD, Jukebox and User Device.
O. RADIO:
•Press this button to access the radio menu.
•Press while the radio menu is active to access the available sources of
AM, FM1, FM2, SAT1, SAT2, and SAT3.
P. VOL: Press and hold this button to turn the system off and on. Turn
the control to adjust the volume.
Note: If a navigation route is active when the navigation system is off,
the system resumes the route when you turn the system on.
DISPLAY MODE
You can choose to turn your screen on or off and if you would like to
view the status bars on the top and bottom of the screen. Press DISP to
see the options.
Display Mode Voice Commands
The following voice commands are available in display mode. If
you are not in display mode, press the voice button on the
steering wheel. When prompted, say “Display mode” and then
any of the following commands.
Navigation System (If Equipped) 355
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Display mode voice commands
“Display on”
“Display off”
“Status bar”
“Brighter”
“Dimmer”
“Day”
“Night”
“Auto”
“Help”
STATUS BARS
The top status bar shows the
current mode, exterior temperature,
time and display icons if you have
enabled Bluetooth or other options.
The bottom status bar shows the
Home icon and may also show the
Artist and Title of the currently
playing CD, Artist and Title for
Jukebox and radio.
Customizing Your Home Screen
Depending on your vehicle’s option package and software, your screens
may vary in appearance from the screens shown in this section. Your
features may also be limited depending on your market. Check with your
authorized dealer for availability.
Press the house icon to access the home screen. Here you can:
•Save or view pictures.
•View your current audio settings.
•Display the audio visualizer.
You can split the screen in to two different sections, or you can choose
to have one main view.
•The left side displays an uploaded photo or the map screen.
•The right side displays an uploaded photo or the radio and visualizer.
356 Navigation System (If Equipped)
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Loading Photos
Note: The system is not compatible with discs written in Packet Write
mode.
Your system allows you to upload and view up to 32 photos.
Only the photograph(s), which meets the following conditions, display:
•The file must be 1.5MB or smaller.
•The file extension must be .jpe, .jpg or .jpeg.
•The file path must be 255 characters or fewer.
•Up to 256 files or folders can display in one folder.
•The CD or DVD must be ISO 9660 format. UDF format is not
supported.
To load photos:
1. Touch the left side of the home screen.
2. Touch the Add button. When the disclaimer appears asking to
confirm the supported photo formats, press OK.
3. Insert a CD-ROM that contains your photos.
4. Touch OK. The right side of the screen displays a list of the photos.
5. Select either Add or Add All to save photos to the hard drive.
Editing and Deleting Photos
To edit photos, go to the home screen, then:
1. Touch the current photo on the home screen.
2. Select the Edit button.
3. Adjust the photo by zooming in or out, moving right, left, up or down
and rotating left or right.
Note: Press the Reset button to return to the original image.
To delete a photo, select the Delete button.
To delete all photos:
1. Press the Menu hard button.
2. Select the System Settings tab on the touchscreen.
3. Press the View button for Delete Stored Items.
4. Select Saved photos.
Navigation System (If Equipped) 357
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Using the Touch-sensitive Controls on Your System
To turn a feature on and off, just touch the graphic with your finger. To
get the best performance from the touch-sensitive controls:
•Make sure your hands are clean and dry.
•Since the touchscreen operates based on the touch of a finger, you
may have trouble using it if you are wearing gloves.
•Use your bare finger to touch the center of a touch-control graphic.
Touching off-center of the graphic may affect operation of a nearby
control.
•Do not press hard on the controls. They are sensitive to light touch.
•Keep metal and other conductive material away from the surface of
the touchscreen as this may cause electronic interference (for
example, inadvertently turning on a feature other than the one you
meant to turn on).
Cleaning the Touchscreen Display
Use a clean, soft cloth such as one used for cleaning glasses. If dirt or
fingerprints are still visible, apply a small amount of alcohol to the cloth.
Do not pour or spray alcohol onto the display. Do not use detergent or
any type of solvent to clean the display.
USING VOICE RECOGNITION
This system helps you control many features using voice commands. This
allows you to keep your hands on the wheel and focus on what is in
front of you. The system provides feedback through audible tones,
prompts, questions and spoken confirmations depending on the situation
and the chosen level of interaction (voice settings).
The system also asks short questions (confirmation prompts) when it is
not sure of your request or when there are multiple possible responses
to your request.
When using voice commands, words and icons may appear in the lower
left status bar indicating the status of the voice session (such as
Listening, Success, Failed, Paused or Try Again).
358 Navigation System (If Equipped)
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
How To Use Voice Commands with Your System
Press the voice icon; after the tone, speak your command
clearly.
You can say these commands at any time.
“Audio” “Navigation”
“CD” “Radio”
“Disc” “SYNC”
*
“Display mode” “Tutorial”
“DVD” “User profile”
“Jukebox” “Video CD”
“Line in” “Voice settings”
“Mobile apps” “Help”
*
See the SYNC chapter for more information on these features.
To access a list of all available voice commands, press the I hard button.
Select the Help tab on the touchscreen, then the Voice Commands tab
and choose the desired category.
Helpful Hints
•Make sure the interior of your vehicle is as quiet as possible. Wind
noise from open windows and road vibrations may prevent the system
from correctly recognizing spoken commands.
•After pressing the voice icon, wait until after the tone sounds and
Listening appears before saying a command. Any command spoken
prior to this does not register with the system.
•Speak naturally, without long pauses between words.
•At any time, you can interrupt the system while it is speaking by
pressing the voice icon.
Voice Settings
Voice settings allow you to customize the level of system interaction,
help and feedback. The system defaults to standard interaction, which
uses candidate lists, and confirmation prompts as these provide the
highest level of guidance and feedback.
Interaction Mode: Novice mode provides detailed interaction and
guidance while the advanced mode has less audible interaction and more
tone prompts.
Navigation System (If Equipped) 359
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Confirmation Prompts: The system uses these short questions to
confirm your voice request. If turned off, the system simply makes a best
guess as to what you requested. The system may still occasionally ask
you to confirm settings.
SYSTEM MENU FEATURES
Your system offers many menu features, such as allowing you to adjust
the touchscreen brightness, time and language, feedback and system
settings. You can access these options by pressing the MENU hard
button.
If you select: You can:
Display Brightness allows you to adjust screen
brightness by touching + or -.
Contrast allows you to adjust screen contrast
by touching + or -.
Day/Night Mode allows you to select Day
mode, Night mode or have the system
automatically switch for you by selecting Auto
mode.
Daytime Color allows you to select a light or
dark color for daytime screen lighting.
Note: When the headlamps are on under very
bright outdoor light conditions, the system
remains in day mode, even if night is selected.
Clock Display Clock allows you to turn the clock
on or off.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with an
in-dash analog clock, you can set the time on
this screen, but it may not appear in the
status bar for viewing purposes.
Format allows you to switch between 12–
and 24–hour clock display.
Auto Time Zone allows you to have the
system automatically switch the time
whenever you enter a new time zone.
Note: The system does not implement
daylight savings time.
Restore Defaults allows you to restore
system defaults.
360 Navigation System (If Equipped)
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
If you select: You can:
Feedback Settings Touch Screen Button Beep allows you to
select when the system sounds an audible
tone: All Buttons (whenever any system
button is touched), Touch Screen (only when
touchscreen selections are made) or Off (no
audible tones at all).
Voice Volume allows you to change
navigation voice and audible tone volume by
touching + or -.
Satellite Radio Channel Name allows you
to choose to display the satellite radio
channel name.
Voice Recognition Interaction Mode
allows you to choose the level of system
interaction and feedback. Standard is the
default and provides the most interaction and
feedback using prompts. Advanced uses less
feedback and prompts.
Voice Recognition Confirmation allows you
to choose level of voice command
confirmation. Selecting On causes the system
to always ask to confirm a command.
Selecting Off causes the system to ask for
confirmation less frequently.
Voice Recognition User Profile allows you
to switch between user profiles.
Train the system to better recognize your
voice. Two profiles can be created; see Using
voice recognition earlier in this section.
Manage Voice Rec. User profiles allows
you to edit Profile 1 or 2 by creating a new
profile or deleting a previously created profile.
Navigation System (If Equipped) 361
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
If you select: You can:
System Settings Language allows you to choose between
English, Spanish and French.
Units allows you to choose between English
and Metric measurements.
Keyboard Layout allows you to choose
between an ABC or QWERTY keyboard.
Delete Stored Items allows you to choose
to delete all of the entries from Address Book,
Previous Destinations, Avoid Areas, Saved
Photos and Voice Recognition Profiles. Touch
View to see what entries have been stored.
Restore Factory Default Settings allows
you to restore factory default settings.
Valet Mode Lock and unlock the system using a four-digit
PIN.
Note: The PIN can be reset by
simultaneously pressing and holding presets 1
and 5 while on the PIN entry screen. After
approximately five seconds, the system
transitions to the valet mode screen indicating
that the PIN is reset. Once you have reset the
PIN, the system then allows you to set a new
PIN.
Voice Control Set the system to automatically listen for USB
or SYNC voice commands first. This
eliminates the need to say “USB” or “User
Device” before any SYNC media commands.
362 Navigation System (If Equipped)
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
ENTERTAINMENT
Your system offers many media options. You can access these options
using the touchscreen or voice commands.
AM/FM Radio
Press the RADIO hard button.
To change between AM, FM1 and FM2, touch the AM or FM
tab. You can also access satellite radio by pressing this button.
See SIRIUS satellite radio later in this section for more information.
When you select: You can:
Show Options Scan allows you to hear a brief sampling of
all radio stations.
Scan Presets allows you to hear a brief
sampling of all stations stored in the memory
presets.
Autoset Presets allows you to store the
strongest local stations available in the AM
and FM frequency bands.
HD Radio turns HD radio on. This allows you
to receive radio broadcasts digitally (where
available), providing free, crystal-clear sound.
See the HD Radio™ information in the
following section.
*
Multicast allows you to choose which HD
radio broadcast you would like to receive.
When HD Radio broadcasts are available, this
button appears if the selected station has
more than one digital broadcast. HD1 signifies
the main programming status and is available
in analog and digital broadcasts. Any
additional multicast stations (HD2 through
HD8) broadcast digitally. You can access these
by pressing Multicast. See the HD Radio™
information in the following section.
**
Show Presets View the preset stations. Save a station by
pressing and holding one of the memory
preset areas. There is a brief mute while the
radio saves the station. Sound returns when
finished.
Navigation System (If Equipped) 363
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Set PTY/All Select a category of music you would like to
search for and then choose to either seek or
scan for the stations.
**
Note: The system scans the frequency band
three times for the chosen program type. If
the program type is unavailable in your
reception range, the system returns to the
previous station.
*
This feature is only available in the United States.
**
This feature is only available on the FM1 and FM2 radio tabs in the
United States.
Audio and Radio Voice Commands
If you are listening to the audio system, press the voice button
on the steering wheel control. When prompted, say any of the
commands in the following chart.
If you are not listening to the audio system, press the voice button and,
after the tone, say “Audio”, then any of the commands in the following
chart.
“AUDIO”
“CD” “Line in” “Sirius”
“Disc” “Off ” “SYNC”
“DVD” “On” “USB”
“Headphones” “Phone” “User Device”
“Headphones off” “Radio” “Video CD”
“Jukebox” “Read Message” “Help”
364 Navigation System (If Equipped)
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
If you are listening to the radio, press the voice button on the
steering wheel control. When prompted, say any of the
commands in the following chart.
If you are not listening to the radio, press the voice button and, after the
tone, say “Radio”, then any of the commands in the following chart.
“RADIO”
“<530–1710>” “FM2” “Store preset <1–6>”
“<87.7–107.9>” “FM2 preset <1–6>” “Store AM preset
<1–6>”
“AM” “Off ” “Store FM 1 preset
<1–6>”
“AM <530–1710>” “On” “Store FM 2 preset
<1–6>”
“AM preset <1–6>” “Preset <1–6>” “Store autoset presets”
“FM <87.7–107.9>” “Seek down” “Tune”
**
“FM1” “Seek up” “Help”
“FM1 preset <1–6>” “Store”
*
*
If you have said, “Store”, see the following “Store” chart.
**
If you have said, “Tune”, see the following “Tune” chart.
“TUNE”
“<530–1710>” “AM preset <1–6>” “FM2”
“<87.7–107.9>” “FM <87.7–107.9>” “FM2 preset <1–6>”
“AM” “FM1” “Preset <1–6>”
“AM <530–1710>” “FM1 preset <1–6>” “Help”
“STORE”
“Preset <1–6>”
“AM preset <1–6>”
“FM 1 preset <#>”
“FM 2 preset <#>”
“Autoset presets”
Navigation System (If Equipped) 365
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
HD Radio™ Information (If Available)
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not available in all markets.
HD Radio technology is the digital evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your
system has a special receiver that allows it to receive digital broadcasts
(where available) in addition to the analog broadcasts, it already
receives. Digital broadcasts provide a better sound quality than analog
broadcasts with free, crystal-clear audio and no static or distortion. For
more information, and a guide to available stations and programming,
please visit www.hdradio.com.
When HD Radio is on and you tune to a station broadcasting HD Radio
technology, you may notice the following indicators on your screen:
HD) logo blinks when acquiring a digital station and stays solid
when digital audio is playing. When this logo is available, you
may also see Title and Artist fields on-screen.
Multicast indicator appears in FM mode (only) if the current station is
broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts. The highlighted numbers signify
available digital channels where new or different content is available.
HD1 signifies the main programming status and is available in analog and
digital broadcasts. Other multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are only
available digitally.
When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you can access the following
functions:
When you select: You can:
Scan Hear a brief sampling of all available stations.
This feature still works when HD Radio
reception is on, although it does not scan for
HD2-HD7 channels. You may see the HD logo
appear if the station has a digital broadcast.
Seek Hear the next strong radio station.
If the current station has multiple digital
broadcasts, the multicast indicator appears.
Press Seek repeatedly to advance through all
available broadcasts. If you are on the last
multicast channel, press Seek to advance to
the next strong station.
366 Navigation System (If Equipped)
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Tune Go up and down the frequency in individual
increments.
If the current station has multiple digital
broadcasts, the multicast indicator appears.
Press Tune repeatedly to advance through all
available broadcasts. If you are on the last
broadcast channel, press to advance to the
next frequency on the band.
Set PTY/All Select a category of music you would like to
search for and then choose to either seek or
scan for the stations.
Note: The system scans the frequency band
three times for the chosen program type. If
the program type is unavailable in your
reception range, the system returns to the
previous station.
Multicast Allows you to choose which HD radio
broadcast you would like to receive. When HD
Radio broadcasts are available, this button
appears if the selected station has more than
one digital broadcast. HD1 signifies the main
programming status and is available in analog
and digital broadcasts. Any additional
multicast stations (HD2 through HD8)
broadcast digitally. You can access these by
pressing Multicast.
Navigation System (If Equipped) 367
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
To save a multicast
station as a preset
When the channel is active on-screen, press
and hold a memory preset slot until the sound
returns. There is a brief mute while the radio
saves the station. Sound returns when
finished. When recalling a HD2 or HD3
memory preset, there is a mute before the
digital audio plays, as the system must once
again acquire the digital signal.
As with any saved radio station, you cannot
access the saved station if your vehicle is
outside the station’s reception area.
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Potential Reception Issues
Reception area If you are listening to a multicast station and
you are on the fringe of the reception area,
the station may mute due to weak signal
strength.
If you are listening to HD1, the system
switches back to the analog broadcast until
the digital broadcast is available again.
However, if you are listening to any of the
possible HD2-HD7 multicast channels, the
station mutes and stay muted unless it is able
to connect to the digital signal again.
Station blending When the system first receives a station
(aside from HD2-HD7 multicast stations), it
first plays the station in the analog version.
Once the receiver verifies the station is an HD
Radio station, it shifts to the digital version.
Depending on the station quality, you may
hear a slight sound change when the station
changes from analog to digital. Blending is the
shift from analog to digital sound or digital
back to analog sound.
368 Navigation System (If Equipped)
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
In order to provide the best possible experience, use the contact form to
report any station issues found while listening to a station broadcasting
with HD Radio technology. Independent entities own and operate each
station. These stations are responsible for ensuring all audio streams and
data fields are accurate.
Potential Station Issues
Issue Cause Action
Echo, stutter, skip or
repeat in audio.
Increase or decrease
in audio volume.
This is poor time
alignment by the radio
broadcaster.
No action required.
This is a broadcast
issue.
Sound fading or
blending in and out.
The radio is shifting
between analog and
digital audio.
No action required.
The reception issue
may clear up as you
continue to drive.
There is an audio
mute delay when
selecting HD2 or HD3,
multicast preset or
Direct Tune.
The digital multicast is
not available until the
HD Radio broadcast is
decoded. Once
decoded, the audio is
available.
No action required.
This is normal
behavior. Wait until
the audio is available.
Cannot access HD2 or
HD3 multicast channel
when recalling a
preset or from a direct
tune.
The previously stored
multicast preset or
direct tune is not
available in your
current reception area.
No action required.
The station is not
available in your
current location.
Text information does
not match currently
playing audio.
Data service issue by
the radio broadcaster.
Fill out the station
issue form at website
listed below.
*
There is no text
information shown for
currently selected
frequency.
Data service issue by
the radio broadcaster
Fill out the station
issue form at website
listed below.
*
HD2-HD7 stations not
found when Scan is
pressed.
Pressing Scan disables
HD2-HD7 channel
search.
No action required.
This is normal
behavior.
*
http://www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio_station_experiences
Navigation System (If Equipped) 369
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital
Corp. U.S. and foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD and HD Radio
logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp. Ford Motor
Company and iBiquity Digital Corp. are not responsible for the content
sent using HD Radio technology. Content may be changed, added or
deleted at any time at the station owner’s discretion.
HD Radio Voice Commands
If you are listening to the radio, press the voice button on the
steering wheel control. When prompted, say any of the
commands in the following chart.
If you are not listening to the radio, press the voice button and, after the
tone, say “Radio”, then any of the commands in the following chart.
“RADIO”
“<87.7 - 107.9> HD <1–8>”
“FM <87.7-107.9> HD <1-8>”
“Tune”
*
“Help”
*
If you have said, “Tune”, see the following “Tune” chart.
“TUNE”
“<87.7 - 107.9> HD <1–8>”
“FM <87.7-107.9> HD <1-8>”
“Tune HD <1-8>”
“Help”
370 Navigation System (If Equipped)
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
SIRIUS® Satellite Radio (If Activated)
Press the RADIO hard button, then select SAT on the
touchscreen.
When you select: You can:
SAT123 Press this button to access three different
satellite radio modes (SAT1, SAT2 or SAT3).
Scan Press this button to hear a brief sampling of
all satellite radio channels within the current
genre.
Scan Presets Press these buttons to hear a brief sampling
of all channels stored in the memory presets.
Channel Guide See a list of channels sorted by genre and
also skip or lock out certain channels. Select
the desired genre and choose a channel by
pressing the channel name button. You can
then choose to Skip or Lock a certain
channel. A skipped channel is not accessible
using the tune knob, scan or seek functions.
(To access the skipped channel, select Direct
Tune and enter the channel number.) You can
only access a locked channel by entering the
Channel Guide and then entering the system’s
PIN.
Direct Tune Enter the desired satellite channel number
using the on-screen keypad.
Set Genre Press this button to choose from a list of
genres. Once you choose a genre, and you
press SEEK, it only looks for channels in that
genre.
Navigation System (If Equipped) 371
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Memo Press this button to save a song title and
artist to the system. When the saved song is
playing on any satellite radio channel, the
system alerts you with a pop-up in the lower
status bar. You can either tune to the station
or ignore the pop-up. When you are in the
Memo screen, the following options are
available:
Refresh allows you to refresh the current
artist and title information.
Song Alert allows you to store the song
information displayed in the Title Field. The
next time the stored song plays, the system
displays an audio and visual notification.
Artist Alert allows you to store the artist
information currently displayed in the Artist
Field. The next time the artist plays, the
system alerts you with a pop-up.
Alert On/Off allows you to select Artists and
Titles that you would like the system to alert
you to when they are playing on other
channels.
Note: SIRIUS® does not support the Alert
feature on all channels. Ford Motor Company
shall not be responsible for Alert feature
variation.
Show Presets Display presets at the bottom of the screen.
372 Navigation System (If Equipped)
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
SIRIUS® Satellite Radio Voice Commands
If you are listening to SIRIUS satellite radio, press the voice
button on the steering wheel control. When prompted, say any
of the commands in the following chart.
If you are not listening to SIRIUS satellite radio, press the voice button
and, after the tone, say “Sirius”, then any of the commands in the
following chart.
“SIRIUS”
“<0–233>” “Seek up”
“<Channel name>” “Sirius off”
“Preset <#>” “Sirius On”
“SAT 1” “Store”
*
“SAT 1 preset <#>” “Store preset <1–6>”
“SAT 2” “Store SAT1 preset <1–6>”
“SAT 2 preset <#>” “Store SAT2 preset <1–6>”
“SAT 3” “Store SAT3 preset <1–6>”
“SAT 3 preset <#>” “Tune”
**
“Seek down ” “Help”
*
If you have said, “Store”, see the following “Store” chart.
**
If you have said, “Tune”, see the following “Tune” chart.
“STORE”
“Preset <1–6>”
“SAT1 preset <1–6>”
“SAT2 preset <1–6>”
“SAT3 preset <1–6>”
“TUNE”
“<0–233>” “SAT 2”
“<Channel name>” “SAT 2 preset <#>”
“Preset <#>” “SAT 3”
“SAT 1” “SAT 3 preset <#>”
“SAT 1 preset <#>” “Help”
Navigation System (If Equipped) 373
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
SIRIUS® Information
Note:
SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right to change, rearrange, add or
delete programming including canceling, moving or adding particular
channels, and its prices, at any time, with or without notice to you. Ford
Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming changes.
SIRIUS satellite radio is a
subscription-based satellite radio
service that broadcasts a variety of
music, sports, news, weather, traffic
and entertainment programming.
Your factory-installed SIRIUS
satellite radio system includes
hardware and a limited subscription term that begins on the date of sale
or lease of your vehicle. See your authorized dealer for availability.
For more information on extended subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a list of SIRIUS satellite radio
channels, and other features, please visit www.siriusxm.com in the
United States, www.sirius.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUS at 1-888-539-7474.
Satellite radio electronic serial number (ESN): You need your ESN
to turn on, modify or track your satellite radio account. The ESN is on
the System Information Screen (SR ESN: XXXXXXXXXXXX). To access
your ESN, touch the I button on the navigation screen, and then select
the System Info tab.
Potential reception issues
Antenna
obstructions
For optimal reception performance, keep the
antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep
luggage and other materials as far away from
the antenna as possible.
Terrain Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels,
freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree
foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with
your reception.
Station overload When you pass a ground-based
broadcast-repeating tower, a stronger signal may
overtake a weaker one and the audio system
may mute.
Satellite radio
signal interference
Your display may show ACQUIRING... to
indicate the interference and the audio system
may mute.
374 Navigation System (If Equipped)
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Troubleshooting tips
Radio Display Condition Possible Action
Acquiring... Radio requires more
than two seconds to
produce audio for the
selected channel.
No action required.
This message should
disappear shortly.
Sat Fault/SIRIUS
System Failure
There is an internal
module or system
failure present.
If this message does
not clear shortly, or
with an ignition key
cycle, your receiver
may have a fault. See
your authorized dealer
for service.
Invalid Channel. The channel is no
longer available.
Tune to another
channel or choose
another preset.
Unsubscribed Channel. Your subscription does
not include this
channel.
Contact SIRIUS at
1-888-539-7474 to
subscribe to the
channel, or tune to
another channel.
No Signal. The signal is lost from
the SIRIUS satellite or
SIRIUS tower to your
vehicle antenna.
The signal is blocked.
When you move into
an open area, the
signal should return.
Updating. Update of channel
programming in
progress.
No action required.
The process may take
up to three minutes.
Call SIRIUS
1–888–539–7474.
Your satellite service is
no longer available.
Contact SIRIUS at
1-888-539-7474 to
resolve subscription
issues.
No Channels Available. All the channels in the
selected channels are
either skipped or
locked.
Use the channel guide
to turn off the Lock
or Skip function on
that station.
Subscription Updated. SIRIUS has updated
the channels available
for your vehicle.
No action required.
Navigation System (If Equipped) 375
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
CD
Press the MEDIA hard button, and then select the CD tab on
the touchscreen. If there is no disc in the system, NO DISC
appears in the status bar and you cannot access the CD screen.
Once a disc is loaded, you can choose from Scan, Compress, Repeat,
Shuffle, Track List and Record.
When you select: You can:
Scan Hear a brief sampling of all listenable tracks.
Compress Turn the compression feature on and off. This
feature boosts more quiet music and lowers
louder music to minimize the need for volume
adjustment.
Repeat Hear the selected track continuously.
Shuffle Play the tracks in a random order.
Track List View a list of the tracks.
Record Save the CD or CD tracks into the Jukebox to
hear them played later.
CD Voice Commands
If you are listening to a CD, press the voice button on the
steering wheel control. When prompted, say any of the
commands in the following chart.
If you are not listening to a CD, press the voice button and, after the
tone, say “CD”, then any of the commands in the following chart.
“CD”
“Folder mode” “Play next folder” “Repeat folder”
“Folder mode off” “Play next track” “Repeat off”
“Pause” “Play previous folder” “Repeat track”
“Play” “Play previous track” “Shuffle”
“Play folder <1–255>” “Play track <1–512>” “Shuffle off”
“Play folder <1–255>
track <1–512>”
“Repeat” “Help”
376 Navigation System (If Equipped)
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
MP3
Press the MEDIA hard button, and then select the CD tab on
the touchscreen. If there is no disc in the system, NO DISC
appears in the status bar and you cannot access the CD screen.
Once a disc is loaded, you can choose from Scan, Compress, Repeat,
Shuffle, Folder Mode and Folder List.
When you select: You can:
Scan Hear a brief sampling of all listenable tracks.
Compress Turn the compression feature on and off. This
feature boosts more quiet music and lowers
louder music to minimize the need for volume
adjustment.
Repeat Hear the selected track continuously.
Shuffle Play the tracks in a random order.
Folder Mode Listen to and seek through songs within the
current folder.
Folder List Press this button to access and view folders
on the disc. Select the root folder (if
available), then any other folder on the disc.
DVD
Note: Your system only plays NTSC formatted discs. The system does
not support PAL format.
Your system allows you to play DVD audio and video discs. Make sure
your vehicle is in position P(vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission) or the parking brake is engaged (vehicles equipped with a
manual transmission). This allows you to be able to view and hear the
DVD. If your vehicle is moving, the video does not play.
When you select: You can:
Title Go to the disc’s main title screen.
Menu Go to the disc’s main menu.
Cursor Controls Navigate to the desired menu selections.
Navigation System (If Equipped) 377
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Settings Video Display Settings allows you to adjust
the brightness and contrast. You can also
choose to return to the default settings by
pressing Restore Default.
Audio Language allows you to choose which
language you would like the DVD audio track
to play in.
Subtitle Display allows you to turn subtitles
off and on.
Subtitle Language allows you to choose the
subtitle language.
Aspect Ratio allows you to choose wide, full,
normal or cinema display.
Angle Mark Notification allows you to have
more viewing angles from which to select.
Once you have made your selection, press
ENTER to confirm.
Search Go to a specific title or chapter using the
keypad.
Note: Some of the above settings are disc-dependent and availability and
operation may vary.
During disc play, you can also touch
the screen to access the virtual
remote, which allows you to Move
Controls on the screen, as well as
use the cursor controls, Enter and
Return to navigate and select within
the menus.
Dolby® noise reduction is manufactured under license from Dolby®
Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby® and the double-D symbol are
registered trademarks of Dolby® Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
378 Navigation System (If Equipped)
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Disc Voice Commands
If you are listening to or watching a disc, press the voice button
on the steering wheel control. When prompted, say any of the
commands in the following chart.
If you are not listening to or watching a disc, press the voice button and,
after the tone, say “Disc”, then any of the commands in the following chart.
“Disc”
“Folder mode” “Play next chapter” “Play previous track”
“Folder mode off” “Play next folder” “Play title <1–99>”
“Menu” “Play next group” “Play track <1–512>”
“Pause” “Play next title” “Repeat”
“Play” “Play next track” “Repeat off”
“Play chapter
<1–999>”
“Play previous
chapter”
“Shuffle”
“Play folder <1–255>” “Play previous folder” “Shuffle off”
“Play folder <1–255>
track <1–512>”
“Play previous group” “Title menu”
“Play group <1–9>” “Play previous title” “Help”
DVD Voice Commands
If you are watching a DVD, press the voice button on the
steering wheel control. When prompted, say any of the
commands in the following chart.
If you are not watching a DVD, press the voice button and, after the
tone, say “DVD”, then any of the commands in the following chart.
“DVD”
“Menu” “Play next title”
“Menu title” “Play next track <1–512>”
“Pause” “Play previous chapter”
“Play” “Play previous title”
“Play chapter <1–999>” “Play previous track”
“Play group <1–9>” “Play title <1–99>”
“Play next chapter” “Repeat”
“Play next group” “Repeat off”
Navigation System (If Equipped) 379
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Video CD Voice Commands
If you are watching a video CD, press the voice button on the
steering wheel control. When prompted, say any of the
commands in the following chart.
If you are not watching a video CD, press the voice button and, after the
tone, say “Video CD”, then any of the commands in the following chart.
Video CD voice commands
“Play”
“Pause”
“Play next track”
“Play previous track”
“Play track <1–512>”
“Help”
Jukebox
Your system has a Jukebox feature, which allows you to save desired
tracks or CDs to the hard drive for later access. The hard drive can store
up to 10 GB* (164 hours; approximately 2472 tracks) of music. The
system contains a Gracenote® media database that allows for display of
song title, album title, and album cover art. After saving music to the
hard drive, you can access and play your music by specific tracks, artists,
albums or genres. You can even choose to create and access your own
playlists.
*Note: 1 GB equals one billion bytes (1000000000B).
Recording Music to Your Jukebox
To record music to your jukebox:
1. Insert a CD, and then select Record on the touchscreen.
2. Select individual tracks or press Select All to record the entire CD.
Note: The system automatically saves all tracks if you do not select
any.
3. Press the Start Recording button.
The progress shows at the bottom of the screen.
Note: If you are not actively listening to the disc during recording, the
record rate is much quicker (as fast as five minutes).
380 Navigation System (If Equipped)
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Accessing the Music in Your Jukebox
Once you have saved music to your jukebox, you can then choose
different ways to play the music.
1. Press the MEDIA hard button on the navigation system.
2. Select the Jukebox tab on the touchscreen. You can then select from
the following options:
When you select: You can:
Scan Hear a brief sampling of all listenable tracks.
Repeat Hear the selected track continuously.
Shuffle Play the tracks in a random order.
Music library Access all of your saved music. You can
choose to view or play the material in the
following ways:
Play All Tracks allows you to play all tracks
saved in the jukebox.
Playlist allows you to play your own playlist.
Play genre allows you to have the system
play only music from a specific genre.
Play artist allows you to have the system
play only music by a specific artist.
Play album allows you to have the system
play only music from a specific album.
Options Edit Playlists allows you to edit your
playlists.
Edit Music Library Contents allows you to
make changes to the content in your music
library.
Update Album Information from CD
Database allows you to update the residing
album information from the Gracenote®
database after a recent software update.
Hard Disk Drive Information allows you to
access the system’s hard drive disc
information, such as used space, free space
and total capacity.
CD Database Information allows you to
access the CD database information.
Navigation System (If Equipped) 381
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Creating a Playlist
Press the MEDIA hard button, and then select the Jukebox tab on the
touchscreen.
1. Select Options.
2. Select Edit Playlists, then which playlist you would like to create.
3. Select which category you would like to access from your saved
music.
4. Select the desired songs and then press Add. The system shows you
the currently selected songs. You can choose to Edit Name to change
the name of the playlist, Delete Playlist to remove it, Add Tracks to
the playlist or Sort Playlist.
5.
After you change the playlist, select Edit Name to rename your playlist.
Jukebox Voice Commands
If you are listening to music stored in the jukebox, press the
voice button on the steering wheel control. When prompted, say
any of the commands in the following chart.
If you are not listening to music stored in the jukebox, press the voice
button and, after the tone, say “Jukebox”, then any of the commands in
the following chart.
“JUKEBOX”
“Pause” “Play playlist <name>” “Search album
<name>”
3
“Play”
1
“Play previous track” “Search artist
<name>”
3
“Play album <name>”
1
“Play track <name>”
1
“Search genre
<name>”
3
“Play artist <name>”
1
“Refine album
<name>”
2
“Search track
<name>”
3
“Play genre <name>” “Refine artist
<name>”
2
“Shuffle”
“Play next track” “Repeat” “Shuffle off”
“Play playlist <1–5>” “Repeat off” “Help”
1
You can say these commands at any time during listening to the jukebox
and after any of the search and refine commands.
2
You can narrow your search beyond the “Search” command by using
these commands.
3
While listening to the jukebox, press the voice button on the steering
wheel control. When prompted, you may say any of these commands.
382 Navigation System (If Equipped)
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
User Device
If your vehicle is equipped with SYNC®, there is a User Device tab. For
more information, see the SYNC® chapter.
Line In (Auxiliary Input Jack)
Your vehicle is equipped with an audio input jack, which allows you to
plug a portable audio device into your vehicle’s audio system. To turn
this feature on, press the MEDIA hard button on the system.
For more information on the auxiliary input jack, see Auxiliary input
jack in the Audio Systems chapter.
INFORMATION
Under the Information menu, you can access features such as Where Am
I? and SIRIUS® Travel Link™, view your calendar, see system
information and get basic system help.
Press the I (Information) hard button to access these features.
Where Am I?
Press the I button and select the Where Am I? tab. The system gives you
your current GPS location (latitude and longitude), the current street
you are on as well as the street in front and behind your vehicle position
along with distance information.
Note: Not all tab selections shown here are available in all markets.
Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
SIRIUS® Travel Link™
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off
the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your
vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while
driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the
use of electronic devices while driving.
Note: A paid subscription is required to access and use these features.
Go to www.siriusxm.com/travellink for more information.
SIRIUS Travel Link can help you locate the best gas prices, find movie
listings, get current traffic alerts, access the current weather map, get
accurate ski conditions and scores to current sports games.
Navigation System (If Equipped) 383
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Press the I (information) button, then select Sirius Travel Link.
Choose from any of the following services:
When you select: You can:
Traffic On Route Identify traffic incidents on your route, nearby
your vehicle’s current location or near any of
your favorite places (if programmed).
Traffic Nearby
My Places
Weather View the nearby weather, current weather, or
the 5–day forecast for the chosen area. Select
Weather Map to see storms, radar
information, charts and winds. Select Area to
select from a listing of weather locations. In
addition, you can view ski conditions for a
specific area.
Fuel Prices View fuel prices at stations close to your
vehicle’s location or on an active navigation
route.
Movie Listings View nearby movie theaters and their show
times (if available).
Sports Info. View scores and schedules from a variety of
sports. You can also save up to 10 favorite
teams for easier access. The score
automatically refreshes when a game is in
progress.
384 Navigation System (If Equipped)
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
SIRIUS Travel Link Voice Commands
Press the voice button and, after the tone, say “Travel Link”,
then any of the commands in the following chart:
“TRAVEL LINK”
“5–day weather forecast” “NBA schedule”
“Baseball schedule” “NBA scores”
“Baseball scores” “NFL schedule”
“College basketball schedule” “NFL scores”
“College basketball scores” “NHL schedule”
“College football schedule” “NHL scores”
“College football scores” “Sports schedule”
*
“Fuel prices” “Sports scores”
**
“Golf leaders” “Traffic”
“Golf schedule” “Travel link help”
“Motor sports order” “Weather”
“Motor sports schedule” “Weather map”
“Movie listings”
*
If you have said, “Sports schedule”, you may say any of the commands
in the “Sports schedule” chart:
**
If you have said, “Sports scores”, you may say any of the commands in
the “Sports scores” chart:
“SPORTS SCHEDULES”
“Baseball schedule” “NBA schedule”
“College basketball schedule” “NFL schedule”
“College football schedule” “NHL schedule”
“Golf schedule” “Travel link help”
“Motor sports schedule”
“SPORTS SCORES”
“Baseball scores” “NBA scores”
“College basketball scores” “NFL scores”
“College football scores” “NHL scores”
“Golf leaderboard” “Travel link help”
“Motor sports results”
Navigation System (If Equipped) 385
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Calendar
Press the I (information) button, then select Calendar. You can
then select which month you would like to view by using the
arrow buttons or selecting Go to Today.
You can view calendars from one previous year and the next 10 years.
Note: Not all tab selections may be available in all markets. Check with
your authorized dealer for availability.
System Information
Press the I (information) button, then select System
Information.
In this screen, you can view the following options:
•Phone number for your Customer Service Center
•Current system versions installed
•Current SIRIUS® Radio ESN
•SIRIUS® Travel Link™ ESN.
Note: Not all tab selections may be available in all markets. Check with
your authorized dealer for availability.
Help
The Help screen allows you to view basic information about controls and
driving restrictions as well as traffic legend information and basic voice
commands available in various modes.
If you select: You can:
Basic Operation View hard buttons on your navigation system.
Press the desired icon to view the button
description.
Driving Restriction View the system’s driving restriction.
Traffic Legend View the color code for the Speed and Flow
of roads on the navigation system. You can
also select Traffic Incidents to help you
differentiate between viewed and unviewed
incidents.
Voice Commands View a brief listing of possible voice
commands in a specific mode.
386 Navigation System (If Equipped)
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
SOUND
The sound menu allows you to access and adjust settings, such as Bass,
Treble, Fade, Balance, Speed Compensated Volume (SCV) and the
visualizer. Press the SOUND hard button.
When you select: You can:
Bass/Treble Increase or decrease levels by pressing + or -.
Balance/Fade Adjust the sound between the left and right
speakers and front and rear speakers.
SCV Have the system automatically adjust radio
volume according to vehicle speed to
compensate for road and wind noise. Select a
level of compensation between 1 and 7 by
pressing the corresponding button.
Visualizer Turn the audio visualizer display on or off.
Note: Turning the visualizer setting to off
does not remove the visualizer on the home
screen. You need to select a different view in
order to remove the visualizer.
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Your navigation system allows you to set a destination by using your
touchscreen or voice commands.
The navigation system contains map coverage for the United States,
Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin Islands, Canada and Mexico.
Disclaimer
A disclaimer appears once per ignition cycle when the DEST button is
pressed. Press Accept to agree to the terms and access navigation
functions. If you do not press Accept, you only have access to
non-navigation functions. The disclaimer has information similar to the
following:
•Always obey local traffic regulations.
•We recommend you program the system only when your vehicle is at
a stop.
•Some functions are unavailable while your vehicle is moving to help
minimize distraction.
•Periodic map updates are available at an additional cost.
Navigation System (If Equipped) 387
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Route Guidance in Incompletely Mapped Areas
There are some rural areas in the map database without fully verified
roads. When the system is in route guidance mode, and the navigation
system encounters these incompletely mapped areas, the system alerts
you by:
•announcing, “Entering an area with incomplete map data; please
follow with caution”
•saying, “with caution” in the first route guidance instruction before
each turn
•highlighting the route on the map in yellow
•highlighting the incomplete mapped streets in yellow on the turn list
•coloring the guidance arrows yellow.
Please drive using extra caution when driving in these areas as the
mapping information may be somewhat inaccurate.
Programming a Destination Using the Touchscreen
1. Press the DEST hard button.
2. Select from the following:
Quick
Note: Items on this screen are selectable at any speed.
Cancel Route Touch this button to cancel the current route.
Emergency Touch this button to find hospitals and police
stations close to your vehicle’s location. The
system may display up to 25 locations.
Favorite
Destinations
This feature stores your home location and up
to five address book entries. To set an entry,
touch a preset button, and then follow the
screen prompts. The system displays the icon
and name associated with the location.
388 Navigation System (If Equipped)
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Quick
Note: Items on this screen are selectable at any speed.
Find Nearest POI Select up to five different points of interest
(POI) favorites that you can search for while
your vehicle is moving. You can change these
categories at any time but the default
categories are:
•Gas Station
•ATM
•Restaurant
•Accommodations
•Parking Garage
When you select a category, the system
displays a list in order of distance from your
vehicle’s location. The Quick POI search range
automatically increases to a 50 mile (80 km)
radius if no point of interest is found within
the default 25 mile (40 km) radius.
You also have the option to select List All
Categories, which displays a list of all
categories.
Previous
Destination
Touch this button to select one of your
previous destinations.
Address Book Touch this button to set an entry in your
address book as your destination.
Navigation System (If Equipped) 389
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Standard
Note: Items on this screen are selectable only when your vehicle is
moving at speeds slower than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Address Book You can store up to 25 entries, which you can
use as destinations, waypoints and areas to
avoid. You can sort the entries alphabetically,
by date or icon.
*
Previous
Destination
You can store up to 20 recently used
destinations and waypoints. Duplicate entries
do not appear in the list. Adding a new entry
deletes the oldest one from the list.
*
Phone Number Touch this button to search for a destination
using the phone number of a saved point of
interest or address book entry. Use the keypad
on the screen to enter the phone number.
Map Touch this button to select a point on the map
as a destination or waypoint by using the map
cursor.
390 Navigation System (If Equipped)
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Standard
Note: Items on this screen are selectable only when your vehicle is
moving at speeds slower than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Street Address Touch this button to program a street address
as a destination or waypoint.
•State/Prov lets you use the keyboard to
type or you can select the area to search from
a list. The system bases the search on your
vehicle’s current position or the previous
selection. You can set the Auto Fill feature on
to have the system fill in some information for
you based on readings from your vehicle’s
GPS. Depending on your settings, the system
may automatically fill in some of the location
information for you.
•City is the name of the city of your
destination.
•Street is the name of the street where your
destination is located. You can search for
street names, which include numbers, such as
Second Street, if the name is entered using
digits or a spelling of the number. This is valid
for street names containing numbers 1 (One)
through 20 (Twenty) or 1st (First) through
20th (Twentieth) only.
•Number is the address number.
•List is where you can view and select from
a list of State, Province, Territories, Cities and
Names. The system provides a list based on
the first letter you type into a field.
Navigation System (If Equipped) 391
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Standard
Note: Items on this screen are selectable only when your vehicle is
moving at speeds slower than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Point of Interest
(POI)
Touch this button to select a point of interest
on the map as a destination or waypoint.
There are three ways to search for a point of
interest:
1. Enter a city name in the City field and a
point of interest in the Name field.
2. Enter a city name in the City field, choose a
point of interest category by selecting
Category, and then enter the point of interest
name in the Name field. You can also press
List. However, if there are more than 999
choices, this option is not possible.
3. Choose a category from the point of interest
by selecting Category and enter a point of
interest name in the Name field.
•State/Prov lets you use the keyboard to
type or you can select the area to search from
a list. The system bases the search on your
vehicle’s current position or the previous
selection. You can set the Auto Fill feature on
to have the system fill in some information for
you. Depending on your settings, the system
may automatically fill in some of the location
information for you.
•City is the name of the city.
•Category is where you select the desired
point of interest category or subcategory.
•Name is where you select to search for a
point of interest using a full or partial name.
•List is where you can view and select from
a list of State, Province, Territories, Cities and
Names. The system provides a list based on
the first letter you type into a field.
392 Navigation System (If Equipped)
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Standard
Note: Items on this screen are selectable only when your vehicle is
moving at speeds slower than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Freeway
Entrance/Exit
Touch this button to select an entrance and
exit point to a freeway you select. You can sort
the entrance and exit point alphabetically or in
order of distance from your vehicle’s position.
You can then select the point you choose as a
destination or waypoint.
•State/Prov lets you use the keyboard to
type or you can select the area to search from
a list. The system bases the search on your
vehicle’s current position or the previous
selection. You can set the Auto Fill feature on
to have the system fill in some information for
you. Depending on your settings, the system
may automatically fill in some of the location
information for you.
•Freeway is the name of the freeway you
can search.
•List is where you can view and select from
a list of State, Province, Territories, Cities and
Names. The system provides a list based on
the first letter you type into a field.
Navigation System (If Equipped) 393
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Standard
Note: Items on this screen are selectable only when your vehicle is
moving at speeds slower than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Intersection Touch this button to select an intersection
point. Enter the name of the first street, then
the first letter of the second street. The
system displays possible intersection matches
based on the first letter of the second street.
Once you choose the intersection, you can sort
the list alphabetically or in order of distance
from your vehicle’s position.
•State/Prov lets you use the keyboard to
type or you can select the area to search from
a list. The system bases the search on your
vehicle’s current position or the previous
selection. You can set the Auto Fill feature on
to have the system fill in some information for
you. Depending on your settings, the system
may automatically fill in some of the location
information for you.
•City is the name of the city you can search.
•Street # 1 is the name of the first street
you can search. You can search for street
names, which include numbers, such as
Second Street, if the name is entered using
digits or a spelling of the number. This is valid
for street names containing numbers 1 (One)
through 20 (Twenty) or 1st (First) through
20th (Twentieth) only.
•Street # 2 is the field where you enter the
first letter of the second street to search.
•List is where you can view and select from
a list of State, Province, Territories, Cities and
Names. The system provides a list based on
the first letter you type into a field.
394 Navigation System (If Equipped)
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
*
To delete all stored Address Book and Previous Destination entries at
once:
1. Press the MENU hard button.
2. Select the System Settings tab.
3. Press the View button for Delete Stored Items.
4. Select Address Book or Previous Destinations.
Edit Route
Cancel Route Touch this button to cancel the current route.
Detour Touch this button to avoid an area on the
current route.
View Route Touch this button to view the entire current
route. You can select from the following
options:
•View Destination displays a close-up view
of the destination and surrounding area.
•View Next Waypoint displays a close-up
view of next waypoint and surrounding area.
•View Turn List displays the turn list for the
current destination. You can also select a road
on the turn list to avoid, if you choose.
Edit Route
Preferences
Once you select a route as the fastest or
shortest route, you can also select from to:
•Avoid Freeways
•Avoid Tollroads
•Avoid Ferries
•Avoid Time Restrictions
•Avoid HOV Lanes
Edit Traffic
Preferences
Touch this button to edit traffic preferences.
*
Edit
Destination/Waypoints
Touch this button to edit the destination or
waypoints of a defined route.
Edit Turn List Touch this button to delete or avoid a road in
the current turn list.
*
This feature requires activation of SIRIUS® Travel Link™, which is only
available in the United States.
Navigation System (If Equipped) 395
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Programming a Destination Using Voice Commands
Press the voice button on the steering wheel.
If you want to: Say:
Enter an address. “Destination street address”
Enter an intersection. “Destination intersection”
Find a point of interest
(POI) by its category.
“Destination nearest <POI category>” or
“Destination nearest POI”
Find a point of interest
(POI) by its name.
“Destination POI”
Go to a previous
destination.
“Destination previous destination”
Go to your home
location.
“Destination home”
Use a nametag from
your address book.
“Destination <nametag>”
Get help. “Help”
Note: If you set the system language to French or Spanish, you need to
spell out the city and street names. When in Spelling Mode, you may
speak letters or say, “Line #”. The system works even if you have made a
spelling error.
POI Categories
Your system offers a variety of POI (Point of Interest) categories.
Main Categories
Food/Drink & Dining Automotive
Travel & Transportation Shopping
Financial Entertainment & Arts
Emergency Recreation & Sports
Community Government
Health & Medicine Domestic Services
396 Navigation System (If Equipped)
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Within these main categories, there are subcategories, which contain
more listings:
Subcategories
Restaurant
Auto Dealership
Parking
Public Transit
Home & Garden
Education
Personal Care Services
Setting Your Navigation Preferences
Select settings for the system to take into account when planning your
route. Press the NAV hard button.
Map Preferences
Map Content Street Name displays current street name
during route guidance.
Time to Dest displays the distance to your
destination and the estimated time of arrival.
Speed Limit displays the speed limit of
major roads during route guidance.
Breadcrumbs displays your vehicle’s
previously traveled route with white dots. The
dots display for about the last 140 miles
(225 km) driven.
Point of Interest (POI) Icons displays
point of interest icons on the map.
Map View Full Map displays the map in full screen with
turn icons in the upper right corner.
Arrow/Map divides the screen in two. The
map is on the left and upcoming turn
information on the right.
Turn List/Map divides the screen in two. The
map is on the left and turn list on the right.
Navigation System (If Equipped) 397
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Map Preferences
Bird’s Eye View ON provides an elevated map perspective.
OFF turns the feature off.
Adjust Angle offers six different map angles.
Turn List Format Top-to-Bottom starts the turn instructions
from the top.
Bottom-to-Top starts the turn instructions
from the bottom.
Route Preferences
Preferred Route Have the system display the shortest or
fastest route first.
Avoid Freeways Have the system avoid freeways when
calculating a route.
Avoid Tollroads Have the system avoid tollroads when
calculating a route.
Avoid Ferries Have the system avoid ferries when
calculating a route.
Avoid Time
Restricted Roads
Have the system avoid time-restricted roads
when calculating a route. These roads may
have turn, lane or entrance restrictions based
on local traffic conditions or seasonal
restrictions.
398 Navigation System (If Equipped)
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Traffic Preferences
*
Traffic Icons to
overlay on Map
Touch this button to display a list of map
icons that you can turn off and on. The list of
icons includes:
•Weather related incidents
•Road work
•Incident
•Accident
•Closed road
Traffic Flow Overlay Touch this button to have the map show
traffic flow coloring on major roads. Roads
display in green (all clear), yellow (reduced
speed) and red (stopped).
Traffic Alert
Notification
Touch this button to have the system traffic
incidents notifications along your programmed
route.
If you select Yes, a traffic incident pop-up
asks you to consider or ignore the traffic
incident. If you select Yes again, this makes
the system recalculate a new route for you.
If you select Ignore, this closes the pop-up
window..
*
This feature requires activation of SIRIUS® Travel Link™, which is only
available in the United States.
Navigation Preferences
Guidance Prompts Voice guides you with tones and voice
prompts only.
Tone only guides you with tones only.
OFF turns off any voice or tone prompts.
Auto-Fill
State/Province
When this feature is on, the system
automatically fills in the state or province
information based on your vehicle’s GPS
location. If you live in a border area, you may
not want this feature on.
Navigation System (If Equipped) 399
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Navigation Preferences
Avg. Speed:
Residential
When this feature is on, the system displays
the average speed on a residential road,
initially set to 25 mph (40 km/h). You can
change the setting for your driving
preferences. This setting helps estimate your
arrival time at a destination based on your
driving preferences.
Avg. Speed: Main
Roads
When this feature is on, the system displays
the average speed on a main road, initially set
to 45 mph (72 km/h). You can change the
setting for specific roads and for your driving
preferences. This setting helps estimate your
arrival time at a destination based on your
driving preferences.
Avg. Speed: Freeways When this feature is on, the system displays
the average speed on a freeway, initially set to
65 mph (105 km/h). You can change the
setting for specific roads and for your driving
preferences. This setting helps estimate your
arrival time at a destination based on your
driving preferences.
Parking POI
Notification
When this feature is on, the system displays
available parking accommodations around a
destination that is part of your route.
Low Fuel POI
Notification
When this feature is on, the system displays
gas station icons when the fuel level is low.
Fuel Price Display When this feature is on, the system displays
fuel prices at local stations. You can choose to
display prices for Unleaded or Diesel.
*
400 Navigation System (If Equipped)
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Navigation Preferences
Calibrate Position allows you to adjust the direction of
your vehicle by pressing the arrow buttons on
the screen.
Distance allows you to recalibrate the
distance to the destination while your vehicle
is moving.
Restore Default
Settings
Touch the Reset button to return the settings
to factory defaults.
*
This feature requires activation of SIRIUS® Travel Link™, which is only
available in the United States.
Avoid Areas
Add Add items and areas that you want the
system to avoid when creating a route for
you. The system does its best to avoid these.
*
*
There may be some situations where it is impossible to avoid the
selection(s) completely. For example, if a destination or waypoint is
located in the area that is set to avoid, the system cannot avoid it.
Map Mode
Press the MAP hard button to view map mode. When in map mode, an
icon appears on the upper left side of the screen; this is a toggle button
to change the view of the map display.
Roads on the map display in a variety of colors. Building footprints
display areas of major buildings in the 20 largest cities in the U.S. These
areas may be displayed depending on their size and the map zoom level.
Heading Up always shows the direction of forward travel to be
upward on the screen. This view is available for map scales up to
2.5 miles (4 kilometers). The system remembers this setting for
larger map scales, but shows the map in North Up only. If the
scale returns below this level, the system restores Heading Up.
Heading Up Bird’s Eye View provides an elevated perspective of
the map. You can adjust the viewing angle through the map
preferences.
Navigation System (If Equipped) 401
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
North Up always shows the northern direction to be upward on
the screen.
Map Icons
Vehicle mark shows the current location of your vehicle. It
stays in the center of the map display, except when in scroll
mode.
Scroll cursor allows you to scroll the map; the fixed icon is in
the center of the screen. The map position closest to the cursor
is in a window on the top center part of the screen.
Address book entry default icon(s) indicates the location on
the map of an address book entry. This is the default symbol
shown after the entry has been stored to the Address Book by any
method other than the map. You can select from any of the 22
icons available. You can use each icon more than once.
Home indicates the location on the map currently stored as the
home position. You can only save one address from the Address
Book as your Home entry. You cannot change this icon.
POI (Point Of Interest) icons display on the map and can be
turned on or turned off. Up to about 56 subcategories can display
on the map one at a time.
Starting point indicates the starting point of a planned route.
Waypoints indicate the location of a waypoint on the map. The
number inside the circle is different for each waypoint and
represents the position of the waypoint in the route list.
Destination symbol indicates the ending point of a planned
route.
Next maneuver point indicates the location of the next turn
on the planned route.
S
2
402 Navigation System (If Equipped)
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
No GPS symbol indicates that insufficient GPS satellite signals
are available for accurate map positioning. This icon may display
under normal operation in an area with poor GPS access.
Map Scale
The map display scale has 17 levels, ranging from
0.02 miles (.03 kilometers) to 1000 miles (1600 kilometers).
The system synchronizes the zoom scales for North Up,
Heading Up and 3D Map views.
In Map Mode, you can zoom in or out, changing the display
scale, by touching an arrow button on the left side of the
screen.
In Full Screen Map Mode, touch this button to use the Zoom Direct
buttons. The Zoom Direct buttons represent the most common map
scales. Touch a button to show the map at the desired scale. The scale is
approximate and based on the width of the map scale button. The size of
the scale varies based on the screen size.
Map Scrolling
Single scroll mode allows you to press and release on the map display
to bring the pressed position to the center of the screen. The scroll
mode times out after five minutes of inactivity.
Continuous scroll mode allows you to touch and hold the map to
begin scrolling continuously in one of eight directions closest to the point
that is touched. The scroll continues until you release the map, and
increases in speed after three seconds. This is not possible if your
vehicle is moving. The scroll mode times out after five minutes of
inactivity.
Bird’s eye view scroll mode is available after you touch the map twice,
and then selecting one of the eight buttons that appear on the map, in
an oval pattern, in the center of the screen. The two scroll buttons
located in the farthest east and west points of the oval, scroll in a circle
around the vehicle. The remaining buttons scroll in a straight line in the
arrow direction.
0.1 mi
Navigation System (If Equipped) 403
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Quick-touch Buttons
When in map mode, touch anywhere on the map display to access the
following options:
When you select: You can:
Set as Dest Select a scrolled location on the map as your
destination. You may scroll the map by
pressing your index finger on the map display.
When you reach the desired location, simply
let go and then press Set as Dest.
Set as Waypoint Set the current location as a waypoint.
Save to Address
Book
Save the current location to the address book.
POI Icons On/Off Select point of interest icons to display on the
map. You can select up to three icons to
display on the map at the same time.
View Traffic Adjust the map display to the right scale. This
scale allows the entire route to be visible in
the screen.
View/Edit Route Access these features when a route is active:
Cancel route.
Edit route preferences.
Edit destination/waypoints.
View route.
Edit traffic preferences.
*
Edit turn list.
*
This feature requires activation of SIRIUS® Travel Link™, which is only
available in the United States.
Navteq is the digital map provider for the navigation application. If you
find map data errors, you may report them directly to Navteq by going to
http://mapreporter.navteq.com. Navteq evaluates all reported map errors
and responds with the result of their investigation by e-mail.
404 Navigation System (If Equipped)
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Navigation Map Updates
Annual navigation map updates are available for purchase through your
dealership, by calling 1-800-NAVMAPS (in Mexico, call
01–800–557–5539) or going to www.navigation.com/ford. You need to
specify the make and model of your vehicle to determine if there is an
update available.
Navigation Voice Commands
When in navigation mode, press the voice button on the
steering wheel control. After the tone, say “Navigation”, then
any of the following commands:
“NAVIGATION”
“Cancel next waypoint” “Show destination”
“Cancel route” “Show heading up”
“Destination”
*
“Show map”
“Destination <nametag>” “Show next waypoint”
“Destination <POI category>” “Show north up”
“Destination home” “Show route”
“Destination intersection” “Show turn list”
“Destination nearest <POI
category>”
“Voice off”
“Destination nearest POI” “Voice on”
“Destination POI” “Voice volume decrease”
“Destination previous
destination”
“Voice volume increase”
“Destination street address” “Zoom in”
“Detour” “Zoom out”
“Play nametags” “Help”
“Repeat instruction”
Navigation System (If Equipped) 405
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
*
If you have said the command, “Destination”, you may say any of the
above commands or commands in the following Destination chart.
“DESTINATION”
“<nametag>”
“<POI category>”
“Home”
“Intersection”
“Nearest <POI category>”
“Nearest POI”
“POI”
“POI category”
“Previous destination”
“Street address”
“Help”
Troubleshooting
Symptoms Possible Cause Action
Focus error. The system is not able
to play a reproduced
disc.
Contact your
authorized dealer.
Bad disc. You inserted the disc
upside down or the
system is unable to
read the information
on the disc.
The system
automatically ejects
the disc.
Track error. The system is unable
to reproduce a corrupt
MP3 file.
The system skips the
corrupted track.
Invalid disc detected. The disc is either dirty
or contains an
unsupported format.
Wipe the disc with a
dry, soft cloth from
the center to the outer
edge of the disc.
406 Navigation System (If Equipped)
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Symptoms Possible Cause Action
A pop-up window
displays “Address not
found” or “Address
range does not exist.
Show the midpoint of
the street?”
The house number
entered does not exist
in the map database.
Press NO and enter a
valid number for the
specified street, or
press YES to view the
middle point of the
street.
A pop-up window
displays “Navigation
fault. A system fault
has been detected that
may cause the
navigation to perform
abnormally. Please
contact your
dealership.”
There is a system
hardware or software
error.
Contact your
authorized dealer.
A pop-up window
displays “Error. PINs
did not match. Please
re-enter.”
You entered the wrong
PIN to unlock the
system for valet mode.
Press OK and try
entering your PIN
again. If it does not
work, contact your
authorized dealer.
A pop-up window
displays “Invalid PIN.
Please Re-enter.”
You entered the wrong
PIN.
Press OK and try
entering your PIN
again to lock the
system.
Navigation System (If Equipped) 407
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
SYNC® End User License Agreement (EULA)
•You have acquired a device (“DEVICE”) that includes software
licensed by Ford Motor Company and its affiliates (“FORD MOTOR
COMPANY”) from an affiliate of Microsoft Corporation (“MS”). Those
installed software products of MS origin, as well as associated media,
printed materials, and “online” or electronic documentation (“MS
SOFTWARE”) are protected by international intellectual property laws
and treaties. The MS SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All rights
reserved.
•The MS SOFTWARE may interface with and/or communicate with, or
may be later upgraded to interface with and/or communicate with
additional software and/or systems provided by FORD MOTOR
COMPANY. The additional software and systems of FORD MOTOR
COMPANY origin, as well as associated media, printed materials, and
“online” or electronic documentation (“FORD SOFTWARE”) are
protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties. The
FORD SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All rights reserved.
•The MS SOFTWARE and/or FORD SOFTWARE may interface with
and/or communicate with, or may be later upgraded to interface with
and/or communicate with additional software and/or systems provided by
third party software and service suppliers. The additional software and
services of third party origin, as well as associated media, printed
materials, and “online” or electronic documentation (“THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE”) are protected by international intellectual property laws
and treaties. The THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All
rights reserved.
•The MS SOFTWARE, FORD SOFTWARE and THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE hereinafter collectively and individually will be referred to as
⬙SOFTWARE.⬙
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT (“EULA”), DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY
THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE, INCLUDING
BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICE, WILL
CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA (OR
RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT).
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This EULA grants you the
following license:
•You may use the SOFTWARE as installed on the DEVICE and as
otherwise interfacing with systems and/or services provide by or
through FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third party software and
service providers.
408 Appendices
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
DESCRIPTION OF OTHER RIGHTS AND LIMITATIONS:
•Speech Recognition: If the SOFTWARE includes speech recognition
component(s), you should understand that speech recognition is an
inherently statistical process and that recognition errors are inherent
in the process. Neither FORD MOTOR COMPANY nor its suppliers
shall be liable for any damages arising out of errors in the speech
recognition process.
•Limitations on Reverse Engineering, Decompilation and
Disassembly: You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or
disassemble nor permit others to reverse engineer, decompile or
disassemble the SOFTWARE, except and only to the extent that such
activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this
limitation.
•Limitations on Distributing, Copying, Modifying and Creating
Derivative Works: You may not distribute, copy, make modifications
to or create derivative works based on the SOFTWARE, except and
only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by
applicable law notwithstanding this limitation.
•Single EULA: The end user documentation for the DEVICE and
related systems and services may contain multiple EULAs, such as
multiple translations and/or multiple media versions (e.g., in the user
documentation and in the software). Even if you receive multiple
EULAs, you are licensed to use only one (1) copy of the SOFTWARE.
•SOFTWARE Transfer: You may permanently transfer your rights
under this EULA only as part of a sale or transfer of the DEVICE,
provided you retain no copies, you transfer all of the SOFTWARE
(including all component parts, the media and printed materials, any
upgrades, and, if applicable, the Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and
the recipient agrees to the terms of this EULA. If the SOFTWARE is
an upgrade, any transfer must include all prior versions of the
SOFTWARE.
•Termination: Without prejudice to any other rights, FORD MOTOR
COMPANY or MS may terminate this EULA if you fail to comply with
the terms and conditions of this EULA.
Appendices 409
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
•Security Updates/Digital Rights Management: Content owners use
the WMDRM technology included in your DEVICE to protect their
intellectual property, included copyrighted content. Portions of the
SOFTWARE on your DEVICE use WMDRM software to access
WMDRM-protected content. If the WMDRM software fails to protect
the content, content owners may ask Microsoft to revoke the
SOFTWARE’s ability to use WMDRM to play or copy protected
content. This action does not affect unprotected content. When your
DEVICE downloads licenses for protected content, you agree that
Microsoft may include a revocation list with the licenses. Content
owners may require you to upgrade the SOFTWARE on your DEVICE
to access their content. If you decline an upgrade, you will not be able
to access content that requires the upgrade.
•Consent to Use of Data: You agree that MS, Microsoft Corporation,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and systems suppliers,
their affiliates and/or their designated agent may collect and use
technical information gathered in any manner as part of product
support services related to the SOFTWARE or related services. MS,
Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software
and services suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agent
may use this information solely to improve their products or to
provide customized services or technologies to you. MS, Microsoft
Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and
systems suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agent may
disclose this information to others, but not in a form that personally
identifies you.
•Internet-Based Services Components: The SOFTWARE may
contain components that enable and facilitate the use of certain
Internet-based services. You acknowledge and agree that MS, Microsoft
Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agent may
automatically check the version of the SOFTWARE and/or its
components that you are utilizing and may provide upgrades or
supplements to the SOFTWARE that may be automatically
downloaded to your DEVICE.
•Additional Software/Services: The SOFTWARE may permit FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and service suppliers, MS,
Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates and/or their designated agent to
provide or make available to you SOFTWARE updates, supplements,
add-on components, or Internet-based services components of the
SOFTWARE after the date you obtain your initial copy of the
SOFTWARE (“Supplemental Components”).
410 Appendices
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
If FORD MOTOR COMPANY or third party software and services
suppliers provide or make available to you Supplemental Components
and no other EULA terms are provided along with the Supplemental
Components, then the terms of this EULA shall apply.
If MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates and/or their designated agent
make available Supplemental Components, and no other EULA terms are
provided, then the terms of this EULA shall apply, except that the MS,
Microsoft Corporation or affiliate entity providing the Supplemental
Component(s) shall be the licensor of the Supplemental Component(s).
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates
and/or their designated agent reserve the right to discontinue without
liability any Internet-based services provided to you or made available to
you through the use of the SOFTWARE.
•Links to Third Party Sites: The MS SOFTWARE may provide you
with the ability to link to third party sites through the use of the
SOFTWARE. The third party sites are not under the control of MS,
Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates and/or their designated agent.
Neither MS nor Microsoft Corporation nor their affiliates nor their
designated agent are responsible for (i) the contents of any third
party sites, any links contained in third party sites, or any changes or
updates to third party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any other form of
transmission received from any third party sites. If the SOFTWARE
provides links to third party sites, those links are provided to you only
as a convenience, and the inclusion of any link does not imply an
endorsement of the third party site by MS, Microsoft Corporation,
their affiliates and/or their designated agent.
•Obligation to Drive Responsibly: You recognize your obligation to
drive responsibly and keep attention on the road. You will read and
abide with the DEVICE operating instructions particularly as they
pertain to safety and assumes any risk associated with the use of the
DEVICE.
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA: If the SOFTWARE is provided
by FORD MOTOR COMPANY separate from the DEVICE on media such
as a ROM chip, CD ROM disk(s) or via web download or other means,
and is labeled “For Upgrade Purposes Only” or ⬙For Recovery Purposes
Only⬙you may install one (1) copy of such SOFTWARE onto the
DEVICE as a replacement copy for the existing SOFTWARE, and use it
in accordance with this EULA, including any additional EULA terms
accompanying the upgrade SOFTWARE.
Appendices 411
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS: All title and intellectual
property rights in and to the SOFTWARE (including but not limited to
any images, photographs, animations, video, audio, music, text and
“applets,” incorporated into the SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed
materials, and any copies of the SOFTWARE, are owned by MS,
Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, or their affiliates or
suppliers. The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may not copy the
printed materials accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title and intellectual
property rights in and to the content which may be accessed through use
of the SOFTWARE is the property of the respective content owner and
may be protected by applicable copyright or other intellectual property
laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no rights to use such content.
All rights not specifically granted under this EULA are reserved by MS,
Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software
and service providers, their affiliates and suppliers. Use of any on-line
services which may be accessed through the SOFTWARE may be
governed by the respective terms of use relating to such services. If this
SOFTWARE contains documentation that is provided only in electronic
form, you may print one copy of such electronic documentation.
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is
subject to U.S. and European Union export jurisdiction. You agree to
comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to
the SOFTWARE, including the U.S. Export Administration Regulations,
as well as end-user, end-use and destination restrictions issued by U.S.
and other governments. For additional information, see
http://www.microsoft.com/exporting/.
TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant you any rights in connection
with any trademarks or service marks of FORD MOTOR COMPANY, MS,
Microsoft Corporation, third party software or service providers, their
affiliates or suppliers.
PRODUCT SUPPORT: Product support for the SOFTWARE is not
provided by MS, its parent corporation Microsoft Corporation, or their
affiliates or subsidiaries. For product support, please refer to FORD
MOTOR COMPANY instructions provided in the documentation for the
DEVICE. Should you have any questions concerning this EULA, or if you
desire to contact FORD MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason, please
refer to the address provided in the documentation for the DEVICE.
412 Appendices
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
No Liability for Certain Damages: EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY
LAW, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR
SERVICES SUPPLIERS, MS, MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND THEIR
AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT,
SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING
FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF
THE SOFTWARE. THIS LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY
REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL
MS, MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND/OR THEIR AFFILIATES BE
LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF U.S. TWO HUNDRED
FIFTY DOLLARS (U.S.$250.00).
•THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY
EXPRESSLY BE PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW VEHICLE.
Adobe
Contains Adobe® [Flash® Player] or [AIR®] technology by Adobe
Systems Incorporated. This [Licensee Product] contains [Adobe® Flash®
Player] [Adobe® AIR®] software under license from Adobe Systems
Incorporated, Copyright 娀1995-2009 Adobe Macromedia Software LLC.
All rights reserved. Adobe, Flash and AIR are trademarks of Adobe
Systems Incorporated.
End user notice
Microsoft® Windows® Mobile for Automotive Important Safety
Information
This system Ford SYNC™ contains software that is licensed to
Manufacturer FORD MOTOR COMPANY by an affiliate of Microsoft
Corporation pursuant to a license agreement. Any removal, reproduction,
reverse engineering or other unauthorized use of the software from this
system in violation of the license agreement is strictly prohibited and
may subject you to legal action.
Read and follow instructions
Before using your Windows Automotive-based system, read and follow all
instructions and safety information provided in this end user manual
(“User’s Guide”). Not following precautions found in this User’s Guide
can lead to an accident or other serious consequences.
Appendices 413
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Keep User’s Guide in Vehicle
When kept in the vehicle, the User’s Guide will be a ready reference for
you and other users unfamiliar with the Windows Automotive-based
system. Please make certain that before using the system for the first
time, all persons have access to the User’s Guide and read its
instructions and safety information carefully.
WARNING: Operating certain parts of this system while driving
can distract your attention away from the road, and possibly
cause an accident or other serious consequences. Do not change
system settings or enter data non-verbally (using your hands) while
driving. Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner before attempting
these operations. This is important since while setting up or changing
some functions you might be required to distract your attention away
from the road and remove your hands from the wheel.
General operation
Voice Command Control
Functions within the Windows Automotive-based system may be
accomplished using only voice commands. Using voice commands while
driving allows you to operate the system without removing your hands
from the wheel.
Prolonged Views of Screen
Do not access any function requiring a prolonged view of the screen
while you are driving. Pull over in a safe and legal manner before
attempting to access a function of the system requiring prolonged
attention. Even occasional short scans to the screen may be hazardous if
your attention has been diverted away from your driving task at a critical
time.
Volume Setting
Do not raise the volume excessively. Keep the volume at a level where
you can still hear outside traffic and emergency signals while driving.
Driving while unable to hear these sounds could cause an accident.
Use of Speech Recognition Functions
Speech recognition software is inherently a statistical process which is
subject to errors. It is your responsibility to monitor any speech
recognition functions included in the system and address any errors.
414 Appendices
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Navigation Features
Any navigation features included in the system are intended to provide
turn by turn instructions to get you to a desired destination. Please make
certain all persons using this system carefully read and follow
instructions and safety information fully.
Distraction Hazard
Any navigation features may require manual (non-verbal) setup.
Attempting to perform such set-up or insert data while driving can
seriously distract your attention and could cause an accident or other
serious consequences. Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner before
attempting these operations.
Let Your Judgment Prevail
Any navigation features are provided only as an aid. Make your driving
decisions based on your observations of local conditions and existing
traffic regulations. Any such feature is not a substitute for your personal
judgment. Any route suggestions made by this system should never
replace any local traffic regulations or your personal judgment or
knowledge of safe driving practices.
Route Safety
Do not follow the route suggestions if doing so would result in an unsafe
or illegal maneuver, if you would be placed in an unsafe situation, or if
you would be directed into an area that you consider unsafe. The driver
is ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the vehicle and
therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the suggested
directions.
Potential Map Inaccuracy
Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of changes in
roads, traffic controls or driving conditions. Always use good judgment
and common sense when following the suggested routes.
Emergency Services
Do not rely on any navigation features included in the system to route
you to emergency services. Ask local authorities or an emergency
services operator for these locations. Not all emergency services such as
police, fire stations, hospitals and clinics are likely to be contained in the
map database for such navigation features.
Appendices 415
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Map Data DVD End User License Terms
The data (“Data”) is provided for your personal, internal use only and
not for resale. It is protected by copyright, and is subject to the following
terms and conditions which are agreed to by you, on the one hand, and
(Licensee). (“Licensee”) and its licensors (including their licensors and
suppliers) on the other hand. Such licensors include NAVTEQ North
America, LLC. Without limiting the foregoing, you agree that NAVTEQ
North America, LLC shall have the right to enforce these Terms directly
against you. 娀2013 NAVTEQ. All rights reserved. The Data for areas of
Canada includes information taken with permission from Canadian
authorities, including: 娀Her Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, 娀
Queen’s Printer for Ontario, 娀Canada Post Corporation, Geobase ®.
Terms and Conditions
Personal use only: You agree to use this Data together with your FLM
navigation system for solely personal, non commercial purposes for
which you were licensed, and not for service bureau, time-sharing or
other similar purposes. Accordingly, but subject to the restrictions set
forth in the following paragraphs, you may copy this Data only as
necessary for your personal use to (i) view it, and (ii) save it, provided
that you do not remove any copyright notices that appear and do not
modify the Data in any way. You agree not to otherwise reproduce copy,
modify, decompile, disassemble or reverse engineer any portion of this
Data, and may not transfer or distribute it in any form, for any purpose,
except to the extent permitted by mandatory laws.
Restrictions: Except where you have been specifically licensed to do so
by (Licensee), and without limiting the preceding paragraph, you may
not (a) use this Data with any products, systems, or applications
installed or otherwise connected to or in communication with vehicles,
capable of vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch, real time route
guidance, fleet management or similar applications; or (b) with or in
communication with any positioning devices or any mobile or
wireless-connected electronic or computer devices, including without
limitation cellular phones, palmtop and handheld computers, pagers, and
personal digital assistants or PDAs.
No warranty: This Data is provided to you “as is,” and you agree to use
it at your own risk. (Licensee) and its licensors (and their licensors and
suppliers) make no guarantees, representations or warranties of any
kind, express or implied, arising by law or otherwise, including but not
limited to, content, quality, accuracy, completeness, effectiveness,
reliability, fitness for a particular purpose, usefulness, use or results to be
obtained from this Data, or that the Data or server will be uninterrupted
or error-free.
416 Appendices
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Disclaimer of warranty:(Licensee) and its licensors (including their
licensors and suppliers) disclaim any warranties, express or implied, of
quality, performance, merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose or
non infringement. Some States, Territories and Countries do not allow
certain warranty exclusions, so to that extent the above exclusion may
not apply to you.
Disclaimer of liability: (Licensee) and its licensors (including their
licensors and suppliers) shall not be liable to you: in respect of any
claim, demand or action, irrespective of the nature of the cause of the
claim, demand or action alleging any loss, injury or damages, direct or
indirect, which may result from the use or possession of the information;
or for any loss of profit, revenue, contracts or savings, or any other
direct, indirect, incidental, special or consequential damages arising out
of your use of or inability to use this information, any defect in the
information, or the breach of these terms or conditions, whether in an
action in contract or tort or based on a warranty, even if (Licensee) or
its licensors have been advised of the possibility of such damages. Some
States, Territories and Countries do not allow certain liability exclusions
or damages limitations, so to that extent the above may not apply to you.
Export control: You agree not to export from anywhere any part of the
Data provided to you or any direct product thereof except in compliance
with, and with all licenses and approvals required under, applicable
export laws, rules and regulations.
Termination for Breach or Bankruptcy: (Licensee) and its licensors,
including NAVTEQ, may terminate this Agreement if you breach any of
its terms. Upon any such termination, you shall immediately cease your
use of the Data and return all copies thereof to LICENSEE or NAVTEQ,
as instructed. (Licensee) and its licensors also may terminate this
Agreement in the event that you (i) fail to pay license fees due for the
Data, or (ii) if any of the following events occur affecting you: (a)
voluntary bankruptcy or application for bankruptcy; (b) involuntary
bankruptcy or application for bankruptcy not discharged within sixty
(60) days; (c) appointment of receiver for all or a portion of your assets;
or (d) any assignment for the benefit of creditors.
Entire agreement: These terms and conditions constitute the entire
agreement between (Licensee) (and its licensors, including their
licensors and suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject matter hereof,
and supersedes in their entirety any and all written or oral agreements
previously existing between us with respect to such subject matter.
Appendices 417
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Governing law: The above terms and conditions shall be governed by
the laws of the Illinois, without giving effect to (i) its conflict of laws
provisions, or (ii) the United Nations Convention for Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods, which is explicitly excluded. You agree to
submit to the jurisdiction of Illinois for any and all disputes, claims and
actions arising from or in connection with the Data provided to you
hereunder.
FCC Compliance
Changes or modifications not approved by Ford could void user’s
authority to operate the equipment. This equipment has been tested and
found to comply with the limits with the Class B digital device, pursuant
to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference
to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to consult the dealer or an
experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Gracenote® Copyright
CD and music — related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright 娀
2000–2007 Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright 娀2000–2007
Gracenote. This product and service may practice one or more of the
following U.S. Patents #5,987,525; #6,061,680; #6,154,773, #6,161,132,
#6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459, #6,330,593, and other patents issued
or pending. Some services supplied under license from Open Globe, Inc.
for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote. The
Gracenote logo and logotype, and the ⬙Powered by Gracenote™⬙logo are
trademarks of Gracenote.
418 Appendices
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Gracenote® End User License Agreement (EULA)
This device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street
Emeryville, California 94608 (“Gracenote”).
The software from Gracenote (the “Gracenote Software”) enables this
device to do disc and music file identification and obtain music-related
information, including name, artist, track, and title information
(“Gracenote Data”) from online servers (“Gracenote Servers”), and to
perform other functions. You may use Gracenote Data only by means of
the intended End User functions of this device
This device may contain content belonging to Gracenote’s providers. If
so, all of the restrictions set forth herein with respect to Gracenote Data
shall also apply to such content and such content providers shall be
entitled to all of the benefits and protections set forth herein that are
available to Gracenote.
You agree that you will use the content from Gracenote (“Gracenote
Content”), Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Servers for your own personal, non-commercial use only. You agree not
to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Software or any Gracenote Data (except in a Tag associated with a music
file) to any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT
GRACENOTE CONTENT, GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY
PERMITTED HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive licenses to use the Gracenote Content,
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will
terminate if you violate these restrictions. If your licenses terminate, you
agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote,
respectively, reserve all rights in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and the Gracenote Servers and Gracenote Content, including
all ownership rights. Under no circumstances will either Gracenote
become liable for any payment to you for any information that you
provide, including any copyrighted material or music file information. You
agree that Gracenote may enforce its respective rights, collectively or
separately, under this agreement against you, directly in each company’s
own name.
Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical
purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to
allow Gracenote to count queries without knowing anything about who
you are. For more information, see the web page at www.gracenote.com
for the Gracenote Privacy Policy
Appendices 419
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM OF GRACENOTE DATA
AND THE GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED TO YOU “AS IS.”
NEITHER GRACENOTE MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING THE ACCURACY
OF ANY GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE GRACENOTE SERVERS OR
GRACENOTE CONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY AND
SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT TO DELETE DATA AND/OR
CONTENT FROM THE COMPANIES’ RESPECTIVE SERVERS OR, IN
THE CASE OF GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA CATEGORIES FOR ANY
CAUSE THAT GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO WARRANTY IS
MADE THAT EITHER GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE OR THAT
THE FUNCTIONING OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS
NOT OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY ENHANCED OR
ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO
PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE TO DISCONTINUE ITS
ONLINE SERVICES AT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER
GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED
BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE
FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY
LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER.
娀Gracenote 2007
420 Appendices
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
GENERAL MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?
Carefully following the maintenance schedule helps protect against major
repair expenses resulting from neglect or inadequate maintenance and
may help to increase the value of your vehicle when you sell or trade it.
Keep all receipts for completed maintenance with your vehicle.
We have established regular maintenance intervals for your vehicle based
upon rigorous testing. It is important that you have your vehicle serviced
at the proper times. These intervals serve two purposes; one is to
maintain the reliability of your vehicle and the second is to keep your
cost of owning your vehicle down.
It is your responsibility to have all scheduled maintenance performed and
to make sure that the materials used meet the specifications identified in
the Capacities and Specifications chapter of this owner’s manual.
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance invalidates warranty coverage
on parts affected by the lack of maintenance.
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your Dealership?
Factory-Trained Technicians
Service technicians participate in extensive factory-sponsored
certification training to help them become experts on the operation of
your vehicle. Ask your dealership about the training and certification
their technicians have received.
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft® Replacement Parts
Dealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft and Ford-authorized branded
re-manufactured replacement parts. These parts meet or exceed our
specifications. Parts installed at your dealership carry a nationwide
12-month or 12000-mile (20000 kilometers) parts and labor limited
warranty.
If you do not use Ford authorized parts they may not meet our
specifications and depending on the part, it could affect emissions
compliance.
Convenience
Many dealerships have extended evening and Saturday hours to make
your service visit more convenient and they offer one stop shopping.
They can perform any services that are required on your vehicle, from
general maintenance to collision repairs.
Scheduled Maintenance 421
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Note: Not all dealers have extended hours or body shops. Please contact
your dealer for details.
Protecting Your Investment
Maintenance is an investment that pays dividends in the form of
improved reliability, durability and resale value. To maintain the proper
performance of your vehicle and its emission control systems, it is
imperative that scheduled maintenance be completed at the designated
intervals.
Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built with multiple complex
performance systems. Every manufacturer develops these systems using
different specifications and performance features. That is why it is
important to rely upon your dealership to properly diagnose and repair
your vehicle.
Ford Motor Company has recommended maintenance intervals for various
parts and component systems based upon engineering testing. Ford Motor
Company relies upon this testing to determine the most appropriate
mileage for replacement of oils and fluids to protect your vehicle at the
lowest overall cost to you and recommends against maintenance schedules
that deviate from the scheduled maintenance information.
Ford strongly recommends using only genuine Ford, Motorcraft or
Ford-authorized remanufactured replacement parts because they are
engineered for your vehicle.
Additives and Chemicals
Ford Motor Company recommended additives and chemicals are listed in
this book and in the Workshop Manual. Additional chemicals or
additives not approved by Ford Motor Company are not recommended as
part of normal maintenance. Please consult your warranty information.
Oils, Fluids and Flushing
In many cases, fluid discoloration is a normal operating characteristic
and, by itself, does not necessarily indicate a concern or that the fluid
needs to be changed. However, discolored fluids that also show signs of
overheating and/or foreign material contamination should be inspected
immediately by a qualified expert such as the factory-trained technicians
at your dealership. Your vehicle’s oils and fluids should be changed at the
specified intervals or in conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a viable
way to change fluid for many vehicle sub-systems during scheduled
maintenance. It is critical that systems are flushed only with new fluid
that is the same as that required to fill and operate the system, or using
a Ford-approved flushing chemical.
422 Scheduled Maintenance
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Owner Checks and Services
Certain basic maintenance checks and inspections should be performed
every month or at six month intervals.
Check every month
Engine oil level.
Function of all interior and exterior lights.
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure.
Windshield washer fluid level.
Check every six months
Battery connections. Clean if necessary.
Body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary.
Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength.
Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary.
Hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if
necessary.
Parking brake for proper operation.
Safety belts and seat latches for wear and function.
Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, airbag, safety belt) for operation.
Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as
necessary.
Scheduled Maintenance 423
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Multi-point Inspection
In order to keep your vehicle running right, it is important to have the
systems on your vehicle checked regularly. This can help identify
potential issues and prevent major problems. Ford Motor Company
recommends the following multi-point inspection be performed at every
scheduled maintenance interval to help make sure your vehicle keeps
running great.
Multi-point inspection
Accessory drive belt(s) Horn operation
Battery performance Radiator, cooler, heater and A/C hoses
Engine air filter Suspension component for leaks or
damage
Exhaust system Steering and linkage
Exterior lamps and hazard
warning system operation
Tires (including spare) for wear and
proper pressure
**
Fluid levels
*
; fill if necessary Windshield for cracks, chips or pits
For oil and fluid leaks Washer spray and wiper operation
*
Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission, power
steering and window washer.
**
If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit, check the tire
sealant expiration Use By date on the canister. Replace as needed.
Be sure to ask your dealership service advisor or technician about the
multi-point vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive way to perform a
thorough inspection of your vehicle. It is your checklist that gives you
immediate feedback on the overall condition of your vehicle. You will
know what has been checked, what is okay, as well as those things that
may require future or immediate attention. The multi-point vehicle
inspection is one more way to keep your vehicle running great!
424 Scheduled Maintenance
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Scheduled Maintenance 425
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
NORMAL SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE AND LOG
Normal scheduled maintenance
Every 7500 miles
(12000 km) or six
months (whichever
comes first)
Change engine oil and filter.
Rotate tires
*
, inspect tire wear and measure
tread depth.
Inspect wheels and related components for
abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Perform multi-point inspection
(recommended).
Every 15000 miles
(24000 km) or
12 months (whichever
comes first)
Inspect automatic transmission fluid level.
Consult dealer for requirements.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums,
brake linings, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect engine cooling system strength and
hoses.
Inspect exhaust system and heat shields.
Inspect steering linkage, ball joints,
suspension, tie-rod ends, driveshaft and
U-joints. Lubricate if equipped with grease
fittings.
*
Vehicles equipped with dual rear wheels should rotate the front wheels
when specified; rear wheels only if unusual wear is noted.
426 Scheduled Maintenance
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Other maintenance items
Every 30000 miles
(48000 km)
Replace engine air filter.
Every 60000 miles
(96000 km)
Change automatic transmission fluid and filter
on 5–speed transmission. Consult dealer for
requirements.
Replace front wheel bearing grease and grease
seal if non-sealed bearings are used.
Every 97500 miles
(156000 km)
Replace spark plugs.
Every 105000 miles
(168000 km)
Change engine coolant.
*
Change rear axle fluid (Dana axles).
Inspect accessory drive belt(s).
**
Every 150000 miles
(240000 km)
Change automatic transmission fluid and filter
on 4–speed transmission. Consult dealer for
requirements.
Change rear axle fluid (non-Dana axles).
Replace accessory drive belt(s) if not replaced
within the last 100000 miles (160000 km).
Replace front wheel bearings and seals if
non-sealed bearings are used.
*
Initial replacement at six years or 105000 miles (168000 kilometers),
then every three years or 45000 miles (72000 kilometers).
**
If not replaced, inspect every 15000 miles (24000 kilometers).
Scheduled Maintenance 427
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Maintenance Schedule Log
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
428 Scheduled Maintenance
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
Scheduled Maintenance 429
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
430 Scheduled Maintenance
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
SPECIAL OPERATING CONDITIONS
If you operate your vehicle primarily in one of the more demanding
conditions listed below, you need to have some items maintained more
frequently. If you only occasionally operate your vehicle under these
conditions, it is not necessary to perform the additional maintenance. For
specific recommendations, see your dealership service advisor or technician.
Towing a trailer or car-top carrier
Inspect frequently,
service as required
Inspect and lubricate U-joints, if equipped with
grease fittings.
See axle maintenance items under Exceptions.
Every 5000 miles
(8000 km)
Inspect the wheels and related components for
abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Rotate tires*, inspect tires for wear and measure
tread depth.
Every 5000 miles
(8000 km) or six
months
Change engine oil and filter.
Inspect and lubricate U-joints, if equipped with
grease fittings.
Every 30000 miles
(48000 km)
Change automatic transmission fluid on 4–speed
transmission.
Replace front wheel bearing grease and grease
seals if non-sealed bearings are used.
*
Vehicles equipped with dual rear wheels should rotate the front wheels
when specified; rear wheels only if unusual wear is noted.
Extensive idling or low-speed driving for long distances as in
heavy commercial use (such as delivery, taxi, patrol car or
livery)
Every 5000 miles
(8000 km)
Inspect brake system.
Inspect wheels and related components for
abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Lubricate control arm and steering ball joints if
equipped with grease fittings.
Rotate tires*, inspect tires for wear and measure
tread depth.
Every 5000 miles
(8000 km) or six
months
Change engine oil and filter.
Inspect and lubricate U-joints, if equipped with
grease fittings.
Scheduled Maintenance 431
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Extensive idling or low-speed driving for long distances as in
heavy commercial use (such as delivery, taxi, patrol car or
livery)
Every 30000 miles
(48000 km)
Change automatic transmission fluid on 4–speed
transmission.
Replace front wheel bearing grease and grease
seals if non-sealed bearings are used.
Every 60000 miles
(96000 km)
Replace spark plugs.
*
Vehicles equipped with dual rear wheels should rotate the front wheels
when specified; rear wheels only if unusual wear is noted.
Operating in dusty or sandy conditions such as unpaved or
dusty roads
Inspect frequently,
service as required
Replace engine air filter.
Every 5000 miles
(8000 km)
Inspect the wheels and related components for
abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Rotate tires
*
, inspect tires for wear and measure
tread depth.
Every 5000 miles
(8000 km) or six
months
Change engine oil and filter.
Inspect and lubricate U-joints, if equipped with
grease fittings.
Every 30000 miles
(48000 km)
Change automatic transmission fluid on 4–speed
transmission.
Replace front wheel bearing grease and grease
seals if non-sealed bearings are used.
Every 50000 miles
(80000 km)
Change rear axle fluid.
*
Vehicles equipped with dual rear wheels should rotate the front wheels
when specified; rear wheels only if unusual wear is noted.
Exclusive use of E85 (flex fuel vehicles only)
Every oil change
interval
If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank full
with regular unleaded fuel.
432 Scheduled Maintenance
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Special Operating Condition Log
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
Scheduled Maintenance 433
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
434 Scheduled Maintenance
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
EXCEPTIONS
Normal vehicle axle maintenance: Rear axles and power take-off
units with synthetic fluid and light-duty trucks equipped with
Ford-design axles are lubricated for life; do not check or change fluid
unless a leak is suspected, service is required or the assembly has been
submerged in water. During long periods of trailer towing with outside
temperatures above 70°F (21°C) and at wide-open throttle for long
periods above 45 mph (72 km/h), non-synthetic rear axle fluids should
be changed every 3000 miles (4800 kilometers) or three months,
whichever comes first. This interval can be waived if the axle is filled
with 75W140 synthetic gear fluid meeting Ford specification
WSL-M2C192-A, part number F1TZ-19580-B or equivalent. Add friction
modifier XL-3 (EST-M2C118-A) or equivalent for complete refill of
Traction-Lok rear axles (see Technical specifications in the Capacities
and Specifications chapter for details).
Police/Taxi/Livery vehicle axle maintenance: Change rear axle fluid
every 100000 miles (160000 kilometers). Rear axle fluid change may be
waived if the axle was filled with 75W140 synthetic gear fluid meeting
Ford specification WSL-M2C192-A, part number FITZ-19580-B or
equivalent. Add four ounces (118 mL) of additive friction modifier XL-3
(EST-M2C118-A) or equivalent for complete refill of Traction-Lok rear
axles. The axle fluid should be changed anytime the axle has been
submerged in water.
California fuel filter replacement: If the vehicle is registered in
California, the California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission
warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle’s
useful life. Ford Motor Company, however, urges you to have all
recommended maintenance services performed at the specified intervals
and to record all vehicle service.
Hot climate oil change intervals: Vehicles operating in the Middle
East, North Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or locations with similar climates
using an American Petroleum Institute (API) Certified for Gasoline
Engines (Certification mark) oil of SM or SN quality, the normal oil
change interval is 5000 miles (8000 kilometers).
If the available API SM or SN oils are not available, then the oil change
service interval is 3000 miles (4800 kilometers).
Engine air filter replacement: Engine air filter life is dependent on
exposure to dusty and dirty conditions. Vehicles operated in these
conditions require frequent inspection and replacement of the engine air
filter.
Scheduled Maintenance 435
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
ENGINE COOLANT CHANGE RECORD
Initial change Six years or 105000 miles (168000 km)
(whichever comes first)
After initial change Every three years or 45000 miles (72000 km)
Engine Coolant Change Log
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
436 Scheduled Maintenance
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
911 Assist™ ..............................325
A
ABS (see Brakes) .....................132
Accessing call history/phone
book during active call .............314
Accessing the help screen .......386
Accessing the music in your
jukebox ..............................380–381
Accessing your media menu
features ......................................337
Accessing your phone menu
features ......................................316
Accessory delay ..........................73
Active call menu options .........314
Advanced menu options ...323, 344
Advanced menu options
(prompts, languages, defaults,
master reset, installing
applications) ..............................323
Airbag supplemental restraint
system ..........................................46
and child safety seats ..............47
description ................................46
disposal ......................................54
driver airbag ..............................46
passenger airbag .......................46
passenger deactivation
switch ........................................48
side airbag .................................46
Air cleaner filter .......219–220, 285
Air conditioning ....................92–93
manual heating and air
conditioning system ...........92–93
Ambulance packages ..................14
AM/FM .......................................363
Antifreeze
(see Engine coolant) ................202
Anti-lock brake system
(see Brakes) ..............................132
Anti-theft system ........................64
arming the system ....................64
AppLink™ .................................332
Audio system
Single CD ........................296–297
Audio system
(see Radio) ........................296–297
Automatic transmission
driving an automatic
overdrive .........................124, 127
fluid, adding ............................207
fluid, checking ........................207
fluid, refill capacities ..............280
fluid, specification ..................280
Auxiliary input jack (Line in) ..302
Auxiliary powerpoint ................105
Axle
lubricant specifications ..........280
refill capacities ........................280
traction lok ..............................131
B
Battery .......................................216
acid, treating emergencies .....216
jumping a disabled battery ....178
maintenance-free ....................216
replacement, specifications ...285
servicing ..................................216
Booster seats ...............................22
Brakes ........................................132
anti-lock ...................................132
anti-lock brake system (ABS)
warning light ...........................132
Index 437
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
brake warning light ................132
fluid, checking and adding ....214
fluid, refill capacities ..............280
fluid, specifications .................280
lubricant specifications ..........280
parking ....................................133
shift interlock ..........................129
trailer ...............................160–161
C
Capacities for refilling fluids ....280
CD ......................................296–297
CD player ..................................294
CD voice
commands .................376, 379–380
Cell phone use ............................15
Changing a tire .........................268
Child safety seats
automatic locking mode
(retractor) .................................38
LATCH .......................................28
tether anchorage hardware .....33
Child safety seats - booster
seats .............................................22
Cleaning the touchscreen ........358
Cleaning your vehicle ...............231
engine compartment ..............233
instrument panel ....................235
interior .....................................235
plastic parts ............................232
washing ....................................231
waxing .....................................233
wheels ......................................237
wiper blades ............................234
Climate control (see Air
conditioning or Heating) ......92–93
Clock ..................................296–297
Coolant ......................................202
checking and adding ..............202
refill capacities ........................280
specifications ..........................280
Creating a playlist .....................382
Cruise control ...........................144
Customer Assistance ................175
Ford Extended Service
Plan ..........................................291
Getting roadside assistance ...175
Getting the service you
need .........................................181
Ordering additional owner’s
literature .................................187
Utilizing the
Mediation/Arbitration
Program ...................................185
Customizing your home
screen ........................................356
D
Daytime running lamps
(see Lamps) ................................70
Defrost ...................................92–93
Dipstick
automatic transmission
fluid ..........................................207
engine oil .................................201
Drivebelt ....................................278
Driveline universal joint and
slip yoke ....................................214
Driving under special
conditions ..................................130
through water .........................172
E
Electronic message center .........84
438 Index
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Electronic stability control ......137
Emergencies, roadside
jump-starting ..........................178
running out of fuel .................117
Emergency Flashers .................177
Emission control system ..........120
End user license agreement ....408
Engine ........................................278
cleaning ...................................233
coolant .....................................202
fail-safe cooling .......................205
lubrication specifications .......280
refill capacities ........................280
service points ..........................201
Engine block heater .................113
Engine oil
checking and adding ..............201
dipstick ....................................201
filter, specifications ................285
refill capacities ........................280
specifications ..........................280
Event data recording ..................11
Exhaust fumes ..........................113
F
Fail safe cooling ........................205
Floor mats .................................173
Fluid capacities .........................280
Four-Wheel Drive vehicles
preparing to drive your
vehicle .....................................169
Fuel
cap ...........................................118
capacity ...................................280
choosing the right fuel ...........116
filler funnel .............................117
filling your vehicle with fuel ..118
filter, specifications ................215
fuel pump shut-off ..................177
octane rating ...................117, 278
quality ......................................116
running out of fuel .................117
safety information relating to
automotive fuels .....................115
Fuel - flex fuel vehicle
(FFV) .........................................116
Fuses ..........................189–190, 194
G
Gas cap (see Fuel cap) ............118
Gauges .........................................78
H
Hazard flashers .........................177
HD Radio™ ...............................366
Headlamps ...................................69
aiming ..............................221–222
bulb specifications ..................230
checking alignment ........221–222
daytime running lights .............70
flash to pass ..............................69
high beam .................................69
replacing bulbs .......................224
turning on and off ....................69
Head restraints ...........................98
Heating ..................................92–93
Hood ..........................................199
I
Ignition ...............................109, 278
Illuminated visor mirror .............77
Information displays ...................84
Index 439
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Inspection/maintenance (I/M)
testing ........................................123
Instrument panel
cleaning ...................................235
cluster ........................................79
J
Jack ............................................268
positioning ...............................268
storage .....................................268
Joining two calls
(multiparty/conference call) ....314
Jukebox features .......................380
Jump-starting your vehicle ......178
K
Keyless entry system
autolock .....................................60
Keys .............................................65
positions of the ignition .........109
L
Lamps ..........................................69
bulb replacement
specifications chart ................230
daytime running light ...............70
headlamps .................................69
headlamps, flash to pass ..........69
interior lamps ...........................71
replacing bulbs .......................224
LATCH anchors ...........................28
Lights, warning and indicator ....79
Loading instructions .................153
Loading pictures .......................357
Load limits .................................147
Locks
autolock .....................................60
doors ..........................................59
Lubricant specifications ...........280
Lug nuts ....................................276
M
Map icons ..................................402
Map mode ..................................401
Map updates ..............................405
Media Bluetooth menu options
(adding, connecting, deleting,
turning on/off) ..........................343
Message center ...........................84
system check button ................85
warning messages .....................89
Mirrors ...................................74, 76
fold away ...................................74
side view mirrors (power) .......74
Motorcraft® parts .............231, 285
N
Navigation end user license
agreement ..................................416
Navigation features ...................387
O
Octane rating ............................117
P
Pairing other phones ................311
Pairing your phone for the first
time ............................................310
Parking brake ............................133
440 Index
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Parts
(see Motorcraft® parts) ..........285
Phone Bluetooth menu options
(adding, connecting, deleting,
turning on/off) ..........................322
Phone redial ..............................316
Playing music (by artist,
album, genre, playlist, tracks,
similar) ......................................340
POI categories ...........................396
Point of Interest (POI) .............396
Power distribution box
(see Fuses) ...............................190
Power door locks ........................59
Power mirrors .............................74
Powerpoint ................................105
Power steering ..........................146
fluid, checking and adding ....215
fluid, refill capacity ................280
fluid, specifications .................280
Power Windows ...........................73
Preparing to drive your
vehicle ........................................169
Privacy information ..................307
Putting a call on/off hold .........314
Q
Quick touch buttons .................404
R
Radio ..................................296–297
Single CD ........................296–297
Radio reception .........................294
Radio voice commands .....364, 370
Rear view camera display ........139
Rear window defroster .........92–93
Receiving a text message .........318
Recommendations for
attaching safety restraints for
children ........................................24
Relays ................................189–190
Remote entry system
illuminated entry ......................61
locking/unlocking doors ...........59
replacing the batteries .............56
Reverse sensing system ...........139
Roadside assistance ..................175
Roll stability control .................137
S
Safety Belt Maintenance ............43
Safety belts
(see Safety restraints) ...............40
Safety defects, reporting ..........188
Safety information ....................306
Safety restraints ..............37–38, 40
Belt-Minder® ............................40
extension assembly ..................39
for adults .............................37–38
for children ...............................24
safety belt maintenance ...........43
seat belt maintenance ..............43
warning light and chime ..........40
Safety restraints - LATCH
anchors ........................................28
Safety seats for children ............24
Safety Compliance
Certification Label ....................286
Satellite Radio ...........................374
Index 441
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
Normal Scheduled
Maintenance and Log .............426
SD card ......................................387
Seats
child safety seats ......................24
front seats .........................98, 100
SecuriLock passive anti-theft
system ..........................................64
Selecting your media source
(USB, Line in, BT audio) .........337
Setting a destination ................387
Setting the clock ...............296–297
SIRIUS® satellite radio ....371, 387
SIRIUS satellite radio voice
commands .................................373
SIRIUS Travel Link ...................383
SOS Post Crash Alert .................45
Spark plugs,
specifications .....................278, 285
Special notice
ambulance conversions ............14
utility-type vehicles ..................14
Specification chart,
lubricants ...................................280
Stability system .........................137
Starting a flex fuel vehicle .......112
Starting your vehicle ........109, 112
jump starting ..........................178
Status bars ................................356
Steering wheel ............................67
tilting .........................................67
Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) (see airbags) ....................46
SYNC® AppLink™ ...................332
SYNC® customer support ........306
SYNC® Services ........................330
System overview .......................353
T
Temperature control
(see Climate control) ...........92–93
Text messaging .........................317
Text messaging (sending,
downloading, deleting) .....318, 320
Tilt steering wheel ......................67
Tires ...........................242–243, 268
alignment ................................258
care ..........................................242
changing ..........................268, 270
checking the pressure ............252
inflating ...................................250
label .........................................249
replacing ..........................256, 273
rotating ....................................259
safety practices .......................257
sidewall information ...............245
snow tires and chains ............260
spare tire .........................268–269
terminology .............................243
tire grades ...............................243
treadwear ........................242, 255
Towing ...............................154, 167
recreational towing .................168
Trailer Brake
Controller-Integrated ..............161
trailer towing ..........................154
wrecker ....................................167
Traction control ........................134
Traction-lok rear axle ...............131
Traffic, Directions and
Information ................................330
442 Index
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)
Trailer Brake
Controller-Integrated ................161
Transmission .............................124
brake-shift interlock (BSI) ....129
fluid, checking and adding
(automatic) .............................207
fluid, refill capacities ..............280
lubricant specifications ..........280
Troubleshooting ........................406
Turn signal ..................................71
U
Upfitter controls .......................290
USB port ....................................304
Using privacy mode ..................314
V
Vehicle health report ................328
Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) ..........................................285
Vehicle loading ..........................147
Ventilating your vehicle ...........113
Voice commands in media
mode ..........................................335
Voice commands in phone
mode ..........................................311
Voice recognition ......................358
W
Warning lights (see Lights) .......79
Washer fluid ..............................215
Water, Driving through .............172
Where am I? ..............................383
Windows
power .........................................73
Windshield washer fluid and
wipers ..........................................68
checking and adding fluid .....215
replacing wiper blades ...........219
Wrecker towing .........................167
Index 443
2013 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 3rd Printing, May 2013
USA (fus)

Navigation menu